Home

ADVANTEST U3741 U3751 U3771 U3772 Manual

1. 29 29 566 00 572 00 569 567 25 571 75 30 30 572 00 578 00 575 573 25 577 75 31 31 578 00 584 00 581 579 25 583 75 32 32 584 00 590 00 587 585 25 589 75 33 33 590 00 596 00 593 591 25 595 75 34 34 596 00 602 00 599 597 25 601 75 35 35 602 00 608 00 605 603 25 607 75 36 36 608 00 614 00 611 609 25 613 75 37 37 614 00 620 00 617 615 25 619 75 38 38 620 00 626 00 623 621 25 625 75 39 39 626 00 632 00 629 627 25 631 75 40 40 632 00 638 00 635 633 25 637 75 41 41 638 00 644 00 641 639 25 643 75 42 42 644 00 650 00 647 645 25 649 75 43 43 650 00 656 00 653 651 25 655 75 44 44 656 00 662 00 659 657 25 661 75 45 45 662 00 668 00 665 663 25 667 75 46 46 668 00 674 00 671 669 25 673 75 47 47 674 00 680 00 677 675 25 679 75 48 48 680 00 686 00 683 681 25 685 75 49 49 686 00 692 00 689 687 25 691 75 50 50 692 00 698 00 695 693 25 697 75 51 51 698 00 704 00 701 699 25 703 75 52 52 704 00 710 00 707 705 25 709 75 53 53 710 00 716 00 713 711 25 715 75 54 54 716 00 722 00 719 717 25 721 75 55 55 722 00 728 00 725 723 25 727 75 56 56 728 00 734 00 731 729 25 733 75 57 57 734 00 740 00 737 735 25 739 75 58 58 740 00 746 00 743 741 25 745 75 59 59 746 00 752 00 749 747 25 751 75 60 60 752 00 758 00 755 753 25 757 75 61 61 758 00 764 00 761 759 25 763 75 62 62 764 00 770 00 767 765 25 769 75 U37
2. p o Figure 4 10 Connecting CAL Signal RF INPUT2 connector 12 Press W select Press Hz to start calibration 03700 Series User s Guide 4 3 2 4 3 2 Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers This section describes how to display spectrums and use markers by using the CAL signal of this instru ment The level difference between the CAL signal and its second harmonics are measured as an example Required equipment This instrument Conversion adaptor N m BNC f Input cable BNC m BNC m Turning on the power supply IMPORTANT Use this instrument within a specified temperature range to perform accurate measurements Perform calibration after allowing a warm up time of 5 minutes or more 1 Verify that the AC power switch on the rear panel is set to OFF 2 Connect the included power cable to the AC power connector on the rear panel CAUTION To prevent damage do not supply a voltage and frequency which exceed the specified range to this instrument 3 Connect the power cable to an electrical outlet 4 Turnon AC power switch on the rear panel After turning on the AC
3. 3 2 3 2 Option ACCESS O11 6S bus oda 3 2 3 3 ACCESSORIES terere dee Facta Ree teo il Ee ee RE Eran E rd FERRE eS MEER HH DR 3 2 3 4 Power Requirement e 3 4 4 1 USB Memory Devices Whose Operation with this Instrument has Already Checked 4 29 5 1 Character allocation table ot E REESE ER e nace 5 22 6 1 GPIB Interface F nctiOns Ta NU 6 4 6 2 Connection of IOBASE T Cross over Cables 6 7 6 3 Connection of IOBASE T Straight Cables 6 7 6 4 Trace Point Specification Codes 6 63 6 5 Binary Data Output Format Specified Code 6 63 6 6 M 6 64 6 7 Absolute Value Output Format eiecti riter 6 65 8 1 OptIenS oot EE 8 1 8 2 8 2 9 1 Life 6 aty u 9 2 1 1 INTRODUCTION 03700 Series User s Guide 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the contents of this manual and the product overview of the U3700 series Spectrum Analyzer to help you get the most out of this manual 1 1 Contents of This Manual This manual can be used
4. 6 16 Status Register 6 13 Step CAD seen 5 7 5 11 ee 5 57 Stop CH Offset ON OFF 5 57 5 58 Stop CH ON OFF 5 57 5 58 STOTE P 5 7 5 11 5 43 5 46 Subsystem CALCulate 6 78 Subsystem CALibration 6 84 Subsystem CONFigure 6 85 Subsystem COUPle 6 85 Subsystem DISPlay 6 85 Subsystem FETch 6 89 Subsystem FORMat 6 90 Subsystem HCOPY 6 90 Subsystem INITiate 6 91 Subsystem INPut 6 91 Subsystem MMEMoty 6 91 Subsystem OUTPut 6 92 Subsystem READ 6 92 Subsystem SENSe 6 94 Subsystem SOURce 6 103 Subsystem SYSTem 6 103 Subsystem TRACe 6 104 Subsystem TRIGger 6 105 Subsystem UNIT 6 105 SUb Fact zc tote err sets 5 43 5 45 6 28 7 3 7 7 7 11 Sweep Mode SGL CNT 5 65 5 6
5. nasa 6 9 6 4 Message Exchanging Protocol 6 10 6 4 1 lui M 6 10 03700 Series User s Guide Table of Contents 6 4 2 Message Exchange MT TTD 6 10 6 5 Command SyntaX qt 6 11 6 5 1 Command Syntax n 6 11 6 5 2 Dara Formats mamana Sua asi Sua 6 12 6 5 3 Status Byle ereere eaae masa oe ce 6 13 6 6 GPIB Remote Programming 6 19 6 7 AT Command dK qe 6 19 6 8 AT Command List 6 24 6 8 1 V deperire psu pM EU Ar EEEE mua RAE RTN 6 24 6 8 2 6 26 6 8 3 jeu MM 6 27 6 8 4 sigo MT 6 28 6 8 5 6 26 6 8 6 Trace pronn E aE A HI 6 29 6 8 7 o 17 uuwuaahasahaaqaayaawaqhaahapushupaasaqhayasqaaqayaqasasapaqsashayasqaysayqa aqayaspuqau 6 32 6 8 8 Display 6 33 6 8 9 M rker T A S 6 34 6 8 10 Peak and Marker MOVE e 6 36 6 8 11 6 37 6 8
6. 3 9 3 5 OB eTatI nS SS E 3 10 4 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 4 1 4 Panel and Screen Descriptions osse peknssiisb R sdpp acier FRA 4 1 4 1 1 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Front Panel 4 1 41 2 Names and Functions of Each Part on Screen 4 7 4 1 3 Names and Functions of Each Part on Rear Panel 4 9 4 2 Basic qatapipas aaa apas k yasa 4 10 4 2 1 Menu Operation and Data Entry a 4 10 4 3 Basic Measurement Sa ua aasan 4 13 43 1 oca M ee 4 13 43 2 Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers 4 17 4 3 3 How to Cancel the UNCAL Message eene 4 22 4 3 4 Identifying an Image Signal RE 4 25 4 3 5 Hard Copy Output 4 27 4 3 5 1 Qutp t to 3 Printer uvasqa aan vac 4 27 4 3 5 2 File Output to USB Memory a 4 28 U3700 Series User s Guide Table of Contents 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG OPT76 OPT77 4 30 4 3 7 USER KEY cU P 4 36 44 Measurement Exam
7. 5 54 5 2 12 TG OpBH60 uu 5 55 5 2 13 FREQUENCY MM NM 5 57 5 2 14 SPAN unus ee 5 61 5 2 15 AMPLITUDE etel e ces Decal du UN MONT 5 62 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options 5 65 5 2 17 CPL Coupled function 5 casas 5 72 6 OVERVIEW OF REMOTE CONTROL 1 nnne 6 1 6 1 Remote Control enixa nU NEM MU M NN NA 6 1 6 1 1 Types of Systems 6 1 6 1 2 Selecting the Command Set M bata eei 6 1 6 2 GPIB Remote Control System nasa 6 2 6 2 1 What isthe GPIB semeni OR umo ba 6 2 6 2 2 Setting up the GPIB n nasa 6 3 6 2 3 GPIB B s F B600089 aun haah Don aa sand 6 4 6 2 3 1 GPIB Interface Functions n nn 6 4 6 2 3 2 Responses to Interface Messages a 6 4 6 3 LAN Remote Control System n 6 6 6 3 1 Setting up the LAN akaun EE EA 6 6 6 3 2 Setting the J 6 8 6 3 3 Control from a Controller
8. 6 29 Hei RR REOR 6 50 GTS WEE 6 29 LON HERI 6 50 GT WUD s apan aha 6 29 LETSP ES a teres 6 25 c 6 54 MO MKCS 6 37 HARM 6 40 MI MTGS 6 37 HARMNUM 6 40 M2 MKMKS 6 37 niet reds 6 50 eire erret 6 37 6 50 6 37 HRMEND 6 40 MDE2 e i u anay 6 36 HRMEND OFF ere 6 40 MDE 6 36 HRMEND 6 40 lt 2 pa aqa aqa wayaqa 6 35 6 27 MEL eire 6 35 6 54 MELEN 7 L au u RR RR 6 35 EE 6 52 hugo 6 35 IMQGSP sasanqua vai HUS 6 26 MELECS02 esee aa 6 36 IMLOAD 4 eren 6 40 MER 6 36 5 5 6 39 MIS EUR 6 38 IMESS 6 39 ME 6 35 IMLST 6 40 5 5 aqa kayaq aaa 6 39 IMLS asqa 6 40 MED u uu saa niee nearen 6 36 IMM ise esee 6 39 MKEST 6 36 IMMDE eere 6 39 MKMODE eren 6 36 IMMREE icti trt rene RUE 6 39 MKROB JI aaa aspa qa
9. Parameter out of range 9 7 9 8 03700 Series User s Guide 9 7 List of Error Messages 7 83 WARNING Frequency Reference Unlocked CAUTION An error may be displayed because of a hardware failure In this case contact Advantest 1 An error that occurred when the calibration was performed 2 error that was detected while the self test was performed 3 Others 03700 Series User s Guide 9 8 In Case of Difficulty Check the following basics before calling Advantest Description Warning 7 83 Frequency Reference Unlocked is displayed Is the Frequency Reference set to EXT 1 Set it to INT 2 If EXT is used as the Frequency Reference Is a frequency reference signal input to the REF IN con nector on the rear panel Is the input reference frequency equal to the reference frequency set in this instrument 9 8 In Case of Difficulty Operation SYSTEM Frequency Reference INT Ref Freq After the power is turned on the system does not boot up Is a USB memory key inserted Remove the USB memory key and then turn the power on again Any key input cannot be accepted Is the key lock set to ON Is the LOCK key lamp illuminated Set the key lock to OFF LOCK password x x x x Hz Hz Turning off and on the power is also recommended If you do not remember the User Password Perform the Initialization by using the GPIB The User Pass wor
10. 5 57 5 60 Formula 3 ON OFF 5 57 5 60 Free 5 65 5 66 Freq Input Mode CALC TABLE 5 57 5 58 Freq vs 5 66 5 70 Freq vs Time ON OFF 5 66 5 70 breq etre 5 66 5 70 FREQUENCY eee 5 57 Prequency neenon tnr 6 24 7 2 7 6 7 10 Frequency Correction ON OFF 5 7 5 11 Frequency Counter 5 36 5 40 Frequency Offset ON OFF 5 57 Frequency Pos 5 66 5 70 Frequency Reference 5 7 5 9 Frequency Reference INT EXT XTL 5 7 5 9 Frequency Zoom ON OFF 5 66 5 70 Front Panel a aa 4 1 Full Span eine mien 5 61 Functional Descriptions 5 7 FUNCTIONAL EXPLANATION 5 1 Fundamental ON OFF 5 36 5 40 G Gate Delay 5 65 5 67 Gate asa 5 65 5 67 Gated Sweep aaa aaa 5 65 5 67 Gated Sweep ON OFF 5 65 5 67 General Specifications 7 15 1055 7 GPIB 6 50 GPIB Address 5 7 5 10 GPIB Bus Functions 6 4 GPIB Interface Functions 6
11. 7 A 7 8 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control 6 54 7 12 B DL B CRM 5 43 5 46 Annotations ON OFF 44 2 5 7 5 9 Black and White 5 8 5 12 D 5 17 Blank ANNO NR 5 43 5 44 Arrangement of the three status registers 6 14 Buffers eicit 6 10 AT Command Index 6 19 AT Command List 6 24 ATI E cere 5 62 C ATT sss 5 62 Cabinet Cleaning 9 1 Attenuation 0 5 62 P 5 43 5 44 FG MMC HC 5 72 5 73 Calibrate ALL 5 7 5 11 Auto Inc Index 5 8 5 13 Calibration 2 4 13 5 7 Auto Inc ON OFF e 5 8 5 13 5 11 6 46 Auto name Index a 5 18 5 20 Calibration Corrections ON OFF 5 7 5 11 Auto Tune 5 61 Calibration F Int Ref 5 7 5 11 Auto name Radix 5 18 5 20 Capture Normz Data nes 5 55 AVerage 5 43 5 44 Carrier 5 26 5 31 5 45 5 32 Average Control 5 25 5 26 CATV 27 1 1 03700 Series User s Guide Alphabetical Index Caution when Connecting Peripherals Step Size AUTO MNL Ch Windows ON OFF Channel Definition Channel Channel Position
12. Channel Power eene Channel Width Channels Config Charging the Battery Cleaning l i eei eer eio ien ent Cleaning of Other Parts Clear uiii ect CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting Coarse Color Mode Color Gray Color Pattern 2 2 1 1 Command Reference Syntax Command Syntax 2 Common Commands Condition Register Config Config Driver Connecting DC Power Cable Contents of This Manual Context Context 2 1 Continuous Down ON OFF Continuous Peak ON OFF Control from a Controller Conventions of Notation Used in This Document osa E AE All to Flash Copy All to USB Copy 2 Copy Device FILE PRT Correction Factor ON OFF 1 2 Couple to Line 1 5 47 5 51 Couple to Line 2 OFF ABV BLW 5 47 5 51 Couple to Win OFF IN OUT 5 47 5 51 S 5 72 CPL Coupled function 5 72 D Data for
13. 5 47 5 48 5 72 5 73 Output to a Printer 4 27 N P NAEPIOW esconder dedi 5 72 5 73 Panel and Screen Descriptions 4 1 iore rete rrt 5 43 5 45 Paper Format eere 5 8 5 15 Next Bandi ec ceres 5 26 5 35 Parser 5 7 5 11 Next Min Peak 2 2 24 22 21 5 47 5 50 Pass Fail ceteri eS 6 32 5 52 Pass Fail Config 5 65 5 68 Next Pedo c sunak 5 47 5 50 Pass Fail ON OFF 5 36 5 39 Next Peak enses 5 47 5 50 5 65 5 68 Next Peak Right sess 5 47 5 50 Pause Png uy i e erp 5 37 5 42 INOISe HIZ i abs 5 36 5 37 PBW 5 7 5 11 HZ i c Ane 5 36 5 37 PEAK 5 50 e tiem eh heirs ete 5 43 5 45 Peak ocu nos iae IN 6 37 Normalize asa susan ies 5 55 Peak X dB Down 5 36 5 38 Normalize Correction ON OFF 5 55 Peak and Marker Move 6 36 Note when Turning on the Power 2 1 Peak Delta Y 5 37 5 41 Notes for Requesting Repair Replacement 5 47 5 50 of Parts and Periodic Calibration 9 3 Peak List Frequency 5 47 5 50 Nyq Roll Off Factor 5 26 5 31 5 5
14. OBW d Execute ON OFF Average Contrl gt On Trace A B C Channel Position Channel Width Default Conditions gt Execute ON OFF Average Control On Trace A B C Default Conditions Execute ON OFF Average Control Window Default Conditions U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Restore Defaults Save Defaults Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Restore Defaults Save Defaults Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Range FULL WIN Window Position Window Width Restore Defaults Execute ON OFF Average Control On Trace A B C OBW Default Conditions gt Save Defaults Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count L_ Average ONCE SLIDE Restore Defaults L Save Defaults U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List MEAS 1 2 ACP e 8 Execute ON OFF Average Control Mode FULL CARR Config Channel Definition Graph ON OFF Default Conditions Spectrum Emission f Execute ON OFF Spurious gt gt Config Bands Definition Default Conditions _ gt Average Control __________ Execute ON OFF On Trace A
15. 6 33 MPM re 6 36 6 33 6 37 M 6 33 MS MSEC 6 54 LMTBDELF 1 n 6 34 R H 6 37 LMTBDEELT 6 34 6 54 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 7 AT Command Index MW Qs 6 54 es 6 54 6 39 tocan 6 39 NIF h uwa 6 39 NIM anien 6 39 E 6 39 NIRES 4i sasana qatana bata 6 39 NIU 6 39 NORM nsns eiie PURSE 6 53 etie TERR a 6 54 INI ertet nona eee eU 6 54 6 38 6 38 ter RHET 6 38 8 0 4 ha 6 38 OBW 6 44 OBWLOAD 2 6 44 OBWON t a 6 44 OBWPER asss 6 44 OBWSAV E 6 44 OBWTM a s 6 44 OHM AAA 6 27 OPR 6 51 55 ete 6 51 OPTS 6 52 OPT20 stitit e 6 52 2 Sau dd das teen 6 52 0 hunu 6 52 as asqsqaqqasaqalasqahasihaqaykehtascis 6 52 OPT75 isi
16. Step M2 MKMKS MKRA Step 6 36 M3 MTMKS Output Format 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 11 Peak Function Peak Search Command EXE SET 6 8 11 Peak Query GET Code Argument Format Code Output Format Next Peak Next Peak Left Next Peak Right Min Search Next Min Peak Min Max Peak Continuous Peak ON OFF 0 OFF 1 ON Peak AY Div Level Div Level Div Peak List Frequency Level PLS FREQ PLS LEVEL X Peak Area Couple to Window MKSX OFF INJOUT X Peak Area Position MKSPOS Frequency Time MKSPOS Frequency Time X Peak Area Width MKSWID Frequency Time MKSWID Frequency Time Y Peak Area Couple to Display Line MKSYDL OFF ABOVE BELOW MKSYDL 2 OFF 0 ABOVE 1 BELOW Y Peak Area Couple to Limit Line 1 MKSYLA OFF ABOVE BELOW MKSYLA 2 OFF 0 ABOVE 1 BELOW Y Peak Area Couple to Limit Line 2 MKSYLB OFF ABOVE BELOW MKSYLB 2 OFF 0 ABOVE 1 BELOW 6 37 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 12 Measurement 6 8 12 Function Noise Measurement Command EXE SET Query GET Code Argument Format Frequency Code Output Format Frequency Noise ON dBm Hz Noise ON dBuV VHz Noise ON dBc Hz Noise OFF Noi
17. e Ed 6 52 OP ETO ua teen ied 6 52 PARSER REPE Rer 6 51 PEG emt ntes eS 6 33 PEJ OPE a 6 33 nde 6 37 PKREL S aaa ana qaqa rev ee 6 37 2 eret 6 26 PEEBW 6 28 PLS 0 6 38 PES LEVEL ettet eres 6 38 PMEASAVQ 2 6 43 PMEASAVGONCE 6 43 PMEASMODE eere 6 43 ua aaa 6 43 PMEASTM 4 eere 6 43 ere 6 43 eet 6 50 PPM m 6 54 PS PI 6 38 PSXDB 6 39 6 41 2 2 1 0 1406 6 44 2444 4 44111 6 44 2520 6 44 PWAVGRANGE siiin 6 44 PWAVGSAVE 6 44 12242 2 4 6 44 6 43 PWCHLOAD ets 6 43 PWCHON 6 43 PWCHPSD o acredita sedis 6 43 PWCHSAVE 6 43 PWCHTM 6 43 PWTOTAL 6 43 PWTOTALON 6 43 PWTOTALPSD 6 43 PWTOTALTM 6 43 PWTOTLOAD ossis 6 43 PWIOTSAVE tct conti cedes 6 43 6 47 QPI 6 47 QP2 6 47 d MER 6 47 nne 6 47 6 28 RC DAI 6 48 6 36 oss a aha damen 6 51 RENAM
18. LEE SLT EXT 3 ANITLNO 9y Jo oy osneo posn pue s onpoid au Jo eu1ojxo SMOYS 8 811 ALON 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ofa S ogo 929090909090 go oco 50 050202929290900690 0909900090909009 0000000000002000 LEE SLT EXT 4 U3741 U3751 U3771 U3772 QUICK GUIDE For Basic Operation es Data input can be done by step keys data knob or numeric keys Press a unit key for entering 0 e me m Data setting CH us Center frequency setting Frequency span setting Data setting Reference level setting Start Stop FREQUENCY gt Data setting FREQUENCY Data setting frequency setting Frequency and level setting Start frequency setting Stop frequency setting 1 Resolution ROW p Data setting bandwidth setting AUTO gl ect the Manual mode Basic operation z Video Data setting bandwidth setting puro ERES Select the Manual mode Sweep time Sweep Time e Data setting TO EH setting Select the Man
19. ner na 6 50 TO reann nne M 6 53 SETTIMB 6 52 TGDLTRLN eei 6 53 SEM usun HR 6 41 sic OT 6 53 SG ech eret ERE TET 6 36 TOD de 6 53 SOY 9 6 36 a oe 6 53 SGY OBE aa aun a 6 36 innocentes 6 53 SGY ON 6 36 6 53 SIISNGES 6 29 nter eren 6 53 nter e rre 6 26 TIN 6 26 SNIGON TS i e rrt reete 6 29 eorr rens 6 31 SOP 6 41 ets aces 6 31 SON Gennio HERE 6 41 6 32 DOP iets 6 25 TRGDDY 6 29 SPRFDBL 6 46 6 29 SPRIN SPRFIN 6 46 6 29 SPRTB G 6 46 TRGSRG n iore 6 29 SPURI 6 45 6 46 TRGTTLUVL a a a uwa Qua 6 29 J 6 29 TRSUB e 6 31 STORE ottiene 6 31 MSs 6 29 SUPIP unas ees ess 6 51 US USEG rnaro aani 6 54 6 48 UN 6 54 SVACP niei qaa 6 49
20. Det Avg Mode RMS Video Detector Display List ON OFF Display REL ABL ABR Each Item EMC Filter ON OFF Execute ON OFF Execute Self Test Execute X dB Down 03700 Series User s Guide Execute X dB Left 5 36 Execute X dB Right 5 36 EXT CEG 5 65 Ext Trigger Level 5 65 Exterhal q qq 5 65 Factory 5 8 FILE 5 18 File Control eee 5 8 5 18 File Format BIN XML 5 18 File Format PNG BMP 5 8 lan cm TEN 5 7 Fixed Mkr ON OFF 5 47 FM eene eene enne 5 37 Format sana 5 8 Format Media 5 18 Formula 1 ON OFF 5 57 Formula 2 ON OFF 5 57 Formula 3 ON OFF 5 57 Free 5 65 Freq Input Mode CALC TABLE 5 57 Freq vs 5 66 Freq vs Time ON OFF 5 66 Freq 2000 eee 5 66 FREQUENCY 5 57 Frequency Correction ON OFF 5 7 Frequency Counter 5 36 Frequency Offset ON OFF 5 57 Frequency
21. Freq Zoom Window Width Freq vs Time Graphic Zoom 2 ON OFF Time vs Time Window Position Reset Context Window Width Context A B L Frequency Zoom ON OFF Zoom Position Zoom Width Context A B L Freq vs Time ON OFF Frequency Pos Context A B RBW AUTO MNL VBW AUTO MNL Sweep Time AUTO MNL EMC Filter ON OFF Auto RBW Auto L More 1 2 RBW 200 Hz RBW 9 kHz SPAN RBW ON OFF RBW 120 kHz VBW RBW ON OFF RBW 1 MHZ PLL BW Auto Medium Narrow 03700 Series User s Guide A 6 TV Channel Table Japan A 6 TV Channel Table Japan 61 Channel Number and Frequency Analyzer s 1 Center frequency Picture frequency Sound frequency channel MHz MHz MHz MHz 1 1 90 00 96 00 93 91 25 95 75 2 2 96 00 102 00 99 97 25 101 75 3 3 102 00 108 00 105 103 25 107 75 4 4 170 00 176 00 173 171 25 175 75 5 5 176 00 182 00 179 177 25 181 75 6 6 182 00 188 00 185 183 25 187 75 7 7 188 00 194 00 191 189 25 193 75 8 8 192 00 198 00 195 193 25 197 75 9 9 198 00 204 00 201 199 25 203 75 10 10 204 00 210 00 207 205 25 209 75 11 11 210 00 216 00 213 211 25 215 75 12 12 216 00 222 00 219 217 25 221 75 13 CI3 108 00 114 00 111 109 25 113 25 14 14 114 00 120 00 117 115 25 119 75 15 5 120 00 126 00 123 121 25 12
22. As Integer sep2 As Integer Dim i As Integer j As Integer Dim cnt As Integer Dim LvlH As String LvlL As String Dim FrgH As String FrqL As String Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa SI Sets the single mode Call ibwrt spa CF 1500MZ Sets the center frequency to 1500 MHz Call ibwrt spa SP 250KZ Sets the frequency span to 250 kHz Call ibwrt spa RB 1KZ Sets RBW to 1 kHz Call ibwrt spa VB 3KZ Sets VBW to 3 kHz Call ibwrt spa ST 20SC Sets the sweep time to 20 sec Call ibwrt spa CSBSDEL Clears the channel space and bandwidth previously set Call ibwrt spa CSBSIN 50KZ 21KZ Sets CS to 50 kHz and BS to 21 kHz Call ibwrt spa ACP ON Starts the ACP measurement For j 1 To 10 Step 1 Call ibwrt spa TS Executes one sweep Call ibwrt spa ACP Requests the result of the ACP measurement Rdbuff Space 3 Assigns 1 byte for an integer and 2 bytes for a delimiter before reading the result Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Reads the data cnt CInt Rdbuff Converts the contents of the buffer into integers For i 1 To cnt Step 1 Rdbuff Space 81 Assigns an area of 81 bytes Real number x 4 x 3 CRLF Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Reads the data sepl InStr 1 Rdbuff 0 Searches for the first comma starting from the top of the buffer FrgL Left Rdbuff 1 Reads the string between the top and t
23. Ref Disp Lanes Reference Line teretes Refresh cocer erroe Refresh Write Remote Control Remove File Removing the Rename File needs Report HIDE SHOW Reset Context 222 0 02 09 4 4 Resolution 1 kHz Resolution 10 Hz Resolution 100 Hz Responses to Interface Messages Restore Defaults 1 6 Root Nyquist Filter Round Grid Values ON OFF Setting the IP Address Setting up the GPIB Setting up the LAN Show Mask ON OFF Show ON OFF Signal Identification ON OFF Signal Track ON OFF Slide Screen ON OFF Slope NEG POS SPECIFICATIONS Spectrum Analyzer Spectrum Emission 5 29 5 30 5 32 5 34 5 35 5 36 5 39 5 26 5 35 5 5 62 5 64 5 43 5 45 03700 Series User s Guide Spectrum once 5 17 SpU rlous nien hen n 5 25 5 34 Standard Event Register 6 18 Standard Operation Status Register 6 16 Nj pp ues 5 57 Start CH Offset ON OFF 5 57 5 58 Start CH ON OFF 5 57 5 58 Status Byte ssr sana 6 13 6 71 Status Byte Register
24. 30 00 40 00 RBW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 dB Figure 4 14 Displaying the Peak Search Displaying a delta marker 14 15 Press MKR The Marker menu used for the marker function is displayed Press 4 Delta Mode Press 1 Delta ON OFF The delta marker is displayed and the frequency difference and level difference between the marker and delta marker are displayed in the marker area MKA 0 Hz 0 00 dB Press 2 0 and MHz The active marker is displayed on the second harmonics which is 20 MHz away from the CAL signal The differences of frequency and level between two signals are displayed in the marker area MKA 20 00 MHz 52 21 dB 03700 Series User s Guide 4 3 2 Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers REF 10 00 dBm 20 00 MHz 10 0 dB 52 21 I DELTA MARKER 20 00 MHz 3 Fixed Mkr 1 Mkr 100 110 30 00 40 00 RBW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 dB Figure 4 15 Measuring the Difference of Frequency and Level by Using the Delta Marker 4 21 03700 Series User s Guide 4 3 3 How to Cancel the UNCAL Message 4 3 3 4 22 How to Cancel the UNCAL Message The setting among the resolution bandwidth RBW video bandwidth VB W frequency span Span and sweep time Sweep Time affect to each other If the combination of these settings in the manual se
25. press Hz Obtaining the IP Address Automatically Enter a check mark into the Obtain an IP address automatically check box Network Setting v Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Click the Apply button and press Hz 113700 Series User s Guide 6 3 3 6 3 3 Control from a Controller After an IP address is obtained the IP address 15 displayed in the window Network Setting Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP Adress Use the following IP address Control from a Controller To control this instrument from an external controller a port number for socket communication is required The port number 5025 is assigned for socket communication in the remote state in this instrument To write a program for socket communication a library for network connection with the TCP IP protocol is required The library differs depending on the environment such as the OS of the external controller In the Windows OS environment for example WinSock is provided After completing the network connection with this instrument send the REN command to this instru ment to enable the remote control At this time the remote lamp on the front panel of this instrument is on After that this instrument can be remotely controlled by sending the same commands as the GPIB Some of the functions available in the GPIB remote control system are specific to the GPIB bus such as service requests a
26. 5 66 Frequency Reference 5 7 Frequency Reference INT EXT XTL 5 7 Frequency Zoom ON OFF 5 66 F ll Span 5 61 Fundamental ON OFF 5 36 Gate Delay ios eee 5 65 Gate Width 5 65 Gated Sweep 5 65 Gated Sweep ON OFF 5 65 GPIB Address 5 7 Graph ON OFF eer 5 26 Graphis sise ecrire 5 66 Graphic Z 1 Screen 5 66 Graphic Z 2 Screens 5 66 Graphic Zoom 1 ON OFF 5 66 Graphic Zoom 2 ON OFF 5 66 Harmonic 2 5 36 Harmonic Max Order 5 36 High Sensitivity ON OFF 5 62 IE Sanu 5 65 Image Suppression ON OFF 5 57 Init Table tese emen 5 26 5 60 5 31 5 Menu Index Input and Output Input Impedance 50 75 Insert Insert Lite nnne neetteteetetes Winter erectio meros Level Limit 000 etiem Limit Lines Limit Line 1 ABV BLW Mat uu a su D GER REOR REND anu MEAS 1 MEAS Measuring Window Media 03700 Seri
27. ADVANTEST ADVANTEST CORPORATION U3700 Series User s Guide MANUAL NUMBER FOE 8440185H00 Applicable Models U3741 U3751 U3771 U3772 C 2004 ADVANTEST CORPORATION First printing November 20 2004 All rights reserved Printed in Japan Certificate of Conformity C Spectrum Analyzer This is to certify that U3700 Series instrument type designation complies with the provisions of the EMC Directive 89 336 of these factors are revised by 91 263 92 31 93 68 accordance with EN61326 and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC All of these factors are revised by 93 68 in accordance with EN61010 ADVANTEST Corp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Tokyo Japan Europe GmbH Munich Germany 3700 05 CR BOO AEA pJ BERE hr Y Ht Bn nyo edo h This document is made for Chinese Administration Control of Pollution Caused by Electronic formation Products unofficially called China RoHS xk PHO OLOOKETT 191 U3741 U3751 U3771 U3772 m ir RY m 1 mi nn Ta pH SET SEMI J BT SEG S XR jt 22 TV OM Cr VD AN 5 E M
28. Restore Last Span Setting SENSe 1 FREQuency SPAN PREVious Context index Set Span to Zero Span Time Domain SENSe 1 FREQuency SPAN ZERO Context index Set Start Frequency SENSe 1 FREQuency STARt 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency STARt Context index Frequency Frequency 6 95 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Set Stop Frequency SCPI command SENSe 1 FREQuency STOP 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency STOP Parameter Context index Frequency Query reply Frequency Remarks Set Input Attenuation SENSe 1 PO Wer RF ATTenuation 2 1 SENSe 1 POWer RF ATTenuation Context index Relative amplitude Relative amplitude Enable Attenuation Auto SENSe 1 PO Wer RF ATTenuation AUTO 2 1 SENSe 1 POWer RF ATTenuation AUTO Context index Set Minimum Attenuation SENSe 1 PO Wer RF ATTenuation MINimum 2 1 SENSe 1 POWer RF ATTenuation MINimum Context index Relative amplitude Relative amplitude Enable High Sensitivity SENSe 1 PO Wer RF GAIN STATe 2 1 SENSe 1 POWer RF GAIN STATe Context index Set Sweep Time SENSe 1 SWEep TIME 22 1 SENSe 1 SWEep TIME Context index Time Enable Sweep Time Auto Coupling SENSe 1 SWEep TIME AUTO 22 1 SENSe 1 SWEep TIME AUT
29. 6 Press TG Normalize Capture Normz Data and Normalize Correction ON OFF ON 7 Connect TG OUTPUT and RF INPUTI by using a cable that is actually used for this measurement The frequency characteristic of the cable used in the measurement is displayed 8388 o i 4 38 8 9 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 Using the Normalize Function and Level Correction Table REF 0 00 dBm 10 0 dB SPAN o 3 000 GHz 20 100 1 500 GHz RBW 3 VBW 3 MHz TG Normz 1 Normz Data 3 Normalize Correction 6 Ref Line ON OFF 7 Reference Line ON OFF Press MKR Delta Mode Delta ON OFF ON Ref Object and Reference Line The marker delta mode is set The marker value shows a cable loss based on a frequency of 20 MHz REF 0 00 dBm 10 0 dB MARKER 2 100 GHz 10 100 1 500 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz Marker detect Marker Move the marker and read a cable loss for each frequency For this measurement 10 frequency points from 300 MHz to 3 GHz are used 4 39 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 1 Using the Normalize Function and Level Correction Table Creating the correction table 10 11 12 13 4 40 Press AMPLITUDE More 1 2 Edit Corr Factor The Correction Factor
30. CF Step Auto CA ON OFF 0 OFF manual 1 ON auto Frequency Offset ON FO ON OFF Frequency Frequency 0 OFF 1 ON Start Frequency FA Frequency Frequency Stop Frequency FB Frequency Frequency Frequency Span SP Frequency Frequency Full Span FS Zero Span ZS Last Span LTSP LS Frequency Setting Mode FINPMD CALC TBL FINPMD 0 CALC 1 TBL Set Start Channel Offset FACHO Frequency FACHO Frequency Set Stop Channel Offset FBCHO Frequency FBCHO Frequency Start Channel Offset FACHOON ON OFF FACHOON 0 OFF 1 ON Stop Channel Offset FBCHOON ON OFF FBCHOON 0 OFF 1 ON Set Center Channel Set ting CFCH Integer CFCH Integer Channel Number Set Start Channel Setting FACH Integer FACH Integer Channel Number Set Stop Channel Setting FBCH Integer FBCH Integer Channel Number Center Channel Setting CFCHON ON OFF CFCHON 0 OFF 1 ON Start Channel Setting 6 24 FACHON ON OFF FACHON 0 OFF 1 ON 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 1 Frequency Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Stop Channel Setting FBCHON 0 OFF 1 ON Channel Type 1 I
31. SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STARt STATe Context index Enable Stop Channel Frequency Offset SENSez1 FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STOP S TATe 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STOP S TATe Context index Set Start Channel SENSez1 FREQuency CHANnel STARt 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel STARt Context index Channel number Channel number Enable Setting Start Frequency as Channel SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel STARt STATe 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel STARt STATe Context index Set Stop Channel SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel STOP 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel STOP Context index Channel number Channel number Enable Setting Stop Frequency as Channel SENSez1 FREQuency CHANnel STOP STATe 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel STOP STATe Context index ON OFF Enable Image Identification Mode SENSe 1 FREQuency IMIDentify STATe 22 SENSe 1 FREQuency IMIDentify S TATe Context index Enable Image Suppression Mode SENSe 1 FREQuency MSUppression S TATe 22 SENSe 1 FREQuency MSUppression S TATe Context index Set Frequency Span SENSe 1 FREQuency SPAN 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency SPAN Context index Frequency Frequency Set Span to Full Span SENSe 1 FREQuency SPAN FULL Context index
32. 7 6 7 42 CI 7 7 7 2 3 neue 7 1 7 2 4 Amplitude osse rupti QD eit healer eens 7 8 7 2 5 Dy ami ATT Ne cnc u 7 8 7 2 6 Input and Ta Moe d Mad 7 9 7 3 U3771 U3772 Performance Specifications 7 10 7 3 1 Mo 7 10 7 3 2 tardo e nears T 7 11 7 3 3 Eundem 7 11 7 3 4 Amplitude Accuracy AN Tp 7 12 7 3 5 Dynamic Range aa ede ewe 7 13 7 3 6 Input and Output 7 14 7 4 General SpecIficatI nS 7 15 7 5 7 16 7 5 1 Option 10 2 Channel Input Option Can be Installed only in the U3741 7 16 7 5 2 Option ATO Mm 7 17 7 5 3 Option 20 High Stability Frequency Reference 7 18 7 5 4 Option 28 EMO Filter EE c 7 19 7 5 5 Option 53 Time Domain Analysis Option 7 19 7 5 6 Option 70 High C N MC S 7 19 7 5 7 Option 75 75 Q Tracking Generator 7 21 4 03700 Series User s Guide Table of Contents 7 5 8 Option 76 Tracking Generator a 7 5 9 Option 77 6 GHz Tracking Generator 8
33. Displays the data on the screen An example display Marker Freq Level 2 000000000000 05 1 023437500000 00 6 59 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control 6 60 Example 5 Measuring OBW and displaying it Dim LENG1 As Integer LENG2 As Integer Dim OBW As String Dim FC As String Dim searchchar As String Call ibclr spa Call ibwrt spa CF 30MZ Call ibwrt spa SP 1MZ Call ibwrt spa MLN ON Call ibwrt spa MK 30MZ Call ibwrt spa OBWON ON Call ibwrt spa TS Call ibwrt spa OBW Rdbuff Space 60 Call ibrd spa Rdbuff FC Mid Rdbuff 1 LENG1 1 DoEvents Performs a device clear Sends the command already set Marker ON Sends the query command Allocates the area to the read buffer Reads the read buffer the maximum number of bytes to be output is determined by the buffer area size Formatting output character string LENG1 InStr 1 Rdbuff Chr 44 0 Searches for the first comma Reads the character before the comma LENG2 InStr LENG1 1 Rdbuff Chr 13 0 Determines the last data by searching for the r delimiter OBW Mid Rdbuff LENG1 1 LENG2 LENG1 1 Reads the data between the second comma and the delimiter 1 OBW amp OBW 6 vbCrLf amp FC amp vbCrLf An example display OBW 9 810000000000E 05 3 000
34. SEMSAVE SEM restore setup SEMLOAD SEM Band Table Input SEMTIN k ok ok k k Ok k k 7 7 3 7 Frequency start Frequency stop Frequency ibw dB limit abs start dB limit abs stop dB limit rel start dB limit rel stop ABS REL A AND R A OR R judge SEM Band Table Delete SEMTDEL SEM Reference Power SEMRFPOW dBm SEM Measurement Value SEM Channel Number Start Frequency Stop Frequency Frequency Absolute Power Relative Power Judge Spurious Measurement Execution 6 44 SPURI ON FREQ OFF SPURION 0 OFF 1 ON 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 14 Power Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format SPU Measurement Result n lt DLM gt m1 lt DL M gt fl 11 jl1 lt DLM gt 101 jm1 lt DLM gt m2 lt D LMbfl jl1 lt DLM gt fm2 Im2 jm2 lt DLM gt mn lt DLM gt fl 1 lt gt fmn jmn lt DLM gt 2 SPU Table Selection SPRTBL Integer 0 1 2 SPRTBL Integer 0 1 2 SPU Table Input Freq SPRIN SPRFIN Freq start Freq stop AUTO Freq rbw AUTO Freq vbw AUTO Time swp Level ref level AUTO Level att ONJ OFF preamp Level Limit SPU Freq Table Deletion SPRFDEL 1 Number of points 0 thru 5 fnL nth frequency Low InL nth level Low fnH nth frequenc
35. Save Current Settings for Channel Power SENSe CHPower DATA SAVE Select Channel Power Trace SENSe CHPower TRACe 1 1 SENSe CHPower TRACe Trace index Trace index Set Measuring Window Position Channel Power SENSe CHPower WINDow POSition 1 1 SENSe CHPower WINDow POSition Frequency Frequency Set Measuring Window Width Channel Power SENSe CHPower WINDow WIDTh 1 1 SENSe CHPower WINDow WIDTh Frequency Frequency Insert New Correction Factor Ver tex SENSe CORRection CSET DATA 1 X coordinate of table point Frequency ordinate of table point Relative amplitude Delete Correction Factor Table SENSe CORRection CSET DELete Enable User Correction Factor SENSe CORRection CSET STATe 1 1 SENSe CORRection CSET STATe ON OFF Set Input Impedance 6 98 SENSe CORRection IMPedance INPut MAGNitude 1 1 SENSe CORRection IMPedance INPut MAGNitude Input impedance Input impedance 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description SCPI command Parameter Remarks Query reply Define Channel Formula Parame SENSe FREQuency CHANnel ters FORMula 22 Integer Minimum Channel Channel number Maximum Channel Channel number Origin Frequency Frequency Channel Spacing Frequency Channel Offset Channel number CALCulate TABLe
36. Enable Saving Spurious Tables MMEMory ITEM SPURious 1 2 1 MMEMory ITEM SPURious 1 Spurious Table Index ONJOFF Enable Saving Trace Data MMEMory ITEM WINDow 1 TRACe 2 3 1 MMEMory ITEM WINDow 1 TRACe 2 Context index Trace index ON OFF Enable Normalize Data MMEMory ITEM WINDow H TRACe 2 NRMalize 3 1 MMEMory ITEM WINDow 1 TRACe 2 NRMalize Context index Trace index ON OFF Recall Information from a File MMEMory LOAD ITEMs 1 File name Set File Media MMEMory MEDIA 1 1 MMEMory MEDIA FLASh USB FLAS USB 6 91 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Rename File SCPI command MMEMory MOVE 1 02 Parameter Query reply Source filename String Destination file name String Remarks Save File Save File AS MMEMory STORe ITEMs MMEMory STORe ITEMs 1 Synchronize File to Media MMEMory SYNChronize 1 FLASh USB FLAS USB Enable File Write Protection MMEMory WLOCK STATe 1 2 File name String Write protect enable ON OFF Get BMP PNG Screen Image MMEMory DUMP 1 BMP PNG Binary stream Get Data File MMEMory DATA 91 String file name Binary stream Get Screen Image File 6 10 3 12 MMEMory IMAGe 1 Subsystem OUTPut String file name Binary stream Enable Tracking Generat
37. FM 0 OFF 1 ON AM 2 ON FM Sound Volume Integer Integer Demodulation Time 53 tion value 4 6 40 Time Time Sets the Modulation Frequency to Sweep Time mode to ON and then sets an FM frequency devia Sets an FM frequency deviation value without setting the Modulation Frequency to Sweep Time mode to ON 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 13 Counter 6 8 13 Counter Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Resolution 1 kHz Resolution 100 Hz Resolution 10 Hz Resolution 1 Hz Resolution Query 7 0 1kHz 100 Hz 2 10Hz 3 1 Hz Counter Position CNPOS Frequency CNPOS Frequency Counter Position Auto CNPOSA ON OFF CNPOSA 0 OFF Position Linked to Marker 1 ON Counter COUNT ON OFF COUNT 0 OFF 1 ON Counter Value CNRES Frequency 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 14 Power 6 8 14 Power Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Measure Mode PMEASMODE 10 OFF 1 CHPOW 2 TOTPOW 3 AVGPOW 4 OBW 5 6 SEM 7 SPU Measure OFF PMEASOFF Measure Averaging PMEASAVG PMEASAVG 10 1 ON PMEASAVGONCE ONCE MULT PMEASAVGON 0 ONCE 1 MULT Measure Averaging Times PMEASTM Integer Measure Trace
38. Query GET Code DUALCH Argument Format ON OFF Code DUALCH Output Format 2 Channel Preset 6 8 9 Marker lt gt 0 112 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 DUALCHINIT NOTE Marker 0 is the reference marker Function All Markers Off Command EXE SET Query GET Code MO MKOFF Argument Format Output Format All Markers Off Except Active Marker MLTOFF Select Active Marker MKRSEL MKRSEL Active Marker ON OFF MLN ON OFF MLN 0 OFF 1 ON Marker ON OFF MLN lt n gt ON OFF MLN lt n gt 0 OFF 1 ON Active Marker Frequency Frequency Time MK MF Frequency Time Marker Frequency Frequency Time MF lt n gt Frequency Time Active Marker Level ML Level Marker Level ML lt n gt Level Active Marker Freq Lev MFL Frequency Time Level Marker Freq Lev MFL lt n gt Frequency Time Level Active Marker Num Stauts Freq Lev 6 34 MFLC Marker Number Status 1 ON 0 OFF Frequency Time Level Function Command EXE SET U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 9 Marker Query GET Code Argument Format Code Output Format MarkerNum Stauts MFLC lt n gt Marker Number Freq Lev Status 1 ON 0 OFF Frequency Time Level
39. Select Channel Setting Mode SENSe FREQuency CHANnel CALC TABL MODE 1 1 SENSe FREQuency CHANnel MODE Set Start Channel Frequency Offset SENSe FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STARt 1 1 SENSe FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STARt Frequency Frequency Set Stop Channel Frequency Offset SENSe FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STOP 1 1 SENSe FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STOP Frequency Frequency Insert New Channel Into Channel Table SENSe FREQuency CHANnel TABLe DATA 01 Channel Channel number Frequency Frequency Delete Channel Table SENSe FREQuency CHANnel TABLe DELete Query Current Measurement Func tion 1 SENSe FUNCtion NORMIACP HARMIIM OBW SEM SPUR TOTP XDB DBMH DBUH DBCH SG AM FM Auto tune SENSe TUNE AUTO Peak Zoom SENSe FREQuency SPAN ZOOM Set Harmonics Maximum Sweep Count SENSe HARMonics AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe HARMonics AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set Harmonics Averaging Control Mode SENSe HARMonics AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe HARMonics AVERage 1 ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Enable Harmonics Averaging SENSe HARMonics AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe HARMonics AVERage STATe ON OFF Set User Defined Harmonics Fun damental Frequency SENSe HARMonics FUNDamental 1 1 SENSe H
40. Select the ON mode Resolution Select a resolution 10 Hz Resolution 1 Hz U3741 U3751 U3771 U3772 QUICK GUIDE SAVE file format 7 4 setting More 12 gt om BIN Binary dat FERRE XML Extensible Markup Language xml Selectthe BIN or XML mode Data Files Media SAVE or RECALL Sue 2 4 Analyzer Memory Flash rune Memory Hash Media setting 0 USB Device 13 6 124 5 Select Data Files Media Items SAVE Items setting Setup Traces c Traces Context B B Limit Lines Channel L on ACP on SEM on L o Spurious O l l lt 9 ul gt lt Factor Select SAVE Items SAVE execute Media USB Device 0 Partition 0 13 4 Free 7 124 5 Files File Info fus00 dat RECALL execute File Hame 000 dat A gt F w ON Choose a recall file with the data knob FEES iode and press a unit key Traces Context B OA OB Limit Lines Channel Move a cursor to point with nd UP DN keys and press a unit key SEM File name Tus00 dat GUIDE 3 U3741 U3751 U3771 U3772 QUICK GUIDE Case of output to USB memory copy Device FILE Dumped to a USB memory
41. f 1 2 0 1 2T5 03700 Series User s Guide 2 2 Root Nyquist Filter The characteristics of the root Nyquist filter are shown below n Figure A 3 Characteristics of the Root Nyquist Filter A 6 03700 Series User s Guide A 3 A 3 Glossary Glossary Resolution Bandwidth The spectrum analyzer uses the band pass filter BPF to analyze certain frequencies in the input signal The 3 dB bandwidth of the BPF is called the resolution bandwidth See Figure A 4 The BPF characteristics should be set according to the sweep width and the sweep speed used for the trace This spectrum analyzer sets the optimal value for the sweep width In general smaller bandwidths improve resolution and the resolution of the spectrum analyzer should be expressed by using the narrowest resolution bandwidth See Figure A 4 b below RBW resolution bandwidth RBW RBW Signal spacing 3 dB RBW lt Signal spacing Resolution bandwidth Resolution a b Figure A 4 Resolution Bandwidth IF Gain Uncertainty The uppermost scale on the screen is the reference used to read the absolute level of an input signal on the spectrum analyzer The level set for this uppermost scale is referred to as the reference level The reference level is set using the Ref Level key and displayed in dBm or dBu The absolute accuracy of this display is determined by the IF gain uncertainty assuming the input attenuator is
42. res res Str tr i 6 vbCrLf Displays the data on the screen DoEvents Next i RichTextBoxl Text res Call ibwrt Spa DLIMO Sets the delimiter to the CR LF and EOI Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 1 6 9 1 5 Example Program for Screen Image Output Example 1 Example 2 Outputs a current screen image as bitmap data and writes it to a file Data which is approximately 150 KB for the BMP format or approximately 5 KB for the PNG format 15 output Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa DLIM2 Sets a delimiter to EOI only Call ibwrt spa BMP Requests bitmap data output Call ibrdf spa bitmap bmp Writes bitmap data to a file Call ibwrt spa DLIMO Returns delimiter setting to CR LF and EOI Writes a screen image that is copied into a USB memory to a file Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa DLIM2 Sets a delimiter to EOI only Call ibwrt spa GIMAG copy003 bmp Specifies a screen image name and requests its output Call ibrdf spa copy003 bmp Writes a screen image to a file Call ibwrt spa DLIMO Returns delimiter setting to CR LF and EOI 6 69 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control 6 9 1 6 Example Program Which Uses the TS Take Sweep Command Example 1 An ACP measurement is taken and then the measurement result is read using the TS com mand Dim state As Integer Dim
43. 0 1 1 gt amp 4 1 1 y nl amp 4 1 gt p n gt lt lt n Y Y p Summary Condition Register The condition register is always monitoring the status of this Instrument That is this register always retains the latest status of this Instrument However data cannot be both written into and read from the condition register because the condition register retains data as internal information b Event Register The event register latches and retains statuses from the condition register or retains changes Once this register is set the setting value is kept until it is read by a query or cleared by CLS Data cannot be written into the event register c Enable Register The enable register specifies which bit in the event register is set as an effective status to generate a summary The enable register is ANDed with the event register and the OR of the result is generated as a summary The summary is written into the status byte register Data can be written into the enable register This instrument uses the following three types of status registers Status byte register Standard event register Standard operation status register The arrangement of the status register in this instrument is shown in Figure 6 4 The details of the status register are shown in Figure 6 5 6 13 03700 Series User s Guide 6 5 3 Status Byte Standard operation Standard event Output status regist
44. 1915 75 1950 25 1955 75 1990 25 1995 75 2030 25 2035 75 2070 25 ONIMVUG ANITLNO 9y JO oy 8uguo osneo posn suondo pue s onpoid ut au Jo eu1ojxo SMOYS 8 811 ALON LEE SLT 1 jueumsut JO oy osneo posn suondo pue sjonpoud ML juoumnsut sr Jo sous 8141 ALON 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 90 9o 95995909059 0595 go 5 050505050595959506 2802000993909095 00920959595909090 50050950595929696 MEARE Ae 808 LEE SLT EXT 2 ANITLNO ILLEN 9y JO oy 8uguo osneo posn suondo pue s onpoid ut au Jo eu1ojxo SMOYS 8 811 ALON
45. 41 00 dBm 13 00 dBm Default Conditions 11 Press Results Measurement results in each frequency band are displayed Spr Results Spurious Measure Results Table No 1 1 vious Measure Conditions Judge Band Band 1 Start Frequency 30 000000 MHz Stop Frequency Resolution BW Video BW Sweep Time Limit No 1 Spurious Frequency 999 030000 MHz 1 000000000 GHz 100 000 kHz 100 000 kHz 190 000 ms 13 00 dBm Spurious Level 64 66 dBm Judge 03700 Series User s Guide 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting The difference CN ratio between a carrier level C and noise level N in terrestrial digital broadcasting 15 measured When measuring the CN ratio connect the 75 O impedance converter ZT 130NC to the 1 input con nector of this instrument Set the measurement unit to dBuV lle e LO ZT 130NC 700 signal Setting measurement unit 1 Press AMPLITUDE Units and dB uV The measurement unit is set to dBu V 2 Press AMPLITUDE 2 and Input Impedance 50 75 75 The conversion loss of the 75 Q impedance converter ZT 130NC is corrected for the measured value U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting Measu
46. 5 71 Context RE2 RFT 22222020 eene 5 17 Continuous Down ON OFF 5 36 Continuous Peak ON OFF 5 47 MUS 5 8 Copy All to Flash 5 18 Copy All to USB 5 18 Copy Config nece etes 5 8 Copy Device FILE PRT 5 8 Correction Factor ON OFF 5 62 Counter Position 5 36 Couple to DL OFF ABV BLW 5 47 5 51 Couple to Line 1 OFF ABV BLW 5 47 5 51 Couple to Line 2 OFF ABV BLW 5 47 5 51 Couple to Win OFF IN OUT 5 47 5 51 CPI teorie 5 72 Date Time see tetris 5 8 dB diy iacet eti RR ERR 5 62 dBc Hz ON OFF eee 5 36 dBm L una 5 62 dBm Hz ON OFF 5 36 dBmV D 5 62 5 62 dBuV sqrt Hz ON OFF 5 36 dBuVemf 5 62 Genie 5 62 5 2 5 31 5 31 5 58 5 27 5 27 5 27 5 58 5 48 5 48 5 11 5 15 5 12 5 12 5 12 5 31 5 47 5 15 5 70 5 18 5 38 5 50 5 13 5 20 5 20 5 13 5 13 5 64 5 40 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 12 5 63 5 37 5 63 5 37 5 63 5 63 5 37 5 63 5 63 Default Default Conditions Delete Channel Delete Entry Delta to CF Step Delta to Mkr Step Delta to Span
47. Attach the N m BNC f adaptor to the RF INPUTI connector on the front panel Connect the included BNC m BNC m input cable to the CAL OUT connector on the front panel and the N m BNC f adaptor ADNANTIET 03771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER if Figure4 9 Connecting the CAL Signal RF INPUTI connector 8 Press SYSTEM 9 Press 6 Calibration on the soft key menu The Calibration menu is displayed 4 15 03700 Series User s Guide 4 3 1 Calibration 4 16 10 Press Calibrate All on the Calibration menu Calibration starts The following message is displayed if the calibration of RF INPUTI is complete First step of calibration completed Connect the calibrator to RF2 connector Then press OK to continue The calibration is canceled if Hz is pressed To perform the calibration of RF INPUT2 change the cable connection Attach the BNC f SMA m adapter to the RF INPUT2 connector on the front panel Connect the included BNC m BNC m input cable to the CAL OUT connector on the front panel and the BNC f SMA m adapter 03771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER
48. CENTER 9 80 0 MHz Center 2 4 Frequency Offset a Stop 5 Step Size AUTO MNL 6 Channel Input 100 CENTER 30 0 MHz SPAN 460 0 MHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 dB Figure 4 12 Setting the Center Frequency Press SPAN The current frequency span 15 displayed in the active function display area and the Span menu is displayed Press 4 0 and MHz The frequency span is set to 40 MHz Press AMPLITUDE The current reference level is displayed in the active function display area and the Level menu is displayed Press 1 0 and GHz dBm The reference level is set to 10 dBm Level REF 10 00 dBm 1 10 0 710 00 dBm Ref Level ATT 3 apraiv 10 0 dBi 4 Vertical Scale LIN LOG Units 100 110 30 00 40 00 RBW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 dB Figure 4 13 Completing the Setting of the measurement conditions 4 19 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 2 Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers 4 20 Displaying a marker on the peak 13 Press PEAK The marker is displayed on the peak and the frequency approximately 20 MHz and level approximately 20 dBm ofthe marker are displayed in the marker area REF 10 00 dBm MKR 20 00 MHz 10 0 dB i 20 00 dBm 7 MARKER 20 00 MHz Next Peak Right Next Peak Left 110
49. Call ibwrt spa DETECTOR POS Call ibwrt spa DISP ANN TITLE DATA LabelBuff get the title Save the data to a file called SET5 Call ibwrt spa MMEMORY STORE ITEMS SET5 Clear the configuration Call ibwrt spa RST Recall the configuration Call ibwrt spa MMEMORY LOAD ITEMS SET5 End Sub 6 108 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 4 Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used Example 6 Filling limit line table 1 and displaying limit line 1 t Configuring a Limit Line Private Sub cmdEx6_Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer spa ildev 0 8 0 10 1 0 ilclr spa in this example we shall use the frequency specific commands however it is also possible to select the limit line domain call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN CONT DOMAIN FREQ and to use the genertic commands CALC LLIN DELETE and CALC LLIN DATA Clear limit line table 1 frequency Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DELETE FREQ select dBuV as Amplitude Units Call ibwrt spa UNIT POWER DBUV Fill in the limit line table 1 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 25 MHZ 49 5 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 35 MHZ 49 5 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 35 MHZ 51 5 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 55 MHZ 51 5 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 55 MHZ 54 3 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 65 MHZ 54 3 Call
50. Call ibwrt spa MLN ON Marker ON Call ibwrt spa MK 30MZ Sets the marker to 30 MHz Call ibwrt spa TS Call ibwrt spa ML Requests the value of the marker level Rdbuff Space 30 Allocates 30 bytes to the buffer area Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Reads the data 30 bytes Max InStr 1 Rdbuff vbCrLf 0 Checks the number of character up to the delimiter RichTextBoxl Text MarkerLevel 6 Left Rdbuff sep 1 Displays the data on the screen An example display MarkerLevel 88 1875 Reading and displaying the center frequency Dim sep As Integer Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa CF Query command for the center frequency Rdbuff Space 30 Allocates 30 bytes to the buffer memory Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Reads the data 30 bytes Max InStr l Rdbuff vbCrLf 0 Checks the number of character to the delimiter RichTextBoxl Text CenterFreq amp Left Rdbuff sep 1 Displays the data on the screen An example display CenterFreq 30000000 0000 Example 3 Example 4 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Reading the level and display unit and displaying them Dim sep As Integer Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa RL Query command for the reference level Rdbuff Space 30 Allocates 30 bytes to the buffer memory Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Reads the data
51. ON Table Input Frequency Level DB Table Delete 6 26 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 3 Bandwidth Function RBW Command EXE SET 6 8 3 Bandwidth Query GET Code Argument Format Frequency RB Output Format Frequency RBW Auto ON OFF BA 0 OFF 1 ON VBW Frequency VB Frequency VBW Auto VA ON OFF VA 0 OFF manual 1 ON auto Couple All Auto AL ON OFF AL 0 OFF 1 ON all auto RBW Span CORS CORS ON CORS OFF Ratio float CORS Ratio float CORSON 0 OFF 1 ON COVR COVR COVR OFF Ratio float COVR Ratio float COVRON 0 OFF 1 ON PLL Band Width PLLBW AUTO MIDINARW PLLBW 0 Auto Narrow 2 Medium 6 27 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 4 Sweep 6 8 4 Sweep Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Sweep Time SWIST Time SW ST Time Sweep Auto AS ON OFF AS 0 OFF manual 1 ON auto Sweep Mode SWM 0 Single Normal Sweep Mode Normal SN CONTS Sweep Mode Single SIISNGLS Sweep 5 Sweep Start Stop SR Gated Sweep Mode GTSWP GTSWP 0 OFF 1 ON Gate Source GTSRC GTSRC 2 EXT
52. OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 1 D ha 8 2 AGG6SSOTIGS MNT 9 MAINTENANCE e 9 1 Cleaning 9 1 1 Cabinet Id up 9 1 2 Cleaning of Other Parts 9 2 About Calibration racemase 9 3 About Replacement of Limited Life Parts 2 9 4 Method of Storing the Instrument 9 5 Tr nsport ti qas aka 9 6 Notes for Requesting Repair Replacement of Parts and Pertodic Calibration 9 6 1 Work Request 9 6 2 Destination and Phone Number for Contact 9 7 Last 0E Error Messages 9 8 In Pm 9 9 Product Disposal and Recycle a APPENDIX unus AL Tnitial Setting LIStu E A 2 Principle of Operation A 2 1 Input Safuratl suasana A 2 2 Root Nyquist Filter disini E 27 S AJ Conversion Formula sesi u uu nanan qa
53. RMS Video Average Amplitude Accuracy Description Specifications Calibration signal accuracy 20 MHz Frequency 20 MHz Amplitude 20 dBm Accuracy 0 4 dB Scale display accuracy Log 0 5 dB 10 dB 0 5 dB 80 dB 0 2 4 dB Total level accuracy After performing the automatic calibration Signal level 98 8 dBuV to 58 8 dBuV Preamp Off Input attenuator 10 dB REF 107 dBuV Temperature 20 C to 30 C 0 9 dB Frequency range 10 MHz to 2 2 GHz 2 1 dB Frequency range 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz 7 17 03700 Series User s Guide 7 5 3 Option 20 High Stability Frequency Reference Dynamic Range Description Specifications Displayed average noise level Ref level lt 63 8 dBu V RBW 100 Hz 12 dBuV 2 f GHz dB Preamp Off 27 dBuV 3 f GHz dB Preamp On 1 dB gain compression Frequency range gt 20 MHz gt 102 dBuV Preamp Off gt 82 dBuV Preamp Second garmonic distortion lt 70 4 Preamp Off Mixer input level 77 dBuV Frequency gt 20 MHz Third order intermodulation distortion TOI Frequency range gt 10 MHz Preamp Off Mixer input level 88 8 dBuV Frequency separation 200 kHz 60 dBc Image responses Multiple responses and lt 60 dBc Mixer input level 88 8 dBuV Out of band responses Residual responses Frequency gt 1 MHz Preamp Off 21 dBu V Input and Output RF input Connector Type N
54. Remove File Deletes the selected file Write Protect ON OFF Write protects the selected file ON Prevents data from being written to the file OFF Allows data to be written to the file 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 3 FILE Copy to Flash Copy to USB More 1 2 Auto name Radix Auto name Index File Format BIN XML Format Media Copies all files in the USB memory key to the internal memory Copies all files in the internal memory to the USB memory key The file format that can be copied into the USB memory key is dat The screen image cannot be copied lt gt adv dat If the same file name exists in the USB memory key the file is overwritten Select USB memory from the Media menu Displays the File Ctrl menu 2 2 Defines the common part of the filename under which files are saved The file name follows the following format Radix Index When a file is saved an extension dat is automatically added to the file name which is saved in the format Radix Index dat Radix can be up to six characters long Specifies the Index part of the filename under which files are saved The Index increments by 1 each time a file is saved Zero to 99 can be specified in the Index BIN Saves the data in binary format Only binary formats can be saved in the internal memory The settings of files saved in binary format can be recalled XML Savesthe data in XML format File
55. SYSTem FACTory PRESet Execute System Preset SYSTem PRESet Enable Menu Refresh SYSTem REFResh MENU STATe 1 ON OFF 1 SYSTem REFResh MENU STATe Enable Screen Refresh SSYSTem REFResh SCREen STATe 1 ON OFF 1 SYSTem REFResh SCREen S TATe Date SSYSTem DATE 1 22 3 lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt Time SYSTem TIME 1 2 3 lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt 6 103 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 17 Subsystem TRACe Function description Copy Traces SCPI command TRACe COPY 1 2 Parameter TRACEIITRACE2 TRACE3 TRACEIITRACE2 TRACE3 Query reply Remarks Set Trace Buffer TRACe DATA 1 2 1 TRACe DATA 21 TRACEI TRACE2 TRACE3 Binary block Integer Binary Block Integer Disable Trace Math Operations TRACe MATH NORMal Order Peak in Position or Amplitude Order TRACe MATH PEAK SORT 1 FREQuency AMPLitude Subtract Traces TRACe MATH SUBTract 1 2 23 TRACEIITRACE2 TRACE3 TRACEIITRACE2 TRACE3 TRACEIITRACE2 TRACE3 Subtract Display Line To Trace 6 104 TRACe MATH SUBTract DLINe 1 TRACEIITRACE2 TRACE3 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 18 Subsystem TRIGger Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Set Trigger Delay TRIGger 1 SEQuence DELay 22 Contex
56. Selects either Index Value as marker position setting Index Maintains the marker position at the point on the screen If the center frequency 15 changed the marker does not move and remains at the same position on the screen Value marker position retains the frequency information If the center frequency 15 changed the marker position moves according to the frequency Displays the Sig Track menu Switches the signal truck function ON and OFF ON Performs the peak search for the same peak in each sweep and sets the marker frequency to the center frequency OFF Cancels the signal truck function Sets the margin when the signal track function detects the peak U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 10 PEAK 5 2 10 Displays Peak menu Displays the marker at the maximum level of the trace in the search range and displays the frequency and level of the marker However the frequency of the feed through zero carrier is excluded PEAK Select Next Peak Next Peak Right Next Peak Left Config peak Delta Y More 1 2 Continuous Peak ON OFF X Search Domain y Couple to Win OFF IN OUT L Y Search Domain Window Position Min Peak Window Width Next Min Peak Min Max Peak Couple to DL OFF ABV BLW Peak List Frequency Display Line ON OFF Peak List Level Couple to ia 1 OFF ABV BLW Display List ON OFF Couple to Line 2 OFF ABV BLW Edit Limit L
57. f on the front panel Impedance 75 nom VSWR Input attenuator 2 10 dB lt 1 6 1 Calibration signal output Connector BNC f on the front panel Impedance 75 nom Frequency 20 MHz Level 20 dBm 7 5 3 Option 20 High Stability Frequency Reference Description Specifications Reference frequency stability Aging rate 32 x 10 8 day 1 x 1077 year Warm up drift nominal 5 x 1075 25 10 minutes after turning the power on Temperature drift 5 x 10 0 to 40 C with reference to 25 C 7 18 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 5 4 Option 28 EMC Filter 7 5 4 Option 28 Filter 6 dB bandwidth Range Accuracy 7 5 5 Time axis waveform record 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz lt 10 Option 53 Time Domain Analysis Option Item Description RF frequency range Conforms to the frequency range for each model of the U3700 series RF amplitude range Noise level to 30 dBm 1 Waveform record format I Q vector time waveform Measurement bandwidth BW 100 Hz to 3 MHz 1 to 3 steps I Q sampling rate 713 Hz BW 100 Hz to 21 4 MHz BW 3 MHz I Q waveform record time 49 msec BW 3 to 1000 sec BW 100 Hz Number of I Q waveform record samples 1M Samples I Q 1 The noise level conforms to the dynamic range specifications for each model of the U3700 series 7 5 6 Option 70 High C N 1 U3741 Frequency De
58. gt PRT PRT Dumped to a printer with USB interface Select the FILE mode ScreenShot ie Format PNG Portable Network Graphics format Ong 7 Pra BB BMP Bitmap format Select PNG or BMP Output device and format setting Screen Shot copy Dump execute soft menu related to operation keys and extended function keys can be set to the USER key menu The operability is improved by allocating functions which are frequently used or are located in a deep multilayer menu to the USER key menu A function menu is displayed in the soft menu display area Set the USER 9 Press a menu key to be set Repeat above procedure o ui 0 Press USER to display USER menu Delete the USER menu SHIFT Press a menu key to be deleted Repeat the above procedure Perform calibration after allowing a warm up time of 5 minutes or more CAL execute Connect the CAL signal to RF INPUT connector 6 1 rm Calibration GUIDE 4 03700 Series User s Guide ALPHABETICAL INDEX Symbol 5 27 5 28 Meas ON OFF 5 37 5 40 5 29 5 30 p AMNES 5 25 5 30 5 32 5 36 5 38 5 39 Average ONCE SLIDE 5 25 5 26 Numerics 5 27 5 28 0 5 dB div NER RR 5 62 5 63 5 29 5 30 I dB diy iau eee saya bba 5 62 5 63 5 32 5 36 1 Delta Mkr ON OFF a
59. milliWatt Hz kHz 1e3 Hz MHz 1 6 Hz GHz 1e9 Hz second millisecond microsecond ppm 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 4 Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used 6 10 4 Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used Example 1 Master resetting this instrument and setting the center frequency Private Sub cmdEx1 Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer Spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa Reset the instrument then set center frequency to 30 MHz Call ibwrt spa RST Call ibwrt spa FREQ CENT 30 MHZ End Sub Example2 Setting the start frequency to 300 kHz stop frequency to 800 kHz and frequency offset to 50 kHz Private Sub cmdEx2 Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer Spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa Set Start Frequency to 300 kHz Stop Frequency to 800 kHz Set frequency Offset to 50 kHz Call ibwrt spa FREQ START 300 KHZ STOP 800 KHZ Call ibwrt spa DISPLay WINDow TRACe X OFFSet 50KHZ OFFSET STATe ON End Sub Example 3 Setting the reference level to 87 dBu V dB div to 5 dB and RBW to 100 kHz Private Sub cmdEx3 Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer Spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa Set the units to dBUV Call ibwrt spa UNIT POWER DBUV Set the reference level to 87 dBuV Call ibwrt spa DISP TRACE Y RLEVEL 87 Both commands above have the same effect as call ibwrt spa
60. 1 Context Index 1210 1 Context 2 Context 0 Active context 2 Marker Index 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 0 Active marker 3 Trace Index 1230 1 Trace 2 Trace B 3 Trace C 0 Active trace 4 Lamit Line Index 2 EM channel Index 2345 purious band Index 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 purious Table Index 2 3 Un HR 8 Intermodulation Order Index 3 5 7 9 This parameter cannot be omitted Query reply 1 1 This query reply shows that one variable is replied For this example 1 or 0 is replied 2 Example of a query reply consisting of multiple variables 1 2 3 4 IDN 6 76 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 2 This section describes IEEE common commands Function description Goto Local LAN Common Commands SCPI Command GTL Parameter 6 10 2 Common Commands Query reply Remarks Local Lockout LAN LLO Set Operation Register Mask OPR 1 1 16 bit register 16 bit register Query Operation Register 1 16 bit register Set the parser command set PARSER 1 1 PARSER ATset SCPIset AT SCPI REN REN Clear Registers CLS Enable Standard Event Register ESE 1 1 ESE 8 bit register 8 bit register Query Standard Event Register 1 ESR 8 bit register Return various identifiers of the instrument 1 2 3 4
61. 1 2 Ref Offset ON OFF Input Impedance 50 75 High Sensitivity ON OFF Correction Factor ON OFF Edit Corr Factor L Round Grid Values ON OFF v ATT AUTO MNL Min ATT Attenuation 0 dB 10 dB div 5 dB div 2 dB div 1 dB div 0 5 dB div dBm dBmV dBuV dBuVemf dBpW Watts L Volts Insert Delete Init Table EXT Extended Configuration options 1 L Sweep Mode SGL CNT Trigger Gated Sweep Measuring Window Limit Lines Ref Disp Lines Zoom and Contexts a U3700 Series User s Guide 5 Menu Map List Source Free Run Ext Trigger Level Video Level External Slope NEG POS IF Delay B Gated Sweep ON OFF Source gt External Slope NEG POS IF Gate Delay Gate Width Window HIDE SHOW Window Position Window Width Window Sweep ON OFF Pass Fail ON OFF Line 1 ON OFF Line 1 ABV BLW Line 2 ON OFF Line 2 ABV BLW Pass Fail Config X ABS CF FA B Limit Line Edit Shift X ON OFF Y ABS REF DL Shift Y ON OFF Display Line ON OFF i Limit Line 1 2 Display Line ON OFF Delete Entry Reference Line ON OFF Insert Entry i Table Init A 25 U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List EXT CFG Extended Configuration options 1 a e CPL Coupled function 26 Graphic Z 1 Screen Graphic Zoom 1 ON OFF Graphic Z 2 Screens Window Position
62. 1 Hz band width Figure A 6 b With a bandwidth of 1 Hz the following applies Since the value is 70 dB when the bandwidth is 1 KHz the signals within the 1 Hz bandwidth will be lower than this by about 10 log 1 Hz 1 kHz dB or about 30 dB Consequently it is expressed as 100 dBc Hz at 20 kHz apart from the carrier when the resolution bandwidth is 1 kHz 70 dB Figure 6 Noise Sidebands Residual FM The short term frequency stability of the local oscillators built in the spectrum analyzer is expressed as re sidual FM The frequency width fluctuating per unit time 1s expressed as p p This also determines the mea surement limit value when measuring the residual FM of a signal Residual Response Residual response is how much the spurious signal which is generated by the spectrum analyzer is sup pressed after being treated as an input signal Residual response is generated by the leaking of signals such as local oscillator output in the spectrum ana lyzer This should be taken into consideration when analyzing a low level input signal Frequency Response This term represents the amplitude characteristics for given frequencies frequency characteristics In the spectrum analyzer frequency response means the frequency characteristics flatness of the input at tenuator and mixer for the input frequency and is given AdB 03700 Series User s Guide A 3 Glos
63. 10 00 dBm DL 55 00 dBm MKR 2 000 GHz FOF 2 10 0 dBi 123 22 dBm 16 10 GG ms L 3 CENTER 4 _ 2 000 GHz 20 f Frequency Offset ON OFF 5 Step Size AUTO MNL 6 5 uw 2 CENTER 2 000 GHz SLIDE 3 5 SPAN 1 000 GHz 6 VBW 100 Hz HiS ATT 10 00 dB 7 Title 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Figure 4 6 Screen Display Reference level Displays the reference level setting value 2 Amplitude scale in log mode or linear mode Displays the amplitude scale setting in log mode 3 Active function Displays the function enabled by the keypad or data knob 4 Level scale Displays the level scale 5 Center frequency or start frequency Displays the center frequency or start frequency 6 Resolution bandwidth RBW Displays the resolution bandwidth setting value Displays the font color of RBW in green if RBW is set in the man ual mode 7 User s title Displays the description of the details of the measured data 8 Video bandwidth VBW Displays the video bandwidth setting value Displays the font color of VBW in green if VBW is set in the man ual mode 4 7 03700 Series User s Guide 4 1 2 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Screen 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 4 8 Number of times averaging is performed Sweep time Frequency span or stop frequency High sensitivity Hi sensitivi
64. 1001 2 5 2 As Integer Dim cnt As Integer Dim tmp As Integer Dim ch As String Dim size As Integer Dim Hsize As Integer Dim sSize As String Dim word As Integer Dim trace 1001 As Integer get trace A in view mode to guaranty data integrity Call ibwrt spa DISP TRACE1 MODE VIEW select trace transfer mode as BINARY Call ibwrt spa FORMAT BIN read the buffer Call ibwrt spa TRACE DATA TRACE1 Call ilrdi spa buf 1001 2 5 2 cnt interpret the header tmp buf 0 And amp HFF amp ch Chr tmp If ch lt gt 4 Then Exit Su this is incorrect first character of the header is tmp buf 0 And amp HFFOO amp 256 Hsize tmp Asc 0 header size sSize next Hsize characters describe the buffer size in bytes For i 1 To Hsize 2 word buf i tmp word And amp HFF amp ch Chr tmp sSize sSize ch tmp word And amp HFF00 amp 256 ch Chr tmp sSize sSize ch Next now we know how many bytes the binary buffer contains size size CInt sSize Dim offset As Integer offset 2 number of integers we have read in the buffer assuming the number of bytes is on 4 digits For i 1 To size 2 loop on each integer and re interpret the bytes word buf offset i trace i word And amp HFF amp 256 word And amp HFFOO amp 256 Next End Sub 6 112 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 4 Example Programs
65. 3 IF Gate Slope GTSLP FALL NEG GTSLP 07 RISE POS RISE POS 1 FALL NEG Gate Delay GTPOS Time GTPOS Time Gate Width GTWID Time GTWID Time 6 8 5 Trigger Function Trigger Mode Command EXE SET Query GET Code TRGSRC Argument Format FREE IFIEXT VIDEO Code TRGSRC Output Format 0 FREE 1 VIDEO 2 EXT 3 IF Video or IF Trigger Level TRGLVL Level TRGLVL Level External Trigger Level TRGTTLLVL Voltage TRGTTLLVL Voltage Trigger Slope TRGSLP FALLINEG RISE POS TRGSLP 0 RISE POS 1 FALLINEG Trigger Delay 6 28 TRGDLY Time TRGDLY Time 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 6 Trace 6 8 6 Trace NOTE Three Traces are available A B and C In the Command List below just replace lt n gt by the letter for the selected trace ie lt n gt A B C Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Trace Mode 0 WRITE 1 VIEW 2 BLANK Write View Blank Calc Mode Trace A WRITE MINIMAX 0 WRITE AVGIPAVG 1 MIN HOLD MAXCONT 2 MAX HOLD 3 AVERAGE 4 POWER AVG 5 MAX HOLD CONT Calc Mode Trace B WRITE MIN IMAX CALCB 0 WRITE AVG PAVG 1 MIN HOLD MAXCONT 2 MAX HOLD 3 AVERAGE 4 POWER AVG 5 MAX HOLD CONT Calc Mode Trace WRITEIMINIMAX CALCC 0 WRITE AVG PAVG 1 MIN HOLD MAXCON
66. 4 5 dB Band4 Frequency 27 8 GHz to 43 GHz U3772 7 12 03700 Series User s Guide 7 3 5 Dynamic Range 7 3 5 Dynamic Range Description Specifications Displayed average noise level RF Input 1 RF Input 2 Frequency range gt 10 MHz Ref level 45 dBm RBW 100 Hz 123 dBm 2 f GHz dB 40 Preamplifier Off 122 dBm 1 2 f GHz dB Band Preamplifier Off 138 dBm 3 f GHz dB TBD Band0 Preamplifier On 139 dBm 1 4 f GHz dB Band Preamplifier On 121 dBm 2 f GHz dB 120 dBm 1 5 f GHz dB 111 dBm 118 dBm typ 2 109 dBm 117 dBm typ Band3 105 dBm 112 dBm typ Band4 1 dB gain compression Frequency range gt 10 MHz gt 8 dBm Preamp Off gt 25 dBm Preamp Second harmonic distortion RF Input 1 RF Input 2 Preamp 70 dBc Mixer input level 40 dBm Frequency gt 200 MHz lt 75 dBctyp Mixer input level 30 dBm Frequency gt 300 MHz 40 Mixer input level 30 dBm Frequency 300 MHz 31 8 GHz U3771 300 MHz 40 GHz U3772 Third order intermodulation distortion Frequency range gt 10 MHz Preamp Off Mixer input level 20 dBm 2 Signal 1 MHz 50 dBc Image responses Multiple responses and Out of band responses Image Suppression On Span lt 5 GHz lt 60 dBc Residual responses Frequency range gt 10 MHz 80 dBm Preamp Off 7 13 U3700 Serie
67. 438 00 438 00 444 00 444 00 450 00 450 00 456 00 456 00 462 00 A 28 462 00 468 00 03700 Series User s Guide A 6 2 VHF UHF Channel Number and Frequency A 6 2 VHF UHF Channel Number and Frequency 1 Analyzer s Frequency range Center frequency Picture frequency Sound frequency channel MHz MHz MHz 90 00 96 00 96 00 102 00 102 00 108 00 170 00 176 00 176 00 182 00 182 00 188 00 188 00 194 00 192 00 198 00 198 00 204 00 204 00 210 00 210 00 216 00 216 00 222 00 y N y ny BY G NTR n m N Analyzer s Frequency range Center frequency Picture frequency Sound frequency Channel channel MHz MHz MHz MHz 470 00 476 00 476 00 482 00 482 00 488 00 488 00 494 00 494 00 500 00 500 00 506 00 506 00 512 00 512 00 518 00 518 00 524 00 524 00 530 00 530 00 536 00 536 00 542 00 542 00 548 00 548 00 554 00 554 00 560 00 560 00 566 00 03700 Series User s Guide A 6 2 VHF UHF Channel Number and Frequency Analyzer s channel Channel Frequency range MHz Center frequency MHz Picture frequency MHz Sound frequency MHz
68. 5 2 5 Outputs a screen image according to conditions set by pressing SYSTEM MORE 1 2 and COPY Contig The COPY menu can also be displayed by pressing the SHIFT key and COPY key File size For saving the image data PNG Approximately 8 BMP Approximately 150 KB HELP Pressing the key displays which indicates the mode NOTE The HELP file is loaded the first time the HELP key is pressed after the power is turned on When the HELP mode is set Press a soft menu key to display the relevant menu description Press the soft menu key again to hide the display Press the HELP key again to cancel the HELP mode Procedure 1 Select a menu 2 Press the Help key 3 Pressa soft menu key 4 Press the HELP key to cancel the HELP mode 5 Repeat from step 1 to display the HELP of other menus U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Displays 1 menu Channel Power O Total Power gt b Average Power OBW gt d ACP gt Spectrum Emission 6 Spurious Channel Power gt _ Execute ON OFF Average Control __________ Averaging ON OFF On Trace A B C Max Sweep Count Channel Position Average ONCE SLIDE Channel Width B Default Conditions Restore Defaults Save Defaults Tota
69. All More 1 2 Others HIDESHOW Clear Others Display List ON OFF Mkr Step AUTO MNL Mode Index Value Signal Track gt a Delta ON OFF Ref Object Fixed Mkr ON OFF 1 Delta Mkr ON OFF Signal Track ON OFF Select Marker Next Peak Next Peak Right Next Peak Left Config More 1 2 p gt Min Peak Next Min Peak Min Max Peak Peak List Frequency Peak List Level Display List ON OFF v Y Range ON OFF Peak Delta Y Continuous Peak ON OFF X Search Domain gt Y Search Domain U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List Reference Marker Reference Line Couple to Win OFF IN OUT Window Position Window Width Couple to DL OFF ABV BLW Display Line ON OFF Couple to Line 1 OFF ABV BLW Couple to Line 2 OFF ABV BLW Edit Limit Lines Limit Line 1 2 Delete Entry Insert Entry Table Init 21 03700 Seri User s Guide 5 Menu List Select Next Peak Next Peak Right Next Peak Left Config More 1 2 Min Peak Next Min Peak Min Max Peak Peak List Frequency Peak List Level A 22 Display List ON OFF Y Search Domain Peak Delta Y Continuous Peak ON OFF X Search Domain Mkr to CF Mkr to Ref Peak to CF Peak to Ref Delta to Span Delta to CF More 1 2 Mkr to CF Ste
70. B C Results Table No 1 2 3 Default Conditions Bands Definition gt Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Carrier Bandwidth Ch Windows ON OFF Nyquist Filter ON OFF Nyq Symbol Rate Roll Off Factor Insert Channel Delete Channel Init Table Restore Defaults Save Defaults Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Carrier Bandwidth Ref Power CHN PEAK Ch Windows ON OFF Show Mask ON OFF Nyquist Filter ON OFF Nyq Symbol Rate Nyq Roll Off Factor Delete Band L Init Table Restore Defaults Save Defaults Insert Band Delete Band Init Table Table No 1 2 3 Previous Band Next Band Restore Defaults Save Defaults 52 MEAS 2 Noise Hz gt Noise x Hz X dB Down dBm Hz ON OFF Intermod dBmV sqrt Hz ON OFF Harmonic dBc Hz ON OFF Frequency Counter More 1 2 gt AM Meas ON OFF Sound FM Meas Execute ON OFF Ly Execute X dB Down Execute X dB Left Execute X dB Right X dB Level Display REL ABL ABR More 1 2 Continuous Down ON OFF Peak X dB Down L Execute ON OFF Average Control On Trace A B C Max Order Limit Setup Pass Fail ON OFF L Default Conditions gt L Execute ON OFF Average Control On Trace A B C Harmonic Max Order Fundamental ON OFF Execute ON OFF
71. Counter Position Link to Marker ON OFF Resolution Mod Freq to Sweep Time ON OFF Peak Delta Y Lp Execute ON OFF Sound AM FM Volume Pause Time U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List Average START STOP Max Sweep Count Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE Restore Defaults Save Defaults Average START STOP Max Sweep Count Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE Resolution 1 kHz Resolution 100 Hz Resolution 10 Hz Resolution 1 Hz U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List 20 Refresh Calc Detector Detector AUTO MNL Det Avg Mode RMS Video Math Trace A B C Refresh Write View Blank Trace A B C Write Min Hold Max Hold Average Power Average Max Hold Continuous Trace A B C Normal Posi Nega Sample Average Trace A B C Subtract Average START STOP Max Sweep Count Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE Average START STOP Max Sweep Count Average PAUSE CONT Store Trace A B C L Average ONCE SLIDE OFF A B gt A B A gt A gt gt Display Line More 1 2 OFF A B gt C B A gt C A DL A B DL9B Display Line ON OFF TRCOA TRCOB TRC gt C Trace A B C Select Marker Marker ON OFF Marker Trace A B C Delta Mode Peak Menu Clear
72. Enables a memory device or printer to be connected For 10BaseT specific LAN connector Connects to the monitor for VGA specification Outputs an IF signal of 21 4 MHz Connects to the external DC power supply The Anton Bauer s battery pack can be used Connects to the external controller when the remote control is used through the GPIB interface 4 9 03700 Series User s Guide 4 2 4 2 Basic Operation This section describes the menu operation data entry and usage of the basic measurement functions 4 2 1 Menu Operation and Data Entry Panel keys and soft menus are used to operate this instrument Press a panel key to display its menu to the right of the screen Certain panel keys such as the LOCAL key do not display a soft menu The menu items are arranged according to the soft keys The number of the menu item accords with the number of the related soft key Press a soft key to select the related menu Certain soft keys display another menu The following describes the functions of the panel key and soft key 1 Selecting a menu To set the measurement conditions press the panel key and select the menu Press AMPLITUDE The reference level setting value is displayed in the active function display area and the following Level menu 15 displayed to the right of the screen 1 Ref Level 2ATT W 3 dB div W 4 Vertical Scale LIN LOG 5 Units W 6 Slide Screen ON OFF 7 More 1 2 W The fra
73. IDN Corporate Name String Model Name String Serial Number String Software version String Instrument Preset RST Set Service Request Enable SRE 1 1 SRE 8 bit register 8 bit register Query Status Byte 1 STB 8 bit register Execute Self Test 1 2 3 TST number of rows check item SUPP MEM CPU RFRG RFLK LORG LOLK IFRG IFLK TGRG TEMP check result Status Wait WAI Query Installed Option Number 1 2 n Option No string 6 77 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 1 Subsystem CALCulate Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Set Center Frequency From Delta CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 DELTa SET Context index Marker Postion Difference CENTer Marker index Set Marker Step From Marker Delta CALCulatezz1 MARKerZ2 DELTa SET Context index Position Difference MARKer STEP Marker index Set Span From Delta Marker Position CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 DELTa SET Context index Difference SPAN Marker index Set Frequency Step From Marker CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 DELTa SET Context index Delta Position Difference STEP Marker index Execute X dB Down CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 FUNCtion Context index XDBDown Marker index Execute X dB Left CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 FUNCtion Context index XDBDown LEFT Marker index Execute Peak Se
74. Init Table Start Stop Integral BW Judee U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 ON OFF Sets a symbol rate Activates the Nyquist filter Cancels the Nyquist filter Sets a roll off factor Displays the SEM Bands menu and SEM Table window Deletes a column of measurement conditions from the current cursor position Initializes all data in the table SEM Table No Start Stop IBW Absolute Absolute Absolute Relative Relative Relative Judge Abs and Rel Abs and Rel Abs and Rel Abs or Rel Abs or Rel Abs or Rel Lin Abs Stort pn 7777 Lin abs Stop Lim Rel Start DL Sets offset frequency from center frequency as start frequency of the emission mask judgment frequency band Sets the offset frequency from the center frequency as the stop fre quency of the emission mask judgment frequency band Sets the power integral bandwidth at each frequency point Specifies how to compare the waveform with the set mask values absolute or relative values when the mask judgment is per formed Absolute Compares the waveform with the mask values set in Limit Abs Start and Limit Abs Stop If the waveform 15 equal to or less than the mask values the result 15 Pass Relative Compares the waveform with the mask values set in Limit Rel Start and Limit Rel Stop If the waveform 15 equal to or less than the mask value
75. Integer OBW save setup OBWSAVE OBW restore setup OBWLOAD ACP Execution ACP ON OFF 0 OFF 1 ON ACP Measurement Value n lt DLM gt fIL IIH lt DLM gt 1 ACP Average Times Integer ACPTM Integer ACP Reference Power Value ACPREF Level ACP Screen ACPSCR FULL CARR ACPSCR 0 FULL 1 CARR ACP Carrier Bandwidth CARRBS ACPCBW Frequency CARRBS ACPCBW Frequency CS BS Table Input CSBSIN Frequency CS Frequency BS CS BS Table Deletion CSBSDEL ACP Graphics Mode ADG ON OFF ACP save setup ACPSAVE ACP restore setup ACPLOAD ACP Nyquist Filter ACPNQST ON OFF ACPNQST 6 43 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 14 Power Function Nyquist Symbol Rate Command EXE SET Query GET Code SYMRT Argument Format Frequency Code SYMRT Output Format Frequency Nyquist Roll Off Factor RFACT Real RFACT Real Spectrum Emission Mask Execution SEMON ON OFF SEMON 0 OFF 1 ON SEM Average Times SEMTM Integer SEMTM Integer SEM Carrier Bandwidth SEMCBW Frequency SEMCBW Frequency SEM Ref Power SEMRFCALC CHN PEAK SEMRFCALC 0 Channel 1 Peak SEM Nyquist Filter SEMNQST ON OFF SEMNQST 0 OFF 1 ON SEM save setup
76. Lines Saves the Limit Line table Channel Saves the Channel Formula table and Channel Table ACP Saves CS BS Table for the ACP SEM Saves SEM Table Spurious 1 2 3 Saves the Spurious Bands table Corr Factor Saves Correction Factor Table Normalize Context A B C Saves Normz Data that uses the TG Title Displays the Edit Title dialog box Edit Title Tue aaa How to enter Pressing a key cycles through a list of characters which are allocated to that key and displays them at the cursor position If the key is not pressed for a few sec onds after the previous key entry or another key 15 pressed the displayed charac ter 18 entered Table 5 1 Character allocation table Allocated Characters 0 lt gt 1 Back Space 1 abc2 def3 ghi4 1 15 mno6 pqrs7 tuv8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 wxyz9 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 3 FILE To enter a capital letter hold down the SHIFT key and a key 1 Enter a character by using the keypad 2 Pressaunit key such as the Hz key to finish entering the title 3 Press Title to close the Edit Title dialog box Media Displays the Media dialog box Selects either the internal memory or an external USB memory device in the dialog box Data Files Media Name Type Free Size Analyzer Memory Flash Dev 0 USB Device 121 4 MB122 1 MB U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 4 COPY 5 2 4
77. Marker Persistent Attribute CALCulate MARKer X PERSist 1 1 CALCulate MARKer X PERSist INDex VALue IND VAL Enable AM Measurement CALCulate MARKer 1 FUNCtion 8 22 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 FUNCtion AM STATe Marker index 10 Query AM Modulation Depth CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion AM DEPTh Percent Query AM Modulation Frequency CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion AM FREQuency Frequency Enable FM Measurement CALCulate MARKerZ1 FUNCtion FM STATe 22 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 FUNCtion FM STATe Marker index 10 Query Deviation CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FM Frequency Enable Modulation Freq to Sweep Time CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FM COUPIe STATe 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FM COUPIe S TATe ON OFF 10 Set Modulation Frequency CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FM COUPIe FREQuency 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FM COUPIe FREQuency Frequency Frequency Enable VSWR Measurement CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion VSWR STATe 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion VSWRI STATe ON OFF Query VSWR CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion VSWR RATio Query Return Loss CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion VSWR LOSS 6 83 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 2 Subsystem CALibration Function description Get Step Attenuator Calibration Report SCPI comman
78. OB Width AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe OBWidth AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set Occupied Band Width Averag ing Control Mode SENSe OB Width AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe OB Width AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Enable Occupied Band Width Averaging SENSe OB Width AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe OBWidth AVERage STATe ON OFF Restore Occupied Band Width Set tings SENSe OBWidth DATA LOAD Save Current Settings for Occupied Band Width SENSe OBWidth DATA SAVE Set Occupied Band Width Percent age SENSe OBWidth PERCent 1 1 SENSe OBWidth PERCent Percent Percent Select Occupied Band Width Trace SENSe OBWidth TRACe 1 1 SENSe OBWidth TRACe Trace index Trace index Set Spectrum Emission Mask Maxi mum Sweep Count SENSe SEMask AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe SEMask AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set Spectrum Emission Mask Aver aging Control Mode 6 100 SENSe SEMask AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe SEMask AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Function description Enable Spectrum Emission Mask Averaging SCPI command SENSe SEMask AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe SEMask AVERage STATe Parameter U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply Remarks Set Spectrum Emission Mask Car
79. PMEASTRACE TRA TRB TRC PMEASTRACE 0 TRA 1 TRB 2 TRC Channel Power ON OFF PWCHON ON OFF PWCHON 0 OFF 1 ON Channel Power Average PWCHTM Integer PWCHTM Integer Times Channel Power PWCH Level Channel Power Spectral PWCHPSD dB Density Power Measure Save PWCHSAVE Power Measure Restore Total Power ON OFF PWTOTALON ON OFF PWTOTALON 0 OFF 1 ON Total Power Average PWTOTALTM Integer PWTOTALTM Integer Times Total Power PWTOTAL Level Total Power Spectral Den PWTOTALPSD dB sity 9 Power Measure Save PWTOTSAVE Power Measure Restore PVTOTLOAD 6 42 Function Average Power ON OFF Command EXE SET U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 14 Power Query GET Code PWAVGON Argument Format ON OFF Code PWAVGON Output Format 0 OFF 1 ON Average Power Average Times PWAVGTM Integer PWAVGIM Integer Average Power Range PWAVGRANGE FULL WIN PWAVGRANGE 0 FULL 1 WIN PWAVG Level Power Measure Save PWAVGSAVE Power Measure Restore PWAVGLOAD OBW Execution OBWON ON OFF OBWON 0 OFF 1 ON OBW Measurement Value OBW Frequency Fc Frequency OBW OBW OBWPER Real OBWPER Real OBW Average Times OBWTM Integer OBWTM
80. Peak to CF Peak to Ref Delta to Span Delta to CF More 1 2 Mkr to CF Step Delta to CF Step Mkr to Mkr Step Delta to Mkr Step Sets the frequency of the active marker to the center frequency Sets the level of the active marker to the reference level Displays the marker at the highest peak in the search range and sets the center frequency to the frequency of the marker Displays the marker at the highest peak in the search range and sets the reference level to the level of the marker Sets the frequency span to the difference between the frequencies of the delta marker and the normal marker Delta to CF Sets the center frequency to the difference between the frequen cies of the delta marker and the normal marker More 1 2 Displays the Mkr to 2 2 menu Mkr to CF Step Sets the step size of the center frequency to the frequency of the Delta to CF Step Mkr to Mkr Step Delta to Mkr Step marker as Sets the step size ofthe center frequency to the difference between the frequencies delta marker and the normal marker as Sets the step size of the marker to the frequency of the marker Sets the step size of the marker to the difference between the fre quencies of the delta marker and the normal marker 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 12 TG Option 5 2 12 TG Option Displays the TG menu ON OFF Level Level Offset ON OFF TG Freq Offset ON OFF OPT76 Normali
81. Power A window that shows the measurement channel width is displayed in the center of the screen 750 REF 68 75 dBpy 10 0 dB 68 7 VBW 300 kHz 31 3 CENTER 557 14 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHz SWP 20 ms 6 Press Channel Width 5 6 and MHz The channel width is set to 5 6 MHz Channel Execute ON OFF Average Control On Trace A Channel Position Channel Width 7 Default Conditions 4 53 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting 7 Press Execute ON OFF ON The channel power measurement begins 8 The measurement result is displayed in the Channel Power window C 58 33 4 Figure 4 21 Measuring the noise level N Setting this instrument Measurement mode Noise Hz measurement function Measurement noise area frequency Noise that is adjacent to the measurement signal and not affected by the signal SPAN 10 MHz RBW 100 kHz VBW 1 kHz Measurement bandwidth 5 6 MHz A value for the Noise Hz conversion Averaging count 30 times 750 Noise Hz REF 68 75 MKR 561 14 MHz 10 0 dB 17 08 68 7 NOISE HZ 5 600MHz Noise x Hz 3 dBm Hz OFF 4 dBpV sqrt Hz 5 dBc Hz 31 3 CENTER 557 14 MHz SLIDE 30 30 SPAN 10 00 MHz 1 5 Noise Marker 1 Noise 5 600 MHz 34 26 dByV sqrt Hz Figure 4 22 Measurement Display for Noise Power Co
82. Resolution 1 Hz AM Meas ON OFF FM Meas Sound Noise Hz Noise x Hz dBm Hz ON OFF dBuV sqrt Hz ON OFF dBc Hz ON OFF X dB Down Execute X dB Down Execute X dB Left Execute X dB Right X dB Level U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 7 MEAS 2 Execute ON OFF Mod Freq to Sweep Time ON OFF _ Peak Delta Y Execute ON OFF Sound AM FM Volume Pause Time Displays the Noise Hz menu Activates settings of the noise measurement bandwidth The initial value is 1 Hz ON Displays the marker automatically if the marker is set to OFF Sets the vertical axis unit to dBm and sets the marker unit to dBm Hz OFF Terminates the dBm Hz function ON Displays the marker automatically if the marker is set to OFF Sets the vertical axis unit to dBuV and sets the marker unit to dBuV sqrt Hz OFF Terminates the dBuV sqrt Hz function ON Automatically sets the marker to the delta marker mode if the marker is set to OFF Sets the delta marker unit to dBc Hz OFF Terminates the dBc Hz function Displays the X dB Down menu Displays the marker automatically if the marker is set to OFF The trace for which the X dB Down function is executed is the active trace Set the marker on the active trace According to the Mode setting displays a normal marker and a delta marker X dB lower than the current position Displays a normal marker to the left of and X dB lower tha
83. SCRF ON OFF Open Menus in Remote Control MNRF ON OFF MNRF ON OFF Annotations ANNOTI ON OFF ANNOT ON OFF Parser Mode ETD TRP PARSER Number of trace points lt DLM gt Delimiter 6 50 ATSET SCPISET PARSER 0 AT 1 SCPI 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 22 Others 6 8 22 Others Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Device ID Output Maker Name Device Name Serial No Revision Date Setting SETDATE Date YYMMDD SETDATE Date Time Setting SETTIME Time HHMMSS SETTIME Time Reset user password RPWD P for front panel lock Option List Opt1 Opt2 Optn lt DLM gt Option 75 Ohm Input 1 Installed High Stability 0 Not installed EMC Filter 3GPP Demod TG 30 dBm TG 60 dBm 75 Ohm TG 60 dBm 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 23 TG 6 8 23 TG Function Command EXE SET Query GET Code TG Argument Format Code Output Format 0 OFF 1 ON TGF TGL Level TGL Level TG Frequency Offset TGO ON TGO Frequency TGO TGOON Frequency 0 OFF 1 ON TG Level Offset TGLO ON TGLO ON OFF TGLO TGLOON DB 0 OFF 1 ON Capture Normalize Data Active Trace CAPND Normalize Correction Active Trace NORM ON OFF Capture N
84. SEENI A CENTER 563 14 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHz Channel 20 ms ATT 10 00 dB Input Channel Power AVG SLIDE 30 30 Channel Power 62 02 dBpV Power Spectral Density 114 22 dBm Hz 4 58 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 7 VSWR Measurement 4 4 7 VSWR Measurement Reflection characteristics of an antenna and filter are measured by using the SWR bridge A return loss and VSWR at a marker point are displayed 1 Connect SWR bridge as shown in Figure 4 23 VSWR Measurement m w qum Hh e cine s gt w Gem D Oe u Ge TEST DUT Figure 4 23 VSWR Measurement 2 Execute normalization without connecting a DUT to the TEST port of the SWR bridge Set CENTER SPAN and REF in accordance with the DUT Press TG Reference Line ON OFF ON 2 0 and MHz Set the reference line to 20 dBm Press TG and TG ON OFF ON Set the TG output to ON Press Normalize Capture Normz Data and Normalize Correction ON OFF ON Normalization is executed while the TEST port is open CAUTION If a setting condition is changed after normalization is executed re execute normalization 4 59 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 7 VSWR Measurement 2007 Jun 15 09 01 TG REF 0 00 dBm 1 Ca
85. Set Spurious Active Configuration Table SENSe SPURious LIST ACTive 1 1 SENSe SPURious LIST ACTive Spurious Table Index Spurious Table Index 6 101 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Insert New Band into Active Spuri ous Configuration Table SCPI command SENSe SPURious LIST DATA 21 2 3 04 05 6 7 08 9 Parameter Band start frequency Frequency Band stop frequency Frequency Resolution bandwidth Video bandwidth Sweep time Reference level Amplitude Attenuation Pre amplifier ON OFF Limit Amplitude Query reply Remarks Delete Active Spurious Configura tion Table SENSe SPURious LIST DELete Set Number of Points in Trace Buff ers SENSe SWEep POINts 1 1 SENSe SWEep POINts Integer Integer Set Total Power Maximum Sweep Count SENSe TOTPower AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe TOTPower AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set Total Power Averaging Control Mode SENSe TOTPower AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe TOTPower AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Enable Total Power Averaging SENSe TOTPower AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe TOTPower AVERage STATe ON OFF Restore Total Power Settings SENSe TOTPower DATA LOAD Save Current Settings for Total Power SENSe TOTPower DATA S
86. Sets the frequency input mode Sets the stop frequency input mode to the channel ON Sets the channel code input mode OFF Sets the frequency input mode Switches the start frequency offset function ON and OFF when the channel input mode is set ON Sets the offset value Start frequency Carrier frequency Start channel start offset frequency OFF Cancels the offset function Switches the stop frequency offset function ON and OFF when the channel input mode is set ON Sets the offset value Stop frequency Carrier frequency Stop channel stop offset frequency OFF Cancels the offset function Displays the Channels Config menu 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 13 FREQUENCY Edit Channel Formula Displays the dialog box in which the mathematical formula to acquire the channel set frequency 15 defined The set frequency is as follows Carrier frequency Origin CH spacing CH No CH offset Edit Channel Formula CHCalc1 CHCalc2 CHCalc3 CH Min lt n lt CH TE RS Carrier Freq Origin Freq CH Spacing n CH Offset cH spacing cH onset Edit Channel Table Displays the dialog box used to set the channel table Channel Table No Channel Number Cartier Frequency 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Insert Line Inserts a line in the channel table Delete Line Deletes line where the cursor 15 positioned Table Init Initia
87. Table 6 3 U3700 series rear panel External controller LAN cable Figure 6 2 LAN Setup 6 6 03700 Series User s Guide 6 3 1 Setting up the LAN Table 6 2 Connection of IOBASE T Cross over Cables Connector A Connector B Signal name ES i Signal name Pin number Pin number RX 1 3 TX RX 2 6 TX TX 3 1 RX TX 6 2 RX Not Used 4 4 Not Used 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Signal Name Pin 1 TD 2 TD 3 RD 6 RD Figure 6 3 Connection of Cross over Cables Table 6 3 Connection of IOBASE T Straight Cables Signal name p Line color Pair number Pin number 1 White Orange 2 RX 2 TX 3 White Green 3 TX 6 Green Not Used 4 Blue 1 5 White Blue 7 White Brown 4 8 Brown 6 7 6 8 03700 Series User s Guide 6 3 2 Setting the IP Address 6 3 2 2 Setting the IP Address Press SYSTEM Remote Control and LAN IP Address 1 Setting the IP Address Manually Enter a check mark into the Use the following IP address check box Address Subnet Mask Network Setting Default Gateway Obtain an IP address automatically Set the above items v Use the following IP address Padus EU KI HC Subnet Mask 255 255 255 04 Default Gateway 192 168 0 Click the Apply button
88. The Spurious Bands table is displayed The cursor is positioned at the start frequency setting text field of frequency band 1 3 Press 3 0 and MHz The start frequency is set to 30 MHz and cursor moves to stop frequency setting text field 4 Press 1 and GHz The stop frequency is set to 1 GHz and the cursor moves to the RBW selection button from Auto and Manual If selecting Auto press Hz If selecting Manual turn the knob clockwise for one click to select the Manual button and then press Hz 5 03700 Series User s Guide 4 4 4 W CDMA Spurious Measurement Select Manual and then press 1 0 0 and kHz The RBW 15 set to Manual and 100 kHz Spurious Bands No 1 2 Start 30 000000 Stop a 04 RBW Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual vBw Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual SWP Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Preamp Limit Repeat the above procedure and set the VBW to Manual and 100 kHz the SWP to Auto the ATT to Manual and 20 dB the Ref Level to 0 dBm and the Preamp to Off The cursor moves to the limit value setting text field Press 1 3 and GHz The limit value is set to 13 dBm and then the cursor moves to the start frequency setting text field of the next frequency band Repeat the above procedure and complete the Spurious Bands table Spurious Bands No 2 3 4 Start Stop RBW Auto Manual Manual Au
89. The center frequency is set to 1952 4 MHz 2 Press SPAN 1 0 and MHz The frequency span is set to 10 MHz 3 Press AMPLITUDE More 1 2 Ref Offset ON OFF ON 3 0 and GHz A value of 30 dB which is the attenuation of the external attenuator is added to a level reading value 4 43 03700 Series User s Guide 4 4 2 W CDMA Channel Power Measurement 4 Press MEASI and Channel Power A window that shows the measurement channel width is displayed at the center of the screen REF 30 00 dBm 10 0 dB REF OFFSET SEX 70 CENTER 1 95240 GHz SPAN 10 00 MHz RBW 100 kHz VBW 100 kHz SWP 20 ms 10 00 dB 5 Press Channel Width 3 8 4 and MHz The channel width is set to 3 84 MHz Measuring the channel power 6 Press Execute ON OFF ON The channel power measurement starts The detector is automatically set to RMS REF 30 00 dBm DL 23 41 dBm 10 0 dBi WIN WIDTH 20 3 84 MHz 70 CENTER 1 95240 GHz SPAN 10 00 MHz RBW 100 kHz VBW 100 kHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 00 dB Channel Power Channel Power 23 41 dBm Power Spectral Density 42 44 dBm Hz The measurement result is displayed Channel ON OFF 2 Average Control On Trace A 5 Channel Position Default Conditions Channel P Execute On Trace 5 Channel Position Channel Width 7 Default Conditions A display line that shows the channel power is displayed 4 44 U3700 Series User
90. Trace Subtraction OFF ABA BAA ADLA BAB ABB BDLB ABC BAC TRSUB Math Trace Store Current trace trace n STORE TRA TRB TRC Number of Trace Points 6 30 TPS TP 501 TPL TP 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 6 Trace Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Detector Mode Trace DET NRM POS NEG SMP DET 0 1 POS 2 NEG 3 SMP 4 AVG Detector Mode Trace DETB NRM POS NEG SMP DETB 0 NRM AVG 1 POS 2 NEG 3 SMP 4 AVG Detector Mode Trace DETC NRM POS NEG SMP DETC 0 NRM AVG 1 POS 2 NEG 3 SMP 4 AVG Detector Mode Auto DETA lt n gt DETA lt n gt 0 OFF 1 ON Detector Average Mode DETAVG RMS VIDEO DETAVG 0 VIDEO RMS Select Active Trace TRACESEL TRA TRB TRC TRACESEL 0 TRA 1 TRB 2 TRC Trace A I O ASCH TAA DDDDD lt DLM gt x TAA DDDDD lt DLM gt x 1 1 Trace A I O Binary TBA 2Bytes TRP TBA 2BytesxTRP Trace B I O ASCII TAB DDDDD lt DLM gt x TAB DDDDD lt DLM gt x 1 TRP 1 Trace B I O Binary TBB 2BytesxTRP TBB 2BytesxTRP Trace C I O ASCH TAC DDDDD lt DLM gt x TAC DDDDD lt DLM gt x 1 TRP 1 Trace C I O Binary TBC 2BytesxTRP TBC 2BytesxTRP Trace Output Fornat 16bits Integer FORMI 16bits Integer FORM2 IEEE 32bits Float FORM3 IEEE 32bits Float
91. V rnt 6 54 SVANT 6 49 MA 6 28 SV CEL 6 49 siete 6 28 SVLIMI 4 eren 6 49 6 27 SVLIMO retis evt te err 6 49 VSWR 6 53 SVNRMIA 22 2 6 49 VSWRLOSS 2 2000 6 53 SVNRMIB eene EI 6 49 VSWRON unie oae e 6 53 SVNRMIC 6 49 W 6 54 SV SEM scietis 6 49 WIDOSWP 6 34 SVSET incisis eei iter TUS 6 48 WDX EUER 6 34 SVSPRT ua saq a uu 6 49 uq 6 34 n 6 49 6 48 SVSPR3 v e eres 6 49 PaDrc 6 39 SVTRCIA 6 48 t 6 39 SVIRCI B 6 49 ek 6 39 SVIRCI C 205 6 49 ZA T 6 27 SVTRG2A 6 49 EMP OS hse teet i aaa 6 34 SVTRC2AB vrine miissen 6 49 ZMWID innri 6 34 SWIS T innin inn rene nes 6 29 VAS EEE EE EE E 6 25 6 23 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 AT Command List 6 8 Command List 6 8 1 Function Center Frequency Frequency Command EXE SET Query GET Code CF Argument Format Frequency Code Output Format Frequency CF Step Size CS Frequency Frequency
92. a line in the limit line table Table Init Clears all settings in the limit line table More 1 2 Displays the Peak 2 2 menu Min Peak Moves the active marker to the minimum value of the trace in the search range Next Min Peak Moves the marker to the next lowest peak from the current marker position in the search range Min Max Peak Automatically sets the delta marker mode moves the reference marker to the maximum value and moves active marker to the minimum value Peak List Frequency Lists peak levels and peak frequencies in order of frequency 5 52 REF 30 00 dBm MKR 180 3 MHz 10 0 dB 92 05 dBm MARKER 480 3 MHz Peak List 30 0 MHz STOP 200 0 MHz Frequency SwP 20 ms Marker List 40 0 MHz 56 99 dBm 160 2 MHz 90 75 dBm 60 1 MHz 65 18 dBm 180 3 MHz 92 05 dBm 80 0 MHz 84 37 dBm 100 0 MHz 88 15 dBm 140 5 MHz 91 83 dBm Display List 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 10 PEAK Peak List Level Lists peak levels and peak frequencies in order of peak level Display List ON OFF Switches the peak list display ON Displays the list OFF Hides the list U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 11 gt 5 2 11 MKR gt If the MKR key is pressed active marker data such as the frequency and level can be used as the data of other function Displays the Mkr to menu Mkr to CF Mkr to CF Mkr to Ref Peak to CF Peak to Ref Delta to Span Mkr to Ref
93. and the program starts 03700 Series User s Guide 3 5 Checking Operations The result of the self diagnostics and the initial screen are displayed The initial screen display may differ from Figure 3 6 depending on the status of the settings when the power supply was last turned off Frequency REF 0 00 dBm 1 10 0 dB Center Stop 4 Frequency Offset ON OFF 5 CF Step Size AUTO MNL 6 Channel Input d 100 CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 8 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 80 ms ATT 10 dB Figure 3 6 Initial Screen MEMO If any error message is displayed refer to 9 MAINTENANCE U3700 Series User s Guide 3 5 Checking Operations Running calibration 6 Connect as shown in Figure 3 7 by using the included N BNC adaptor and input cable 01037 300 03771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER ot Figure 3 7 Connecting the CAL Signal IMPORTANT Perform calibration after allowing a warm up time of at least 5 minutes For more information on how to perform autocalibration refer to 4 3 1 Calibration 7 Press the SYSTEM key of this instrument and select Calibration from the
94. as the reference power Ch Windows ON OFF ON Displays the ACP channel window OFF Closes the ACP channel window Nyquist Filter ON OFF Switches the Nyquist filter function ON and OFF ON Activates a Nyquist filter OFF Cancels the Nyquist filter Nyq Symbol Rate Sets a symbol rate Roll Off Factor Sets a roll off factor Channel Definition Displays the ACP Ch menu Displays the CS BS Table dialog box CS BS Table No Channel Space Channel Bandwidth UE 5 000 MHz 3 840 MHz Channel Space Sets the Offset frequency from the carrier frequency that shows the adjacent channel measuring position Channel Bandwidth Sets the measurement bandwidth used in the adjacent channel leakage power measurement Insert Channel Inserts a line on which to set an adjacent channel measurement condition at the current cursor position The data in the line that existed in the position before insertion is copied to each setting value as new line data Delete Channel Deletes the measurement condition at the current cursor position Init Table Initializes the contents of the ACP channel table U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Graph ON OFF Default Conditions Restore Defaults Save Defaults Spectrum Emission Execute ON OFF Average Control Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE ON Displays an ACP graph OFF Hides the ACP graph Displays the ACP Default menu Recal
95. by novices or experienced users of this instrument You may read through this man ual from Chapter 1 to learn more about this instrument or you may refer to the table of contents which is found at the beginning of each chapter and directly jump to the section that you need The contents of each chapter are as follows CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the contents of this manual and the product overview CHAPTER 2 PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE U3700 This chapter describes precautions when using this instru ment Read this chapter before using this instrument CHAPTER 3 SETUP This chapter describes how to setup this instrument After setting up this instrument in an appropriate location turn on the power and check that this instrument starts correctly CHAPTER 4 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURA TION AND BASIC OPERATIONS This chapter describes the functions of each part of the panel and the screen of this instrument You can learn how to operate this instrument from the operations and simple examples CHAPTER 5 MENU MAP FUNCTIONAL EXPLANATION This chapter describes the menu structure and functions of soft keys CHAPTER 6 OVERVIEW OF REMOTE CON TROL This chapter describes how to connect and set the GPIB and LAN interfaces and also describes the program exam ples used when programming and table of commands CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the specifications of this inst
96. cursor is positioned at the Channel Space setting text field 6 Press 5 and MHz Channel Space 1 is set to 5 MHz The cursor moves to the Channel Bandwidth 1 setting text field 7 Press 3 8 4 and MHz Channel Bandwidth 1 is set to 3 84 MHz The cursor moves to the Channel Space 2 setting text field 8 Press 1 0 and MHz Channel Space 1 is set to 10 MHz The cursor moves to the Channel Bandwidth 2 setting text field 9 Press 3 8 4 and MHz Channel Bandwidth 2 is set to 3 84 MHz 10 Press RETURN CS BS Table Channel Space Channel Bandwidth 5 000 MHz 3 840 MHZ 10 000 MHz 3 840 MHz 4 46 03700 Series User s Guide 4 4 3 W CDMA Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement Measuring the ACP 11 Press Execute ON OFF ON The ACP measurement starts The detector is automatically set to RMS ACP REF 0 00 dBm MKR 2 11000 GHz 1 10 0 dB 76 38 dBm ON OFF 4 Average Control Mode FULL CARR 4 Config 5 100 Channel ENTER 2 10000 GHz SPAN 25 00 MHz Definition RBW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz ATT 10 00 dB Adjacent Channel Power Ref Power 0 90 dBm 813 51 pW Lower Upper Marker Power Marker Power Default 1 51 18 dB 2 51 97 dB Conditions 3 64 68 dB 4 64 69 dB Displaying the channel bandwidth 12 Press Config and Ch Windows ON OFF ON The set channel bandwidth window is displayed on the screen The frequency span must be
97. dB dBpw dBm 90 dB 3 Examples Converting 1 mV into dBuV 20 log Ty 20 log 10 60 dBu V Converting 0 dBm into dBuV 0 dBm 107 dB 107 dBuV R 50 0 dBm 109 dB 109 dBuV R 75 Converting 60 dBuV into dBm 60 107 dB 47 dBm R 50 60 dBuV 109 dB 49 dBm R 75 10 V m 1 uV m Converting 10 into dBuV m 20 log 140 dBuV m 4 Relationship between dBm and Watt 50 dBm 40 dBm 30 dBm 20 dBm 10 dBm 0 dBm 10 dBm 20 dBm 30 dBm 100 W 10 W 1 W 100mW 10 mW 1mW 0 1 mW 0 01 mW 0 001 mW U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List A 5 Menu Map List SYSTEM 1 v a Version Annotations ON OFF Frequency Reference Remote Control Trace Points 501 1001 Calibration Frequency Reference INT EXT XTL Ref Freq Ref Freq 10 MHz More 1 2 U3751 U3771 U3772 GPIB Address LAN IP Address R3162 Mode ON OFF Parser AT SCPI U3741 GPIB Address LAN IP Address R3131 Mode ON OFF Parser AT SCPI Calibrate ALL Each Item Report HIDE SHOW Calibration F Int Ref Calibration Corrections ON OFF Frequency Correction ON OFF Total Gain RF Path 1 Total Gain RF Path 2 Step ATT CAL RBW CAL PBW Coarse Fine U3751 U3771 U3772 Store Default 8 8 2 Color Pattern gt User Password Da
98. disp trace y rlevel 87 dbuv Set the amplitude per division to 5 db division Call ibwrt spa DISP TRACE Y PDIV 5 DB Set the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz Call ibwrt spa SENS BAND RESOLUTION 100 KHZ End Sub 6 107 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 4 Example Programs which SCPI Commands Are Used Example 4 Setting the center frequency frequency span and attenuator by using variables Private Sub cmdEx4 Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer Spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa tbxCenter tbxSpan and tbxAttenuation are 3 text boxes on the form A user would give a value in MHz to center span and a value in dB to attenuation this example we shall show how to use these Call ibwrt spa FREQ CENTER tbxCenter Text MHZ Call ibwrt spa FREQ SPAN tbxSpan Text MHZ Call ibwrt spa POWER ATT tbxAttenuation Text DB End Sub Example 5 Saving and recalling the set values Private Sub cmdEx5 Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer Spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa In this example we shall setup a few instrument parameters get a title and save these information to a file Execute an instrument preset then restore the saved configuration Define the instrument title Dim LabelBuff As String LabelBuff Spectrum Analyzer U37xx Set up the instrument Call ibwrt spa FREQ CENT 30 MHZ Call ibwrt spa FREQ SPAN 1 MHZ
99. from the spectrum analyzer s InStr 1 Rdbuff vbCrLf 0 Checks the number of characters to the delimiter RichTextBoxl Text RefLevel amp Left Rdbuff sep 1 Display the data on the screen Call ibwrt spa AUNITS Requests the level unit Rdbuff Space 3 Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Sep InStr 1 Rdbuff vbCrLf 0 Checks the number of characters to the delimiter RichTextBoxl Text RichTextBoxl Text vbCrLf amp UNIT amp Left Rdbuff sep 1 Displays the previous result followed by a return mark and the most recent result An example display RefLevel 0 0000 UNIT 0 Executing the 6 dB down operation reading the frequency and level and displaying them Dim sep As Integer Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa CF 30MZ Sets the parameter Call ibwrt spa SP 20MZ Call ibwrt spa MKBW 6DB Sets a 6 dB down measurement Call ibwrt spa PS Executes the peak search Call ibwrt spa XDB Performs the 6 dB down measurement Call ibwrt spa MFL Requests the value of the marker level and frequency Rdbuff Space 50 Allocates the buffer memory space to 50 bytes Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Reads the data 50 bytes Max from the Spectrum analyzer InStr 1 Rdbuff vbCrLf 0 Checks the number of characters to the delimiter RichTextBoxl Text Marker Freq amp Level amp Left Rdbuff sep 1
100. i ia i AS Menu Map Listu aun anqas A6 TV Channel Table uuu A 6 1 Channel Number and Frequency A 6 2 VHF UHF Channel Number and Frequency 6 3 Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting Channel Number and Frequency A 6 4 Satellite Broadcasting BS IF Band Channel Number and Frequency A 6 5 110 CS CS IF Band Channel Number and Frequency U3741 DIMENSIONAL OUTLINE DRAWING U3751 DIMENSIONAL OUTLINE DRAWING U3771 DIMENSIONAL OUTLINE DRAWING U3772 DIMENSIONAL OUTLINE DRAWING C 5 U3700 Series User s Guide Table of Contents U3741 U3751 U3771 U3772 QUICK GUIDE ALPHABETICAL INDEX C 6 03700 Series User s Guide LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS No Title Page 3 1 Operating Enyitonmeht ue oie rore terret trt prie a EPERE ERRE 3 3 3 2 Connecting the Power Cable obe tune de iine diete 3 5 3 3 Attachment of a Ferrite Core 3 9 3 4 Attachment of Ferrite Core 2 nice tr ey e EE LEX RYE ERRARE ERU ERE DR 3 9 3 5 POWER SWitch EC 3 10 3 6 Initial Sereen oue estie eite quce eb p eee 3 11 3 7 Connecting the CAL Signal 3 12 4 1 Front Panel M P E 4 1 4 2 Extended F
101. image to a file 6 113 03700 Series User s Guide 7 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the specifications of this instrument The performance of this instrument is guaranteed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified The specified calibration period must be adhered to After turning on the power and warming up for 5 minutes or more under the specified environmental conditions After automatic calibration has been performed Reference data is provided to help you use the product efficiently but it will not guarantee the performance of this instrument The data is described by using the following notation Specifications spec Indicates the specifications within which the performance of the product can be guaranteed Includes variations in the performance of each product uncertainty in calibrations and changes in performance due to the environment Typical value typ Indicates the average performance of the product Excludes variations in the per formance of each product uncertainty in measurements and changes in perfor mance due to the environment Nominal value nom Indicates the general performance of the product and does not refer to the guar anteed performance 7 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 1 03741 Performance Specifications 7 1 U3741 Performance Specifications 7 1 1 Frequency Description Specifications Frequency range Built in pream
102. in this instrument 03700 Series User s Guide 6 6 GPIB Remote Programming This section shows the AT commands in each function Command code 6 6 GPIB Remote Programming An asterisk indicates a function that numeric or character strings data follows after the code Numeric data and ON can be omitted from Output format comma woe indicates that two more data output e ON or OFF indicates that 1 or 0 is output Frequency 15 output in Hz and time is output in sec Level data is output in the currently set display unit 6 7 Command Index AT Command Pages AT Command lt gt 6 31 ACP n AVG n GS 6 31 ACPCBW Doa u aS 6 30 n a EM 6 30 ACPNQST 6 31 lt 6 31 ACPSAVE 63 jest a n m a wa ae 6 31 ACPSCR WS 6 31 ACPTM Sn2MAX 6 30 ADO ede 6 30 ADLA lt n gt NORM ua y an aa 6 53 a PAN ausencia ba 6 31 lt gt 6 31 AMMOD POC NT 6 31 ANNOT s POD o Re 6 31 AR SBIPPGSGL in
103. in this measurement 1 TG option Normalize function Cable loss measurement 2 Level correction table DUT Long measurement cable NG Measuring the cable loss 1 Connect TG OUTPUT and INPUTI by using the input cable included with this instrument mm a IE EC Gen 32 e m de D eme e Gm gt CED B m HB 2 Press FREQUENCY 2 0 MHz SPAN 1 MHz and TG ON OFF ON The center frequency is set to 20 MHz the frequency span is set to 1 MHz and the TG option is set to ON 4 37 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 1 Using the Normalize Function and Level Correction Table 3 Press EXT CFG Ref Disp Lines and Reference Line ON OFF ON The reference line is displayed on the screen Display REF 0 00 dBm 1 Display 10 0 dBi aum REN 1 ON OFF 4110 40 dBm 2 Reference Line Reference line 100 CENTER 20 000 MHz SPAN 1 000 MHz RBW 10 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 00 dB 4 Turn the knob to adjust the reference line to the TG signal 5 Press FREQUENCY 1 5 GHz SPAN 3 and GHz The center frequency is set to 1 5 GHz and the frequency span is set to 3 GHz
104. in which SCPI Commands Are Used Example 10 Entering data to trace A buffer in ASCII format Initialization Dim spa As Integer Spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa Dim buf As String Dim tracePoint As Integer get trace in view mode otherwise sent data would be cleared immediately by the next acquisition Call ibwrt spa DISP TRACE1 MODE VIEW select ASCII as the trace transfer format Call ibwrt spa FORMAT ASCII build the trace setting command header first buf trace data tracel note the ending space required then each point amplitude separated by a comma For 1 0 To 1000 tracePoint 7000 50004 Sin i 508 Debug Print tracePoint buf buf CStr tracePoint Next send the trace setting command Call ibwrt spa buf End Sub Example 11 Outputs a current screen image as bitmap data and writes it to a file Data which is approximately 150 KB for the BMP format or approximately 7 KB for the PNG format 15 output Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa MMEM DUMP BMP Requests bitmap data output Call ibrdf spa bitmap bmp Writes bitmap data to a file Example 12 Writes a screen image that is copied into a USB memory to a file Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa MMEM IMAG copy020 png Specifies a screen image name and requests its output Call ibrdf spa 020 Writes a screen
105. of the center frequency frequency span reference level or level display scale are changed after the normalization is performed the normalization subsequent to this change does not perform cor rectly Re perform the normalization after changing the settings 4 32 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG 76 77 TG Normz REF 0 00 dBm 1 Capture Hormz Data 3 Normalize Correction Ref Line OFF Reference Line CENTER 1 3000 GHz SPAN 200 0 MHz On OFF RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 20 ms 10 dB Connecting the unit under test 1 Connect the unit under test to TG OUTPUT and RF INPUT of this instrument as shown in Figure 4 20 03771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER ol 0 Unit under test Figure 4 20 Connecting the Unit Under Test 4 33 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 34 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG OPT76 OPT77 CAUTION In the frequency response measurement by using the TG the level measurement error may be larger even if the UNCAL message is not displayed on the screen Increase the sweep time until the displayed
106. of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and repeats averaging continuously by using the last data Selects a trace in which to execute the inter modulation measure ment Sets the measuring order The third fifth seventh and ninth orders can be set Limit Setup Pass Fail ON OFF Default Conditions Restore Defaults Save Defaults Harmonic Execute ON OFF Average Control Average START STOP Max Sweep Count U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 7 MEAS 2 Displays the Limit Setup dialog box 3rd Order Limit Sets the limit value of the third order distortion signal 5th Order Limit Sets the limit value of the fifth order distortion signal 7th Order Limit Sets the limit value of the seventh order distortion signal 9th Order Limit Sets the limit value of the ninth order distortion signal Limit Setup 3rd Order Limit 0 00 dB Sth Order Limit 0 00 dB 7th Order Limit 0 00 dB 9th Order Limit 0 00 dB Switches the Pass Fail judgment due to the comparison with the limit value set in the Limit Setup dialog box ON and OFF ON Performs the Pass Fail judgment If the measurement result is larger than the set limit value a Fail judgment is performed OFF Does not perform the Pass Fail judgment Displays the IM Default menu Recalls the saved setting conditions Saves the currently set conditions Displays the Harmonic menu ON Execu
107. paused Average ONCE SLIDE Max Hold Continuous Trace A B C Detector Normal Posi Nega Sample Average Trace A B C Detector AUTO MNL Det Avg Mode RMS Video Math Subtract OFF A B gt A B A gt A B A gt B U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 8 TRACE ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then calculates the moving average Displays the maximum value for each trace sample The trace is not reset in this function which is different from the Max Hold function in the Calc menu The Max Hold operation starts at a trace point when the key is pressed This function can be used when the Detector mode is set to MNL Selects the applied trace memory Displays the Detector menu The selected setting is displayed at the bottom of the menu Sets the normal detection mode in which a positive or negative peak is automatically detected at each trace point Sets the positive peak detection mode Sets the negative peak detection mode Sets the sample detection mode Sets the average detection mode The average detection mode includes RMS power average and Video Trace average which can be selected in the Det Avg Mode menu Selects the applied trace memory Switches the detection mode between the auto and manual set tings AUTO Automatically sets the optimum detection mode for measurement ba
108. rier Band Width SENSe SEMask BANDwidth BWIDth 1 1 SENSe SEMask BANDwidth BWIDth Frequency Frequency Restore Spectrum Emission Mask Settings SENSe SEMask DATA LOAD Save Current Settings for Spectrum Emission Mask SENSe SEMask DATA SAVE Set Root Nyquist Filter Roll off Factor SEM SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC 1 1 SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC ALPHA Number Number Set Root Nyquist Filter Symbol Rate SEM SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC SRATe 1 1 SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC 5 Frequency Frequency Enable Root Nyquist Filter SEM SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC STATe 1 1 SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC STATe ON OFF Insert New Row into SEM Defini tion Table SENSe SEMask OFFSet DATA 1 start frequency Frequency stop frequency Frequency ibw Frequency start absolute limit Relative amplitude stop absolute limit Relative amplitude start relative limit Relative amplitude stop relative limit Relative amplitude test mode ABSolute RELative AND OR Delete SEM Definition Table SENSe SEMask OFFSet DATA DELete Set Reference Power Calculation Mode SEM SENSe SEMask RPOWer 1 1 SENSe SEMask RPO Wer CHANnel PEAK CHAN PEAK Select Spectrum Emission Mask Trace SENSe SEMask TRACe 1 1 SENSe SEMask TRACe Trace index Trace index
109. switch on the front panel MEMO The display may be different depending on the state of the instrument when the power was last turned off U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 3 How to Cancel the UNCAL Message Initialization Initialize the settings of this instrument 6 Press SHIFT and SYSTEM PRESET Initial setting conditions are loaded Connecting the input signal Connect the calibration signal 7 Attach the N m BNC f adaptor to the INPUT connector on the front panel Connect the included BNC m BNC m input cable to the CAL OUT connector on the front panel and the N m BNC f adaptor ADNANTIET 03771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER if Figure 4 16 Connecting the CAL Signal Setting measurement conditions Set the measurement conditions to observe the input signal more easily 8 Press FREQUENCY 2 0 and MHz The center frequency is set to 20 MHz 9 Press CPL Sweep Time AUTO MNL 2 0 and kHz ms The sweep time is set to 20 ms 10 Press SPAN 1 0 and kHz The span is set to 10 kHz The RBW 15 automatically set to 300 Hz according to the span setting and UNCAL message is displayed The sweep time setting o
110. time in the horizontal axis at certain frequency but does not sweep fre quencies in this mode U3700 Series User s Guide A 3 Glossary Occupied Bandwidth When information 15 transmitted through radio waves the spread of the frequency spectrum 15 caused along with the modulation The occupied bandwidth is defined as the width of frequency spectrum that occupies 9994 of total average power see Figure A 8 Occupied Bandwidth i 99 Amplitude Frequency Figure A 8 Occupied Bandwidth Bandwidth Selectivity The band pass filter normally has a Gaussian distribution characteristics instead of the so called rectangular characteristic Consequently if two adjacent signals of different levels exist the smaller signal hides in the skirt of the larger signal See Figure A 9 Therefore the bandwidth at a certain attenuation range 60 dB should also be defined The ratio between the 3 dB width and 60 dB width is expressed as the bandwidth selectivity BWeo ES 60 dB a Separation of different level signals b IF filter selectivity Figure 9 Bandwidth Selectivity 03700 Series User s Guide A 3 Glossary Bandwidth Accuracy The bandwidth accuracy of the resolution bandwidth filter is expressed by the deviation from the nominal value of the 3 dB lowered point This specification has almost no effect when measuring the level of a con tinuous signal but it should
111. to TRUE when MSS is set to 1 in the status byte regis ter MSS cannot be read during serial polling but it is 1 when RQS is 1 To read the MSS use the common command STB MSS 6100 to bit5 and bit7 of the status byte register are read by STB In this case the status byte register and MSS are not cleared MSS 15 not set to 0 until all the unmasked factors in the status register structure are cleared A summary of the standard event register The summary bit of the output buffer Not uses in this instrument Always 0 Set to 1 if a signal level error occurs because the sweep 15 too fast 6 17 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 5 3 Status Byte 6 18 5 Standard Event Register Assignments in the standard event register are listed below Functional definition Power on Description Set to 1 when the power is turned on Always 0 Command Error Set to 1 if the parser detects a syntax error Execution Error Set to 1 if an instruction that was received as a GPIB command fails to execute for some reason e g the parameter is out of range Device Dependent Error Set to 1 if any errors except for Command Error Exe cution Error and Query Error occur Query Error Set to 1 if no data exists or 1f data 1s lost when the controller tries to read data from this instrument Request Control Not uses in this instrument Operation Complete Not uses
112. voltage 30 dBm Input attenuator gt 10 dB Preamp Off 13 dBm Input attenuator 0 dB Preamp On 15 VDCmax 10 dBm Input attenuator 0 dB 25 VDCmax Input attenuator range RF Input 1 RF Input 2 0 to 50 dB 10 dB step 0 to 30 dB 10 dB step Display range 100 50 20 10 5 dB Linear Scale unit dBm dBmV dBuVemf dBpW W V Reference level setting range RF Input 1 RF Input 2 140 dBm to 40 dBm 140 dBm to 20 dBm Detector mode Normal Positive Peak Negative Peak Sample RMS Video Average U3700 Series User s Guide 7 3 4 Amplitude Accuracy 7 3 4 Amplitude Accuracy Description Specifications Calibration signal accuracy 20 MHz Frequency 20 MHz Amplitude 20 dBm Accuracy 0 3 dB Scale display accuracy Log 20 5 dB 10 dB 0 5 dB 80 dB 0 2 dB 1 dB Total level accuracy After performing the automatic calibration Image Suppression Off Signal level 10 dBm to 50 dBm Preamp Off Input attenu ator 10 dB REF 0 dBm Temperature 20 to 30 RF Input 1 0 8 dB 0 Frequency 10 MHz to 3 1 GHz 1 Frequency 3 1 GHz to 8 GHz 1 5 dB Frequency 9 kHz to 10 MHz RF Input 2 0 8 dB Band0 Frequency 10 MHz to 3 1 GHz 1 dB Bandl Frequency 3 1 GHz to 8 GHz 3 0 dB Band2 Frequency 7 8 GHz to 14 573 GHz 3 5 dB Band3 Frequency 14 4288 GHz to 28 0 GHz 4 5 dB Band4 Frequency 27 8 GHz to 31 8 GHz U3771
113. waveform does not change The TG response affects the measurement accuracy in the following cases The unit under test has high Q and sharp level change characteristics For example crystal filter The measurement is performed in the wide frequency span REF 0 00 dBm 10 0 dB TG Level 3 TG Level Offset OFF 4 TG Freq Offset 5 Normalize f Reference 100 T Line 1 500 GHz SPAN 3 000 GHz ON OFF RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz ATT 10 dB Measuring the insertion loss Press Delta Ref Line ON OFF The MKA value displays the level difference to the reference line Press PEAK The marker level indicates the insertion loss of the filter REF 0 00 dBm 120 CENTER 1 9000 GHz RBW 3 MHz Measuring the 1 dB bandwidth VBW 3 MHz U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG 76 77 TG Normz MKA 1 9126 GHz 1 0 70 dB Capture Hnrmz Data 3 Normalize Correction Reference 4 Line 200 0 MHz ON OFF SWP 20 ms 10 dB 1 Start from the state of the insertion loss measurement Press MEAS2 XdB Down XdB Level 1 GHz dBm and Execute Down A marker is displayed at the right and left points on the waveform at a level which 15 1 dB below the peak The marker frequency indicates the 1 dB bandwidth of the filter REF 0 00 dBm CENTER 1 3000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz X DB Down MKA 74 8 MHz 1 0 01 dB Ex
114. window Network Setting Obtain an IP address automatically v Use the following IP address IP Address 1928 168 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 R3162 Mode ON OFF U3751 U3771 U3772 ON The following R3162GPIB commands can be used and their operations are the same as those of the R3162 For more information on the commands refer to the R3162 manual Command OBW ON OFF OBWEXE ACPEXE LIMTYP LMTAIN LMTADEL LIMAPOS REL LIMASFT LIMSFT AT 0DB RO DL OFF Operates in the U3700 series command system 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 SYSTEM R3131 Mode ON OFF U3741 ON Except for certain R3131 R3131A functions the same GPIB commands as those for the R3131 R3131A can be used For more information on commands refer to the R3131 Series Operation Manual Unavailable functions Trigger LINE EMC Calibration Hard Copy OFF Operates in the U3700 series command system Parser AT SCPI Selects a remote command set to be used AT The AT Advantest command set 15 selected SCPI SCPI command set is selected Trace Points 501 1001 Switches the horizontal axis trace points to 501 or 1001 501 Sets trace points to 501 points 1001 Sets trace points to 1001 points Calibration Displays the Calibration menu Calibrate ALL Performs all calibrations Each Item Displays the Each Item menu Total Gain RF Path 1 Measures the a
115. 0 100Base T Protocol TCP IP 7 14 VGA 15pin f on the rear panel U3700 Series User s Guide 7 4 General Specifications 7 4 General Specifications Description Specifications Operation environment Ambient temperature 0 C to 50 Relative humidity 8596 or less no condensation Storage environmental range Ambient temperature 20 C to 60 C Relative humidity 85 or less no condensation AC Power supply input 100 V to 120 V 50 Hz 60 Hz AC220 V to 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz Automatically switches the input voltage between 100 V AC and 220 V AC DC Power input DC 11 V to 17 V Power consumption 100 VA or less For the AC power supply 70 W or less For the DC power supply Dimensions Approximately 308 mm W x 175 mm H x 209 mm D Approximately 337 mm W x 190 mm H x 307 mm D Including the handle and feet Approximately 5 0 kg or less without option U3741 Approximately 5 6 kg or less without option U3751 Approximately 6 kg or less without option U3771 U3772 7 15 03700 Series User s Guide 7 5 Options 7 55 Options 7 5 1 Option 10 2 Channel Input Option Can be Installed only in the U3741 Item Description Frequency Sweep Amplitude range Amplitude accuracy Dynamic range Input and output General specifications Conforms to the standard specifications except the items shown below and the specific
116. 00 Series User s Guide 5 2 8 TRACE 5 2 8 Displays Trace menu performs settings related to trace The Trace menu includes the trace selection menu which corresponds to the menu key 7 The trace is changed each time the key is pressed A B gt Trace A B C A Selects trace memory A B Selects trace memory B Selects trace memory TRACE Refresh Refresh Write Calc View Detector Blank Detector AUTO MNL Trace A B C Det Avg Mode RMS Video Write Math Min Hold Trace A B C Max Hold Average Average START STOP Power AVerage Max Sweep Count Max Hold Continuous Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE Normal B Average START STOP Posi Nega Max Sweep Count Average PAUSE CONT Sample L Average ONCE SLIDE Average Trace A B C Subtract OFF Store A B gt A Trace A B C B A gt A B A gt B A B gt B Display Line ON OFF More 1 2 OFF B A gt C A DL gt A B DL B Display Line ON OFF TRC gt A gt TRC gt C Trace A B C 5 43 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 8 TRACE Refresh Displays the Refresh Mode menu The selected setting is displayed at the bottom of the menu Refresh Write Refreshes trace data in each sweep View Displays the trace data stored in the memory Blank Hides the trace Traces A B and C cannot be set to Blank at the same time Trace A B C Selects the app
117. 00 Series User s Guide A 6 3 Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting Channel Number and Frequency A 6 3 Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting Channel Number and Frequency UHF that supports terrestrial digital broadcasting 2 Channel F k D 13 13 470 00 476 00 473 142857 14 14 476 00 482 00 479 142857 15 15 482 00 488 00 485 142857 16 16 488 00 494 00 491 142857 17 17 494 00 500 00 497 142857 18 18 500 00 506 00 503 142857 19 19 506 00 512 00 509 142857 20 20 512 00 518 00 515 142857 21 21 518 00 524 00 521 142857 22 22 524 00 530 00 527 142857 23 23 530 00 536 00 533 142857 24 24 536 00 542 00 539 142857 25 25 542 00 548 00 545 142857 26 26 548 00 554 00 551 142857 27 27 554 00 560 00 557 142857 28 28 560 00 566 00 563 142857 29 29 566 00 572 00 569 142857 30 30 572 00 578 00 575 142857 31 31 578 00 584 00 581 142857 32 32 584 00 590 00 587 142857 33 33 590 00 596 00 593 142857 34 34 596 00 602 00 599 142857 35 35 602 00 608 00 605 142857 36 36 608 00 614 00 611 142857 37 37 614 00 620 00 617 142857 38 38 620 00 626 00 623 142857 39 39 626 00 632 00 629 142857 40 40 632 00 638 00 635 142857 41 41 638 00 644 00 641 142857 42 42 644 00 650 00 647 142857 43 43 650 00 656 00 653 142857 44 44 656 00 662 00 659 142857 03700 Series User s Guide A 6 3 Terrestrial Di
118. 1 6 10 3 11 Subsystem MMEMory n 6 91 6 10 3 12 Subsystem OUTPut 6 92 6 10 3 13_ Subsystem READ 6 92 5 10314 SubDsystem SENSe caben bo nie Od EPIO EH EEE RTE 6 94 6 10 3 15_ Subsystem SOURce RE 6 103 6 10 3 16 Subsystem SYSTem eva M Eon Epl 6 103 6 10 3 17 Subsystem TRACe n nn sss 6 104 6 10 3 18 Subsystem TRIG ger OG OR Cr ER ccc 6 105 6 10 3 19 Subsystem UNIT P 6 105 T mk 6 106 6 10 4 Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used 6 107 7 SPECIFICATIONS Pc 7 1 7 1 113741 Performance Specifications 7 2 7 1 1 Mee 7 2 7 1 2 c PHI 7 3 7 1 3 Amplitude 7 3 7 1 4 Amplitude Accuracy MENO 7 4 7 1 5 Dynamic 7 4 7 1 6 Input and Output iiie rtt EAE EINE 7 5 7 2 1013751 Performance Specifications e PR ac SE nus 7 6 7 2 1 E Sua E
119. 1 2 3 5 26 5 35 5 27 5 28 jc 5 55 5 29 5 30 TG Freq Offset ON OFF 5 55 5 32 5 34 5 55 5 35 5 36 TG Level Offset ON OFF 5 55 5 39 TG ON OEE pasa pans 5 55 Screen Shot Config 5 8 5 13 Time vs 02 5 66 5 70 Select eios paq ss 5 50 ROTE 5 18 5 22 Select Marker 2 2 5 47 5 48 Total Gain RF Path 1 5 7 5 11 5 50 Total Gain RF Path 2 5 7 5 11 Selecting Command Set 6 1 Total Power sse 5 25 5 28 Self Testi e eere ovre eias 5 8 5 16 TRAGE 5 43 Shift X 5 65 5 68 Trace A B C 5 43 5 44 Shift Y 5 65 5 69 5 45 5 46 Show Mask ON OFF 5 26 5 32 5 55 5 56 Show ON OFF 5 8 5 13 Trace Points 501 1001 5 7 5 11 Signal Identification ON OFF 5 57 5 60 TROSA rran aa at 5 43 5 46 Signal Track ree 5 47 5 49 idees na UO RO RUE PITE 5 43 5 46 Signal Track ON OFF 5 47 5 49 TROSO 5 43 5 46 Slide Screen ON OFF 5 62 5 63 TRIG Bet asas 5 6
120. 10 3 6 Subsystem FETch Function description Fetch ACP results SCPI command 1 2 3 4 5 FETch ACPower Parameter Query reply number of rows lower channel fre quency Frequency lower channel amplitude Amplitude upper channel fre quency Frequency upper channel amplitude Amplitude Remarks Fetch ACP Reference Power 1 FETch ACPower RPO Wer Amplitude Fetch Average Power Measurement 1 FETch AVPower Amplitude Fetch the Channel Power 1 FETch CHPower Amplitude Fetch the Power Spectral Density for Channel Power Measurement 1 FETch CHPower DENSity Power per Herz Fetch Harmonics Results 1 2 3 4 5 FETCh HAR Monics number of rows marker index Integer frequency Frequency amplitude Amplitude amplitude difference Relative amplitude Fetch the Intermodulation Results array 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FETch IM number of rows Lower Frequency Marker Index Integer Lower Frequency Marker Number Integer Lower Frequency Distortion Amplitude Amplitude Upper Frequency Marker Index Integer Upper Frequency Marker Number Integer Upper Frequency Distortion Amplitude Amplitude Intermodulation Product Amplitude Lower Frequency Test Result Pass Fail Result Upper Frequency Test Result Pass Fail Result Fetch the Intermodulation Gap 1 FETch IM DELTa
121. 12 dT 6 38 6 8 13 onn MTM T H 6 41 6 8 14 jy A 6 42 6 8 15 U 6 46 6 8 16 Calibration sensone 6 46 6 8 17 Saver Recall uuu aasan akta qosa a UAE RU E E 6 47 6 8 18 Fil Man AS SiMe Ot MM 6 49 6 8 19 A 6 49 6 8 20 luc 6 50 6 8 21 GPIB P 6 50 6 8 22 eu 6 51 6 8 23 TIG c ss 6 52 6 8 24 u an 6 53 6 9 Example of Remote Control Programs 6 54 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control 1 1 111 ette ete 6 54 6 9 1 1 Reading the GPIB Control Library for Visual Basic 6 54 6 9 1 2 Program Examples Using VB 6 54 6 9 1 3 Sample Programs for Reading Data 6 57 6 9 1 4 Sample Programs for Inputting or Outputting Trace Data 6 62 6 9 1 5 Example Program for Screen Image Output 6 69 6 9 1 6 Example Program Which Uses the TS Take Sweep Command 6 70 6 9 1 7
122. 2 5 45 5 45 5 45 03700 Series User s Guide Display Line ON OFF Display List ON OFF Display REL ABL ABR Disposal and Recycle Dynamic Filter ON OFF Enable Register Error Messages Event Enable Register Event Example of Remote Control Programs Example Program for Screen Image Output Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used PROGRAMS 5 Extended Configuration options Ext Trigger Level External 5 43 5 47 5 51 5 69 5 47 5 50 5 36 9 10 7 4 7 13 5 46 5 50 5 65 5 48 5 53 5 38 7 8 5 66 5 66 Alphabetical Index F Factory 5 8 5 16 EIEE 5 ttt aie 5 18 File Control eee 5 8 5 14 5 18 5 19 File Format BIN XML 5 18 5 20 File Format PNG BMP 5 8 5 13 File Management 6 49 File Output to USB Memory 4 28 Fine CN 5 7 5 11 Fixed Mkr ON OFF eee 5 47 5 48 MEAS nente tir e arias 5 37 5 41 5 8 5 13 Format Media 5 18 5 20 Formula 1 ON OFF oseere 5 57 5 60 Formula 2 ON OFF
123. 2 5 33 Peak List Level eee 5 47 5 50 Symbol Rate 5 26 5 31 5 53 5 33 Peak Menu 2 5 47 5 48 Nyquist Filter ON OFF 5 26 5 31 Peak to 5 54 5 32 Peak to 5 54 Peak Zoom 2 5 61 O PLL BW azas eidem 5 72 5 73 OBW a TL 5 25 5 30 2 S ML NI ME e udis ae 5 45 Power Average NADA s 543 5 44 ower Supply 2 On Trace A B C 525 528 DEECADHONS WHEN DSING 5 27 5 28 THE 03700 2 1 5 29 5 30 5 32 5 34 Preset EET 6 50 Previous Band 242222211 5 26 5 35 5 36 5 38 de 5 40 Principle of Operation A 4 Print Config 5 8 5 15 03700 Series User s Guide Alphabetical Index Product Overview Program Examples Using VB QUICK GUIDE R3131 Mode ON OFF R3162 Mode ON OFF Range FULL WIN RBW 1 MHz 2 RBW 200 Hz RBW 9 KHZ RBW Auto eren RBW CAL tuendo iip Reading Reading the Control Library for Visual Basic Rear Panel cotone ERES Ref na tute teen Ref Freq 10 Ref Level Ref Object Ref Offset ON OFF
124. 2 5 63 5 43 5 44 2 Channel ON OFF 5 17 5 45 2 Channel Preset 5 17 Average PAUSE CONT 5 36 5 38 2 Channels Viewer 5 17 5 40 5 43 2 5 62 5 63 5 44 3GPP DL Modulation 5 17 Average 5 25 5 29 S dB diVi ka l 5 62 5 63 Average START STOP 5 36 5 38 A BA ERR 5 43 5 45 5 39 5 43 ABB RERUM 5 43 5 46 5 44 5 43 5 46 Averaging ON OFF 5 25 5 26 5 25 5 30 5 27 5 28 A DL A 5 43 5 46 5 29 5 30 All AUto 1er eret nene 5 72 5 73 5 32 AMPLITUDE enr 5 62 REM 5 43 5 45 Annotations ON OFF 5 7 5 9 P AD u u irt 5 43 5 45 APPLI ua eese 5 17 EOM 5 43 5 46 Pd ep 5 62 Bands Definition 5 26 5 33 AUTO MNL n 5 62 5 34 Attenuation 0 dB 5 62 B DE SB eicere irritas 5 43 5 46 LOCO 5 72 5 73 Black and White 5 8 5 12 Auto Inc Index 5 8 5 13 Blank o Hes 5 43 5 44 Auto Inc ON OFF 5 8 5 13 c e 5 43 5 44 Auto name Index 5 18 5 20 Calibrate ALL 5 7
125. 2 2 Removing the Case T 2 1 2 3 Electromagnetic Interference n 2 1 2 4 Note when Turning on Power enne 2 3 SETUP E DE 3 1 3 1 Inspection on Delivery UE Eri RENE 3 1 3 2 Locating This Instrument voces gia RU VEN U MER ERA eR Ep an ERR Mee ona 3 3 3 2 1 Operatine Environment occi R 3 3 3 3 Ac 3 4 3 3 1 Using the AC PowersS pply uuu a 3 4 3 3 1 1 AC Power d He POR EATR Eiaa 3 4 3 3 1 2 Connecting the Power Cable aa assaassnasaaaasssasqasssassssasssssssas 3 5 3 3 2 Using a Battery c HA 3 6 3 3 2 1 Battery Mount System EEEE RU Vx dU SM UEM NIS tes 3 6 3 3 2 2 Ch rging the Battery T 3 7 3 3 3 Using the External DC Power 3 8 3 3 3 1 DC Power Requirements 3 8 3 3 3 2 Connecting the DC Power Cable 3 8 3 4 Caution when Connecting Peripherals
126. 2 Using a Battery 4 ect Button Locking 14 STIIAIWAIIx switch for locking 2 Locking Eject button The slide switch to lock the Eject button is located on the right side of the battery mount lower side of the Eject button The Eject button is locked by setting the slide switch to upper side Set the slide switch to the lower side and release the lock before the battery pack 1s attached or detached 3 3 2 2 Charging Battery This instrument cannot charge the external battery pack Use a suitable battery charger for the battery pack For the DIONIC 90 The TITAN TWIN charger A870009 is recommended When the TITAN TWIN charger is used the charging time is approximately 5 5 hours 3 7 U3700 Series User s Guide 3 3 3 Using the External DC Power Supply 3 3 3 Using the External DC Power Supply 3 3 3 1 DC Power Requirements DC power supply Requirements Power supply voltage range 11 V to 17 V Power consumption 70 W or less 3 3 3 2 Connecting the DC Power Cable 1 Remove AC power cable and detach the battery 2 Connectan A114020 Sold separately external DC power cable to the DC power supply input con nector on the rear panel CAUTION Do not reverse the polarity of the DC power supply 3 To remove the DC power cable turn off the power supply of this instrument and remove the external DC power cable while pushing t
127. 250000000E 07 Displays the data on the screen 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Example 6 Reading and displaying the three largest peak levels Dim pk1 As String pk2 As String pk3 As String Call ibclr spa Call ibwrt spa CF OMZ Call ibwrt spa SP 100MZ Call ibwrt spa TS Call ibwrt spa PS Call ibwrt spa ML Rdbuff Space 25 Call ibrd spa Rdbuff pkl LeftB Rdbuff InStrB 1 Call ibwrt spa NXP Call ibwrt spa ML Rdbuff Space 25 Call ibrd spa Rdbuff pk2 LeftB Rdbuff InStrB 1 Call ibwrt spa NXP Call ibwrt spa ML Rdbuff Space 25 Call ibrd spa Rdbuff pk3 LeftB Rdbuff InStrB 1 RichTextBoxl Text 1st PK An example display ist PK 8 553906250000E 01 2nd PK 7 004687500000 01 3rd PK 8 655468750000 01 Performs a device clear Applies the settings Executes the peak search Query command to search for the marker level Allocates the buffer memory Receives the output Rdbuff Chr 13 1 1 Reads the data between the starting point and the delimiter Searches for the next peak Rdbuff Chr 13 1 1 Reads the data between the starting point and the delimiter Rdbuff Chr 13 1 1 Reads the data between the starting point and the delimiter amp pkl 6 vbCrLf 2nd PK pk2 vbCrLf 6 3rd PK amp pk3 amp vbCrLf D
128. 32 6 32 DETB rettet 6 32 DETC ttem emm eot ides 6 32 6 51 en sun huu 6 51 6 51 IDEE 6 51 DLN p 6 34 6 34 DEN ON an n a q eei earn ete 6 34 NIP wasa ip 6 37 DUALCH patas 6 35 DUALDCHINIT reete 6 35 DY L Sta 6 38 E 6 54 6 47 FA 6 25 FACH 6 25 FACHO ettet renes 6 25 6 25 ree thieves HE 6 25 FB n 6 25 FBCH 6 25 6 25 EBCHON sence iin saa a 6 26 6 25 6 48 FILEFORMAT eee 6 48 BIEEMEDTIXA iere 6 48 FINPMD 2526 6 25 FMMENXS onere rtr pee 6 41 6 41 6 41 FO 3 6 25 reete 6 25 6 25 een one np 6 34 139 6 36 GDATA repens 6 50 GIMAG 6 50 GE uD suu ema Te 6 51 03700 Series User s Guide 6 7 AT Command Index GITPOS eh 6 29 EMTBINP u aS aaa 6 33 edic 6 29 LMTBINT eere 6 34 GTSRGQ si
129. 32400 BEG 032413 BEG 032415 BPG 032410 BPG 032411 BPG 032412 BPB 032890 BPC 032551 BPG 032405 BPG 032409 BPG 033493 BPG 034304 BPG 034495 BPG 034498 BEG 036043 199001 Accessory Electronic components Semicon ductors capacitors inductors resis tors electric components Connectors Beryllium and Beryllium compounds WBL FUS COXCBL WBL U3751 F WBL U377X F WBL FUS HONTAI E WHB THK700 BEG 032413 BPG 033493 BPG 034495 Electric components Switches connectors U3700 Series User s Guide 9 9 Product Disposal and Recycle Substance Component Location Parts and material Arsenic and Arsenic compounds WBL FUSZFRONT E Module Inverter electronic com WHB THK700 ponents GaAs BEG 032413 BEG 036043 Lead and Lead compounds WBL FUSZFRONT E Electronic components mounted on WBL FUSZCOXCBL the printed circuit board and lead WBL FUS OPT20 solder used for mounting WBL FUS FRONT E WBL FUS HONTAI E BEB 032400 BEG 032413 BEG 032415 BPG 032410 BPG 032411 BPG 032412 BPB 032890 BPC 032551 BPG 032405 BPG 032409 BPG 033493 BPG 034304 BPG 034495 BPG 034498 BEG 036043 A199001 Accessory Vinyl chloride PVC WBL FUS COXCBL PVC material resin parts WBL FUS OPT20 WBL FUS FRONT E 9 12 03700 Series User s Guide APPENDIX Initial Setting List This section describes the default preset parameter setting list APPENDIX Values are set for the i
130. 4 GPIB Remote Control System 6 2 GPIB Remote Programming 6 19 Graph ON OFF 5 26 5 32 I 3 03700 Series User s Guide Alphabetical Index Graphic Graphic Z 1 Screen Graphic Z 2 Screens Graphic Zoom 1 ON OFF Graphic Zoom 2 ON OFF Hard Copy Output Harmonic Header ga aaa aaa emere High Sensitivity ON OFF How to Cancel an UNCAL Message 1 Identifying an Image Signal If a Fault Occurs Image Suppression ON OFF In Case of Difficulty Imt Table ueneno Initial Setting List Input and Output Input Impedance 50 75 Input Saturation Insert Insert Line Inspection on Deliver INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION LAN 1 4 5 69 5 70 5 69 5 70 5 39 5 40 5 64 5 38 5 21 Limit Line Edit esses Limit L4n s eice tine cie crees Limit Setup Line 1 ABV BLW Measurement Measurement Examples Measuring by using the TG 76 77 Measuring Window Media Menu Operation Data Entry Message Exchange Message Exchanging Protocol Method of Storing
131. 47 dBuV Frequency Offset ON Spurious output Harmonics Non harmonics Output level 97 dBu V 100 kHz to 1 MHz 1 MHz to 2 2 GHz Frequency Offset OFF TG leakage lt 39 dBuV Input attenuator 0 dB Output impedance VSWR 75 Q nom lt 2 typ Output level lt 97 dBuV Maximum allowable input 117 dBuV 10 V U3700 Series User s Guide 7 5 8 Option 76 Tracking Generator 7 5 8 Option 76 Tracking Generator Description Specifications Frequency range 100 kHz to 3 GHz Frequency offset Range 0 to 1 GHz Resolution 1 kHz Accuracy 300 Hz Output level range 0 to 60 dBm 0 5 dB step Output level accuracy 0 5 dB 20 MHz 10 dBm 20 C to 30 C Output level flatness Reference signal level 10 dBm Frequency 20 MHz 1 0 dB 1 MHz to 1 GHz 1 5 dB 100 kHz to 3 GHz Output level switching uncertainty Reference level 10 dBm 1 0 dB 1 MHz to 1 GHz 0to 60 dBm 2 0 dB 1 MHz to 2 6 GHz 0 to 60 dBm 3 0 dB 100 kHz to 3 GHz 0 to 30 dBm Frequency Offset OFF 4 0 dB 100 kHz to 3 GHz 30 5 to 60 dBm Frequency Offset OFF 5 0 dB 100 kHz to 3 GHz 0 to 60 dBm Frequency Offset ON Spurious output Output level 10 dBm Harmonics 100 kHz to 1 MHz 1 MHz to 3 GHz Non harmonics Frequency Offset OFF TG leakage lt Input attenuator 0 dB Output impedance VSWR Output level lt 10 dBm Maximum allowable input 10 dBm 10 V 7 22 U3700 Series
132. 5 5 66 Slope NEG POS 5 65 5 66 5 62 5 63 5 67 User Password 5 8 5 12 SOUMG 53 qa 5 37 5 41 VBW AUTO MNL 5 72 Sound AM FM 5 37 5 41 VBW RBW 5 72 5 73 SOURCE 5 65 5 66 5 7 5 9 5 67 Vertical Scale LIN LOG 5 62 5 63 SPAN 5 61 5 65 5 66 SPAM icono er D den dens 5 61 VIEW casco un e 5 43 5 44 SPAN RBW ON OFF 5 72 5 73 H M 5 62 5 63 Spectrum Analyzer 5 17 Volume eene He en 5 37 5 42 03700 Series User s Guide 5 1 Menu Index Watts Window Sweep ON OFF Window Width s X dB DOWN en cores Y Range Y Search Domain Zero Span Zoom and Contexts Zoom Position Zoom Width 2 sss 5 6 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 Functional Descriptions S Functional Descriptions This section describes the functions of the panel keys and soft keys MEMO C _ indicates a panel key All other names are soft menus 5 2 1 SYSTEM This subsection de
133. 5 11 Auto Tune 5 61 Calibration 5 7 5 11 Auto name Radix 5 18 5 20 Calibration Corrections ON OFF 5 7 5 11 WU NT 5 43 5 44 Calibration Int Ref 5 7 5 11 5 45 Capture Normz Data 5 55 Average Control 5 25 5 26 Carrier Bandwidth 5 26 5 31 5 27 5 28 5 32 5 29 5 30 Center ees ect 5 57 5 32 5 36 Center CH ON OFF 5 57 5 58 5 38 5 39 CF Step Size AUTO MNL 5 57 5 1 03700 Series User s Guide 5 1 Menu Index Ch Windows ON OFF 5 26 5 32 Channel Definition 5 26 Channel 5 57 Channel Position 5 25 Channel Power 5 25 Channel Width 5 25 Channels Config 5 57 Clear i as etra terere 5 47 Clear Others 22 5 47 re ere ve ER 5 7 Color Mode Color Gray 5 8 Color Pattern 5 eee 5 8 er yesen tee oia nnen nay 5 8 Golot2 5 8 Command Reference Syntax 6 76 Config eine retient 5 26 5 32 5 50 Config Driver 2 5 8 Context 5 66
134. 5 75 16 C16 126 00 132 00 129 127 25 131 75 17 17 132 00 138 00 135 133 25 137 75 18 18 138 00 144 00 141 139 25 143 75 19 19 144 00 150 00 147 145 25 149 75 20 20 150 00 156 00 153 151 25 155 75 21 21 156 00 162 00 159 157 25 161 75 22 22 164 00 170 00 167 165 25 169 75 23 23 222 00 228 00 225 223 25 227 75 24 24 230 00 236 00 233 231 25 235 75 25 25 236 00 242 00 239 237 25 241 75 26 C26 242 00 248 00 245 243 25 247 75 27 27 248 00 254 00 251 249 25 253 75 28 C28 252 00 258 00 255 253 25 257 75 29 C29 258 00 264 00 261 259 25 263 75 30 C30 264 00 270 00 267 265 25 269 75 03700 Series User s Guide A 6 1 CATV Channel Number and Frequency Analyzer s channel Channel Frequency range MHz 270 00 276 00 Center frequency MHz Picture frequency MHz Sound frequency MHz 276 00 282 00 282 00 288 00 288 00 294 00 294 00 300 00 300 00 306 00 306 00 312 00 312 00 318 00 318 00 324 00 324 00 330 00 330 00 336 00 336 00 342 00 342 00 348 00 348 00 354 00 354 00 360 00 360 00 366 00 366 00 372 00 372 00 378 00 378 00 384 00 384 00 390 00 390 00 396 00 396 00 402 00 402 00 408 00 408 00 414 00 414 00 420 00 420 00 426 00 426 00 432 00 432 00
135. 6 Sweep Time AUTO MNL 5 72 SYSTEM uu u a uha ren 5 7 T Table 5 47 5 50 5 52 5 57 5 59 5 65 5 69 Table No 1 2 3 5 26 5 35 Television Signal Measurement 4 57 Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting A 31 y coe 5 55 6 52 TG Option sse 5 55 TG Freq Offset ON OFF 5 55 Alphabetical Index TG Level 5 55 Level Offset ON OFF 5 55 aa sasaqa eere 5 55 Time ys 5 66 5 70 Title 5 18 5 22 Total Gain RF Path 1 5 7 5 11 Total Gain RF Path 2 5 7 5 11 Total POWER iecit intet rete 5 25 5 28 TRACE saka tete re 5 43 Trate iioc erbe beds 6 29 Trace A B C 2 5 43 5 44 5 45 5 46 5 55 5 56 Trace Data uyu s 6 62 Trace Points 501 1001 5 7 5 11 Transportation 9 3 TRC X accensi ettet 5 43 5 46 RCSB oce teste tet tete etia 5 43 5 46 TRESC 5 43 5 46 THB BET iiie ei ires 5 65 5 66 6 28 TS Take Sweep command 6 70 TV Channel Table Japan A 27 Types of Systems 6 1 U 03741 Performance Specifications 7 2 U3751 Performance Specifications 7 6 Um us
136. 8 5 14 Spectrum sse 5 17 5 18 5 19 Spectrum 5 17 Report HIDE SHOW 5 7 5 11 Spurious 2 1 21100 0 5 25 5 34 Reset Context 5 66 5 71 5 57 Resolution 22 5 36 5 40 Start CH Offset ON OFF 5 57 5 58 Resolution 1 2 5 36 5 40 Start CH ON OFF eee 5 57 5 58 Resolution 1 kHz 5 36 5 40 Step ATT CAL 5 7 Resolution 10 Hz 5 36 5 40 STOD 5 57 Resolution 100 Hz 5 36 5 40 Stop CH Offset ON OFF 5 57 5 58 Restore Defaults 5 25 5 26 Stop CH ON OFF 5 57 5 58 5 27 5 28 di CoU HERES 5 7 5 11 5 29 5 30 5 43 5 46 5 32 5 34 5 43 5 45 5 35 5 36 Sweep Mode SGL CNT 5 65 5 66 5 39 Sweep Time AUTO MNL 5 72 a e ee nter eds 5 26 5 35 SYSTEM i sie ee ere 5 7 Round Grid Values ON OFF 5 62 5 64 Table 5 47 5 50 Sample 5 43 5 45 5 52 5 57 DAVE EE 5 18 5 59 5 65 SaVe aS uestes burn b er ECHO E 5 18 5 19 5 69 Save Defaults 5 25 5 26 Table No
137. A870009 Carrying bag A129001 Transit case A129002 Rack mount kit JIS A122003 Rack mount kit EIA A124004 Highpass filter 2 8 GHz to 18 GHz A899001 Highpass filter 8 GHz to 18 GHz A899002 Highpass filter 11 GHz to 26 GHz A899003 Highpass filter 18 GHz to 30 GHz A899004 VSWR bridge A199001 8 2 03700 Series User s Guide 9 9 1 9 1 1 9 MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE This chapter describes the following matters related to the maintenance of this instrument in order to maintain its designed performance 9 1 Cleaning 9 2 About Calibration 9 3 About Replacement of Limited Life Parts 9 4 Method of Storing the Instrument 9 5 Transportation 9 6 Notes for Requesting Repair Replacement of Parts and Periodic Calibration 9 7 List of Error Messages 9 8 In Case of Difficulty 9 9 Product Disposal and Recycle Cleaning This section describes how to clean this instrument and some matters to note WARNING Turn off the power breaker on the rear panel and extract the power cable from the wall socket to pro tect yourself from electric shock accidents Never attempt to remove the cabinet cover to clean the inside of the instrument Cabinet Cleaning Use the following procedure to clean the cabinet of this instrument Clean the cabinet surface with a soft dry cloth Ifthe surface is not clean enough try again with a cloth soaked in a weakened neutral detergent Then wip
138. ARMonics FUNDamental Frequency Frequency 6 99 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Enable User Defined Harmonics Fundamental Frequency SCPI command SENSe HARMonics FUNDamental STATe 1 1 SENSe STATe HARMonics FUNDamental Parameter Query reply Remarks Set Harmonics Maximum Order SENSe HARMonics NUMBer 1 1 SENSe HARMonics NUMBer Integer Integer Set Intermodulation Maximum Sweep Count SENSe IM AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe IM AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set Intermodulation Averaging Control SENSe IM AVERage TCONrol 21 1 SENSe IM AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Enable Intermodulation Averaging SENSe IM AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe IM AVERage STATe ON OFF Restore Intermodulation Settings SENSe IM DATA LOAD Save Current Settings for Intermod ulation SENSe IM DATA SAVE Enable Limit Testing for Intermod ulation SENSe IM LIM STATe 1 1 SENSe IM LIM STATe ON OFF Set Intermodulation Maximum Order SENSe IM ORDER 21 1 SENSe IM ORDER Integer Integer Set Intermodulation Limits SENSe IM THReshold 1 22 1 SENSe IM THReshold 1 Intermodulation order index Relative amplitude Relative amplitude Set Occupied Band Width Maxi mum Sweep Count SENSe
139. AVE Select Total Power Trace 6 102 SENSe TOTPower TRACe 1 1 SENSe TOTPower TRACe Trace index Trace index 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 15 Subsystem SOURce Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Enable TG Reference Line SOURce CORRection RLINe STATe 21 1 SOURce CORRection RLINe STATe Acquire Trace Normalization Data SOURce CORRection TRACe 1 Trace index CAPTure Enable TG Normalization Correction SOURce CORRection TRACez1 Trace index STATe 02 ON OFF 1 SOURce CORRection TRACe 1 STATe Set TG Frequency Offset SOURce FREQuency OFFSet 1 Frequency Frequency 1 SOURce FREQuency OFFSet Enable TG Frequency Offset SOURce FREQuency OFFSet ON OFF 10 STATe 21 1 SOURce FREQuency OFFSet STATe Set TG Level Offset SOURce POWer LEVel Relative amplitude Relative amplitude QMMediate OFFSet 21 1 SOURce POWer LEVel QMMediate OFFSet Enable TG Level Offset SOURce POWer LEVel ON OFF QMMediate OFFSet S TATe 1 1 SOURce POWer LEVel QMMediate OFFSet S TATe Set TG Level SOURce POWer LEVel Amplitude Amplitude IMMediate AMPLitude 1 1 SOURce POWer LEVel QMMediate AMPL itude 6 10 3 16 Subsystem SYSTem Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Execute Factory Initialization
140. Configuration options Source Free Run Ext Trigger Level Video Level External Slope NEG POS IF Delay x Gated Sweep ON OFF Source gt External Slope NEG POS IF Gate Delay Gate Width Window HIDE SHOW Window Position Window Width Window Sweep ON OFF Pass Fail ON OFF Line 1 ON OFF Line 1 ABV BLW Line 2 ON OFF Line 2 ABV BLW Pass Fail Config X ABS CF FA B Limit Line Edit Shift X ON OFF Y ABS REF DL Shift Y ON OFF Display Line ON OFF Limit Line 1 2 Display Line ON OFF Delete Entry Reference Line ON OFF Insert Entry i Table Init 5 65 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options a Sweep Mode SGL CNT Trigger Source Free Run Video External IF Ext Trigger Level Level Slope NEG POS Delay Graphic Z 1 Screen Graphic Zoom 1 ON OFF Graphic Z 2 Screens Window Position Freq Zoom 2 Window Width Freq vs Time Graphic Zoom 2 ON OFF Time vs Time Window Position Reset Context Window Width L Context A B L y Frequency Zoom ON OFF Zoom Position Zoom Width Context A B L y Freq vs Time ON OFF Frequency Pos Context Sets the sweep mode SGL Sets the SINGLE mode The sweep starts by pressing the START STOP key and stops CNT Sets the CONTINUOUS mode Repeats the sweep automatically by the next trigger signal after the swee
141. Culate MARKer FCOunt RESolution Frequency Frequency Query Frequency Counter Measure ment 1 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt X Frequency Enable Frequency Counter CALCulate MARKer FCOunt STATe 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt STATe ON OFF 10 Read Noise Measurement 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion NOISe Power per Herz Set Noise Per Herz Bandwidth CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion NOISe BANDwidth BWIDth 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion NOISe BANDwidth BWIDth Frequency Frequency Enable Continuous X dB Down CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion XDBDown CONTinuous STATe 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion XDBDown CONTinuous STATe ON OFF Set X dB Down Excursion CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion XDBDown LEVel 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion XDBDown LEVel Relative amplitude Relative amplitude Set X dB Down Display Mode CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion XDBDown MODE 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion XDBDown MODE RELative ABSLeft ABSRight REL ABSL ABSR Enable Marker List Display 6 82 CALCulate MARKer TABLe STATe 1 1 CALCulate MARKer TABLe ON OFF 10 Function description Enable Signal Track SCPI command CALCulate MARKer TRCKing STATe 1 1 CALCulate MARKer TRCKing STATe Parameter U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply Remarks Set
142. Data 6 vbLf Reads request of center freq Do While tcpClient BytesReceived 0 Waits for receiving a character DoEvents Loop tcpClient GetData CF Reads setting value SP Space 20 Prepares the text variable for read tcpClient SendData SP amp vbLf Reads request of span freq Do While tcpClient BytesReceived 0 Waits for receiving a character DoEvents Loop tcpClient GetData SP Reads setting value Display setting value Call MsgBox Center freq amp CFS amp Span freq SP End Sub Read signal level using the marker function Public Sub ReadMkrSignal MKLevel Space 20 Prepares the text variable for read tcpClient SendData MLN ON amp vbLf Turns on the marker tcpClient SendData PS amp vbLf Searches peak point of signal tcpClient SendData MF amp vbLf Query the marker frequency Do While tcpClient BytesReceived 0 Waits for receiving a character DoEvents Loop tcpClient GetData 5 Reads it tcpClient SendData ML amp vbLf Query the marker level Do While tcpClient BytesReceived 0 Waits for receiving a character DoEvents Loop tcpClient GetData MKlevel Reads it Display the freq and level of signal Call MsgBox Marker freq amp MKFreq amp Level amp MKLevel End Sub 6 73 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Example 8 Measure Adjacent Channel Power Public Sub MeasAC
143. DeltaLevell lt DLM gt 2 Integer Frequency Harmonics Max Order HARMNUM Integer HARMNUM Harmonics Fundamental HRMFND ON Frequency HRMEND ON HRMFND OFF D n Result set number corresponding to the order LLn Level difference in the lower frequency signal LJn Pass Fail judgment in the lower frequency signal 0 Pass 1 1 Judgment off ULn Level difference in the upper frequency signal UJn Pass Fail judgment in the upper frequency signal lt DLM gt Delimiter 2 Result set number Freqn Harmonic frequency Leveln Harmonic level DeltaLeveln Harmonic level difference with fundamental frequency lt DLM gt Delimiter 0 OFF 1 ON 6 39 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 12 Function AM Modulation Measure ment Command EXE SET Query GET Code AMMOD Argument Format AMMODON Output Format 0 OFF 1 ON AM Modulation Depth AMMOD Real AM Modulation AMMF Frequency FM Measurement FMMEAS ON OFF FMMEASON 0 1 ON FM Frequency Deviation FMMEAS Frequency Modulation Frequency to Sweep time FMMODF ON 3 Frequency FMMODF Frequency FMMODEFY 4 Frequency FMMODFY Frequency FMMODF ON OFF FMMODFON 0 1 ON Sound Mode ON ON AM
144. Displays while the R3131 mode is set to ON in U3741 R3162 mode Displays while the R3162 mode 15 set to ON in U3751 U3771 U3772 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 3 4 1 3 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Rear Panel Names and Functions of Each Part on the Rear Panel This section describes the names and functions of each part on the rear panel 8 9 FEE oF ka ZERAN FE WEN EIC FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGANGT RISK OF FIRE REPLACE WITH AND RATING FUSE ABE WARNING 9 EA ZUROBI F AEBIEOTHED OPERATOR GERVICEAGLE PARTS INSIDE SERVICING HE PROVIDED BY TRAINED INDMDUSLS Ec SERIAL MAVE 10 JAPAN COMMODITY OPTION MAX LINE i Q Xy AC power connector AC power switch EXT TRIG connector EXT REF connector USB A connector LAN connector VIDEO connector IF OUT connector DC INPUT connector 10 Battery mount 11 GP IB connector Figure 4 7 Rear Panel Connects this instrument to the AC power supply by using the included power cable Switches the AC power ON and OFF Inputs the external trigger signal TTL level Inputs the external reference signal
145. E sninen 6 48 6 50 RPAC 6 45 h 6 50 NM 6 50 RFI NACER 6 50 DIS Nun RUNE ME 6 50 UPPER HAM 6 27 6 34 RLN OFF 6 34 REN ON e REOR 6 34 10 MTM MERC anam ata 6 27 RO 6 27 RPWD 6 52 na 6 53 E M 6 51 Sa 6 51 A E 6 51 A 6 41 TEA 6 54 BERE 6 51 6 41 SEM z 6 45 03700 Series User s Guide 6 7 AT Command Index SEMCBW iie reis 6 45 SWM 6 29 SEMLOAD nere 6 45 6 31 2205 0 6 45 u aaa au a 6 45 SEMON suyan 6 45 6 49 SEMRFCALG noster its 6 45 6 30 SEMRFPOW 0220 20 6 45 6 32 scitis etie e REA 6 45 TAB iei 6 32 SEMTDEL 6 45 lcd 6 32 SEMTIN 6 45 6 32 SEMTM ua asashaanasiasishacamaytaqspay 6 45 TBB qapas 6 32 52 6 52 TBG 6 32 SETEUNG
146. ET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Output Format Title String Erase Title 10 MHz Internal Refer ence Signal Source 10 MHz External Refer ence Signal Source Xtal Reference Signal Source Frequency RF Frequency Input RF Connector RFC1 RFC2 RFC RFCI 2 2 Device Select HCDEV Printer PRT 0 Printer USB USB 1 USB Screen Copy HCOPY U37xx Mode SETFUNC SETFUNC 0 SPA 1 3GPPDL 1 1 50 is required 6 49 1173700 Series User s Guide 6 8 20 Preset 6 8 20 Preset Function Preset Command EXE SET Query GET Code Argument Format Code Output Format Factory Init 6 821 GPIB Function Status Byte Clear Command EXE SET Query GET Code Argument Format Code Output Format STB Read STB Integer SRE Read Write SRE Integer ESR Read ESR Integer ESE Read Write Integer ESE Integer OSR Read OPREVT Integer OSER Read Integer OPR Integer SRQ Interrupt ON SRQ Interrupt OFF SRQ status clear Delimiter CR LF EOI Delimiter LF Delimiter EOI Delimiter Local Lockout Remote Control Local Control R3162 Mode INSTR S SA2 INSTR 0 FUS 1 SA2 Refresh Screen in Remote Control SCRF ON OFF
147. Example Programs Which Use the Status Byte 6 71 6 9 1 8 Program Examples Using the LAN sesso teneret erre tan enhn tone 6 72 6 10 SCPI Command Reference 6 75 6 10 1 Command Reference Syntax 6 75 6 10 2 Common Commands 6 77 6 10 3 List of Commands dace qoe teet eti rb eds UIS 6 78 DIU T _ Subsystem CALDCulate 6 78 6 10 3 2 Subsystem CALibration n 6 84 6 10 3 3 Subsystem CONFigure n nanas 6 85 6 10 3 4 Subsystem COUPle n nasus 6 85 U3700 Series User s Guide Table of Contents 6 10 3 5 Subsystem DISPlay 6 85 6 10 36 QURE RUN Dept er n 6 89 6 10 3 7 Subsystem FORMat ANE KO FEY 6 90 6 10 3 8 Su bsyst em HCOPDy SUM cu UNES 6 90 6 10 3 9 Subsystem INITiate e ring 6 91 6 10 3 10 Subsystem INPwuLt prd FU RR dubai 6 9
148. FORM4 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 7 Pass Fail 6 8 7 Pass Fail Function Pass Fail Judgement Command EXE SET Query GET Code Argument Format ON OFF PFC Output Format 0 OFF 1 ON Judgement Result PFJ OPF 0 Pass 4 Error 1 Fail Limit 1 2 Fail Limit 2 3 Fail Limit 1 amp 2 X Position Mode LIMPOS ABS LFT CENT LIMPOS 0 5 1 CENT center freq 2 1 start freq Y Position Mode LIMAPOS ABS REF DL LIMAPOS 0 ABS 1 REF 2 DL X Offset Activate LIMS ON OFF LIMS 0 OFF 1 ON X Offset Frequency Domain LIMSF Frequency LIMSF Frequency X Offset Time Domain LIMST Time LIMST Time Y Offset Activate LIMAS ON OFF LIMAS 0 OFF 1 ON Y Offset LIMASFT DB LIMASFT DB Limit Line 1 LMTA ON OFF LMTA 0 OFF 1 ON Limit Line 1 Frequency Domain Data Input LMTAINF Frequency Level Limit Line 1 Time Domain Data Input LMTAINT Time Level Limit Line 1 Frequency Domain Data Erase LMTADELF Limit Line 1 Time Domain Data Erase LMTADELT Limit Line 2 LMTB Limit Line 2 Frequency Domain Data Input 6 32 LMTBINF Frequency Level 03700 Series User s Guide Function Command EXE SET 6 8 8 Display Query GET Code A
149. Frequency Fetch the Intermodulation Frequency Ref erence 1 FETch IM REFerence Frequency 6 89 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Fetch OBW Results 1 2 FETch 0BW Occupied Bandwidth Frequency Frequency Error Frequency Fetch Spectrum Emission Mask Results 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 number of rows FETch SEMask channel enabled 10 channel start frequency Frequency channel stop frequency Frequency channel center frequency max power Frequency absolute power Amplitude power relative to the carrier Relative amplitude test result Pass Fail Result Fetch Spectrum Emission Mask Reference 1 FETch SEMask RPO Wer Amplitude Power Fetch All Spurious Results 1 2 3 4 Spurious band number of rows FETch SPURious BAND 1 index spurious frequency Frequency spurious level Amplitude test Pass Fail Result Fetch Total Power 1 FETch TOTPower Amplitude Fetch Power Spectral Density for Total 1 FETch TOTPower DENSity Power per Herz Power Measurement 6 10 3 7 Subsystem FORMat Set File Format FORMat FILE 1 BINary XML 1 FORMat FILE Set Trace Buffer Transfer Format FORMat TRACe DATA 1 ASCii BINary 1 FORMat TRACe DATA 6 10 3 8 Subsystem HCOPy Set Hard Copy Device HCOPy DEVice TYPE 1
150. Integer Dim i As Integer trdata 0 1792 Creates a temporary test value used to test the input For i 1 To 1000 Step 1 trdata i Str Val trdata i 1 12 DoEvents Next i If measurement data exists the steps between the place marked with and this point are not required Call ibclr spa Performs a device clear Call ibwrt spa AB Sets Trace A to BLANK Call ibwrt spa TAA Sets Trace A in ASCII For i 0 To 1000 Step 1 Repeats the operation for 1001 points Call ibwrt spa CStr trdata i Sends the value after it has been converted to the ASCII data DoEvents Next i Call ibwrt spa AV Sets Trace to VIEW Program example of absolute value output When using FORM3 add the line shown below to NIGLOBAL The CopyValtoVal API function is required to shift 32 bits Declare Sub CopyValtoVal Lib kernel32 Alias RtlMoveMemory Destination As Any Source As Any ByVal length As Long Example 4 FORM2 Reading the memory data in binary 16 bit integer order swap Dim tr 1000 As Integer Allocates an array in the buffer for 1001 points Dim i As Integer Dim res As String Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt Spa FORM2 Switches to FORM2 Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 0 Sets the GPIB board software so that the end pit of each Ibsta variable is set to 1 only when EOI has been received Call ibwrt Spa DLIM2 Sets a delimite
151. NNotation ALL 1 1 DISPlay WINDow ANNotation ALL ON OFF 10 Set Measuring Window Position DISPlay ZOOM FREQuency CENTer 1 1 DISPlay ZOOM FREQuency CENTer Frequency Frequency Set Measuring Window Width DISPlay ZOOM FREQuency SPAN 1 1 DISPlay ZOOM FRE 5 Frequency Select Multiple Screen Mode DISPlay ZOOM MODE 1 1 DISPlay ZOOM MODE OFF ZMFF ZMTT ZMFT OFF ZMFF ZMTT ZMFT Set Frequency versus Time Frequency Position DISPlay ZOOM TIME CENTer 1 1 DISPlay ZOOM TIME CENTer Frequency Set Averaging Count DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 AVERage COUNt 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 AVERage COUNt Context index Trace index Integer Integer Set Trace Calculation Mode 6 86 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 CALCulate MODE 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 CALCulate MODE Context index Trace index WRITe MAXHold MAXCont MINHold VideoAVG PowerAVG WRIT MAXH MAXC MINH VAVG PAVG Function description Select Trace Mode SCPI command DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 MODE 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 MODE Parameter Context index Trace index WRITe MAXHold MAXCont MINHold VideoAVG PowerAVG VIEW BLANK U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply WRIT MAXH MAXC MINH VAVGI
152. NSe AVPower WINDow POSition 1 1 2 SENSe AVPower WINDow POSition Frequency Frequency Set Measuring Window Width Average Power SENSe AVPower WINDow WIDTh 1 1 SENSe AVPower WINDow WIDTh Frequency Frequency Set VBW to RBW Ration SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo RATio 1 1 SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo RATi 0 Number Number Enable VBW to RBW ratio Auto SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo RATio AUTO 1 1 SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo RATio AUTO ON OFF 6 97 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Set RBW to SPAN ratio SCPI command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution RATio 21 1 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution RATio Parameter Number Query reply Number Remarks Enable RBW to SPAN Ration Auto SENSe BANDwidth RESolution RATio AUTO 1 1 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution RATio AUTO ON OFF Set Channel Power Maximum Sweep Count SENSe CHPower AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe CHPower AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set Channel Power Average Control Mode SENSe CHPower AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe CHPower AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Enable Channel Power Averaging SENSe CHPower AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe CHPower AVERage STATe ON OFF Restore Channel Power Settings SENSe CHPower DATA LOAD
153. O Context index Window Sweep Enable SENSe 1 SWEep WINDow STATe 22 1 SENSe 1 SWEep WINDow STATe Context index Set Maximum Sweep Count SENSe ACPower AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe ACPower AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set ACP Average Control Mode SENSe ACPower AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe ACPower AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Enable ACP Averaging SENSe ACPower AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe ACPower AVERage STATe ON OFF Set ACP Carrier Band Width SENSe ACPower BANDwidth BWIDth IN Tegration 21 1 SENSe ACPower BANDwidth BWIDth IN Tegration Frequency Frequency Enable ACP Channel Window Dis play SENSe ACPower BSWIndow 1 1 SENSe ACPower BSWIndow FULL CARRier FULL CARR Restore Previous Settings for ACP SENSe ACPower DATA LOAD Save Current Settings for ACP SENSe ACPower DATA SAVE Set Root Nyquist Filter Roll off Factor ACP 6 96 SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC 1 1 SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC ALPHA Number Number Function description Set Root Nyquist Filter Symbol Rate ACP SCPI command SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC 5 1 1 SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC 5 Parameter Frequency U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List o
154. Offset ON OFF 2 input Impedance 50 75 High Sensitivity ON OFF Grid Values SPAN 3 000 GHz ON OFF ATT 10 00 dB CENTER 1 500 GHz RBW 3 MHz Cable loss 3 13 dB at 3 GHz REF 0 00 dBm DL 12 90 dBm 10 0 dB 4 0 00 dBm 100 CENTER 2 10000 GHz RBW 100 kHz VBW 100 KHz Channel Power SPAN 10 00 MHz ATT 10 00 dB 12 90 dBm 78 74 dBm Hz Channel Power Power Spectral Density Level 2 2 1 Ref Offset ON Impedance 50 75 3 High Sensitivity ON _ OFF 4 correction Factor ON 5 Edit Corr Factor 7 Round Grid Values ON OFF H Level 2 2 REF 0 00 dBm DL 10 50 dBm 100dB Ref Offset REF ON 1 0 00 dBm gt Input Impedance 50 75 3 High Sensitivity ON OFF 4 Correction Factor ON OFF 5 Edit Corr Factor 100 CENTER 2 10000 GHz RBW 100 kHz SPAN 10 00 MHz VBW 100 kHz 10 00 dB Channel Power 7 10 50 dBm enters 76 34 dBm Hz ON OFF Channel Power Power Spectral Density Frequency 2 1 GHz Measurement value 12 9 dBm Frequency 2 1 GHz Measurement value 10 5 dBm 4 41 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 1 Using the Normalize Function and Level Correction Table Available range of the correction value Up to 100 dB can be set as the correction value The correction value of the first correction point is applied to frequencies from 0 Hz to the first correction point f
155. P ResultACP Space 200 tcpClient SendData CF 2GZ amp vbLf Sets carrier freq tcpClient SendData SP 25MZ amp vbLf Example 9 Setting of Adjacent channel parameters tcpClient SendData CSBSDEL amp vbLf Clears Channel Space param tcpClient SendData ACPSCR CARR amp vbLf Sets ACP mode to Carrier tcpClient SendData CARRBS 3 84MHz amp vbLf Sets Channel Bandwidth tcpClient SendData CSBSIN 5MZ 3 84MZ amp vbLf Adj Channel param tcpClient SendData CSBSIN 10MZ 3 84MZ amp vbLf Adj Channel param Example 10 Setting of Root Nyquist filter s parameters tcpClient SendData ACPNOST ON amp vbLf Sets Nyq Filter operation to on tcpClient SendData SYMRT 3 84MZ amp vbLf Sets Symbol rate of filter tcpClient SendData RFACT 0 22 amp vbLf Sets Roll off factor of filter tcpClient SendData ACPTM 10 amp vbLf Sets average times tcpClient SendData PMEASAVG ON amp vbLf Sets average func to ON tcpClient SendData ACP amp vbLf Starts measurement tcpClient SendData CLS OPR 16 SRE 128 amp vbLf Sets status byte Stb Space 10 Do tcpClient SendData STB vbLf Do While tcpClient BytesReceived 0 Waits for receiving a character DoEvents Loop tcpClient GetData Stb If CLng Val Stb And 128 Then Exit Do Loop tcpClient SendData vbLf tcpClient GetData ResultACP Reads out all meas results of ACP Call MsgBox ACP r
156. PAVG VIEW BLAN Remarks Enable Trace Power Average Pause DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 PAVG PAUSe 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 PAVG PAUSe Context index Trace index Enable Trace Video Average DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 PAVG STATe 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 PAVG STATe Context index Trace index Set Trace Power Average Control Mode DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 PAVG TCONrol 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 PAVG TCONrol Context index Trace index ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Set Trace Refresh Mode DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 REFResh MODE 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 REFResh MODE Context index Trace index WRITe VIEW BLANk WRIT VIEW BLAN Enable Trace Video Average Pause DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 VAVG PAUSe 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 VAVG PAUSe Context index Trace index 10 Enable Trace Video Average DISPlay WINDow 1 TR ACe 2 VAVG STATe 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 VAVG STATe Context index Trace index Set Trace Video Average Control Mode DISPlay WIN Dow 1 TRACe 2 VAVG TCONrol 3 1 DISPlay WIN Dow 1 TRACe 2 VAVG TCONrol Context index Trace index ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Select Active Trace DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe ACTive 2 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe ACTive Context
157. PIB Bus Control Example 3 Setting the reference level to 87 dBuV in 5 dB div and the RBW to 100 kHz Example 4 Example 5 Call ibclr spa Call ibwrt Call ibwrt Call ibwrt Call ibwrt Spa Spa Spa Spa Performs a Device Clear AUNITS DBUV Sets the level unit to dBHV RL 87DB Sets the reference level to 87 dB uV DD 5DB Sets the vertical scale to 5 dB div RB 100KZ Sets the RBW to 100 kHz Setting the instrument using variables Dim A As String Dim B As String Dim C As String A 10 2 20 Call ibclr spa Call ibwrt spa Call ibwrt spa Call ibwrt spa Sets the character string Performs a Device Clear amp A amp MZ Sets the center frequency to A MHz Sp amp B amp MZ Sets the span to B MHz amp c amp Sets the to C dB Saving set values in Register 5 and recalling them from Register 5 Dim LabelBuff As String Defines the character string buffer for the label LabelBuff SPECTRUM Analyzer Sets the label Call ibclr spa Call ibwrt spa Call ibwrt spa Call ibwrt spa Call ibwrt spa Call ibwrt spa Call ibwrt spa Call ibwrt spa Call ibwrt spa Performs a Device Clear CF 30MZ Sets the parameter SP 1MZ DET POS LON LabelBuff Sets the label SV 5 Saves the data to Register 5 CF 1GZ Changes the set paramet
158. PRINter USB PRIN USB 1 HCOPy DEVice TYPE Copy to the Selected Device HCOPy IMMediate 6 90 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 9 Function description Set Sweep Mode Subsystem INITiate SCPI command INITiate CONTinuous 1 1 INITiate CONTinuous Parameter Query reply 6 10 3 List of Commands Remarks Abort and Restart Sweep INITiate RES Tart Start Sweeping Until Measurement End INITiate SMEAsure Execute Sweep to the End 6 10 3 10 INITiate TS Subsystem INPut Set Input RF Connector 6 10 3 11 Function description Delete File INPut CONNector 1 1 INPut CONNector Subsystem MMEMory SCPI command MMEMory DELete 1 Parameter File name Query reply RFCI RFC2 RFCI RFC2 Remarks Enable Saving ACP Configuration MMEMory ITEM ACP 1 1 MMEMory ITEM ACP Enable Saving Antenna Correction Table MMEMory ITEM ANTEnna 1 1 MMEMory ITEM ANTEnna Enable Saving Channel Table MMEMory ITEM CHANnel 1 1 MMEMory ITEM CHANnel Enable Saving General Instrument Setup MMEMory ITEM CONFig 1 1 MMEMory ITEM CONFig Enable Saving Limit Lines MMEMory ITEM LIMIit 1 2 1 MMEMory ITEM LIMit 1 Limit line index ON OFF Enable Saving SEM Configuration MMEMory ITEM SEMask 1 1 MMEMory ITEM SEMask ON OFF
159. Reference Marker Fre MDF2 Frequency Time quency Absolute Value MFR Reference Marker Level MDL2 Level Absolute Value MLR Delta Mode MKD ON OFF Reference Object MKROBJ MARK RLIN MKROBJ 0 MARK 1 RLIN Fixed AMarker FX ONJOFF FX 0 OFF 1 ON Inverse AMarker REDLT 0 OFF 1 ON Delta Mode Reference MKROJB MARK RLIN DLIN MKROBJ MARKJRLIN LLINU LLINL DLIN LLINU LLINL Marker Step Size MPM Frequency Time MPM Frequency Time Marker Step Auto MPA ON OFF MPA 0 OFF 1 ON Signal Track SG ON OFF SG 0 OFF 1 ON Signal Track Y Range SGY ON Level SGY Level SGY ON SGYON 0 SGY OFF 1 ON Active Marker Trace MKTRACE TRA TRB TRC MKTRACE 0 1 2 Marker Mode MKMODE INDEX VAL MKMODE 0 INDEX 1 VAL Display Marker List MKLST MKLST 0 OFF 1 ON Get Marker List MLSFL Num Marker Active 1 ON 0 OFF Frequency Time Level 6 35 3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 10 Peak and Marker Move 6 8 10 Function MKR CF Peak and Marker Move Command EXE SET Query GET Code Argument Format MKRA gt REF gt PEAK gt PKRL MKRA SPAN DS MTSP CF Step MO MKCS MKRA CF Step MI MTCS
160. Repeats the operation for 1001 points Call CopyValtoVal tra 0 tr i 4 Copies the 4 byte data stored in tri i to tra 0 to 3 tran tra 0 Swaps the high and low orders tra 0 tra 3 tra 3 tran tran 1 tra 1 tra 2 tra 2 tran Call CopyValtoVal tmp tra 0 4 Copies the 4 byte data stored in tra 0 to 3 whose high and low orders are swapped to tmp res res amp Str tmp 6 vbCrLf DoEvents Next i RichTextBoxl Text res Displays the data on the screen Call ibwrt Spa DLIMO Sets the delimiter to the CR LF and EOI Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 1 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Example 6 FORMA Reading the memory data in binary 32 bit floating point order swap Dim tr 1000 As Single Allocates an array in the buffer for 1001 points 32 bit floating point type Dim i As Integer Dim res As String Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt Spa FORM4 Switches to FORM3 Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 0 Sets the GPIB board software so that the end bit of each Ibsta variable is set to 1 when EOI has been received Call ibwrt Spa DLIM2 Sets a delimiter to EOI only Call ibwrt Spa TBA Requests Trace A in binary data Call ibrd32 Spa tr 0 1001 4 Reads 1001 points of binary data 4 for four bytes For i 0 To 1000 Step 1 Repeats the operation for 1001 points
161. Save Trace C Context 1 SVTRCIC ONJOFF SVTRCIC 0 OFF 2 ON Save Trace A Context 2 SVTRC2A ON OFF SVTRC2A 0 OFF 1 ON Save Trace B Context 2 SVTRC2B ON OFF SVTRC2B 0 OFF 1 ON Save Limit Line 1 SVLIM1 ON OFF SVLIM1 0 OFF 1 ON Save Limit Line 2 SVLIM2 ON OFF SVLIM2 0 OFF 1 ON Save Spurious Table 1 SVSPRI SVSPRI 0 OFF 2 ON Save Spurious Table 2 SVSPR2 SVSPR2 0 OFF 1 ON Save Spurious Table 3 SVSPR3 SVSPR3 0 OFF 2 ON Save Channel SVCH ON OFF SVCH 0 OFF 1 ON Save Spectrum Emission SVSEM ON OFF SVSEM 0 OFF Mask Table 1 ON Save ACP SVACP ON OFF SVACP 0 OFF 1 ON Save Correction Factor SVANT ON OFF SVANT 0 OFF 1 ON Save Normalize Context SVNRMIA ON OFF SVNRMIA 0 OFF 1 ON Save Normalize Context SVNRMIB ONIOFF SVNRMIB 0 OFF 2 ON Save Normalize Context C SVNRMIC ONIOFF SVNRMIC 0 OFF 1 ON Syncronize All Files SYNCTO USB to Flash FLASH Flash to USB USB 6 48 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 18 File Management 6 8 18 File Management Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Reading Bitmap File BMP Binary data lt EOI gt Reading Portable Network PNG Binary data lt EOI gt Graphics File Reading Image File GIMAG String Binary data lt gt Reading Data File GDATA String Binary data lt gt 6 8 19 Config Command EXE S
162. T 2 MAX HOLD 3 AVERAGE 4 POWER AVG 5 MAX HOLD CONT Calc Mode Max Hold lt gt 0 OFF 1 Calc Mode Min Hold lt n gt MIN 0 OFF 1 ON Averaging Power Integer lt n gt G Integer Averaging Times 6 29 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 6 Trace Function Averaging and Power Averaging Times Active Trace Command EXE SET Query GET Code SWPCNT Argument Format Integer SWPCNT Output Format Integer Average Start n 2AVG n GR Average Stop lt n gt AVG lt n gt GS lt n gt AVG 0 OFF 1 ON Average Pause lt n gt GP Average Continue lt n gt GC lt n gt GP 0 Continue 1 Pause Average 1 Time lt n gt GSGL Average Continuous lt n gt GCNT lt n gt GSGL 0 sliding 1 once Power Average Start lt n gt PAVG Power Average Stop lt n gt PAVG lt n gt PAVG 0 OFF 1 ON Power Average Pause lt n gt PGP Power Average Continue lt n gt PGC lt n gt PGP 0 Continue 1 Pause Power Average 1 Time lt n gt PGSGL Power Average Continuous lt n gt PGCNT lt n gt PGSGL 0 sliding 1 once A DL gt A B AOB A BOB B DL B A B gt C B A gt C
163. T x 1 Fmod SWP Sweep time PT The number of display trace points Fmod Modulation frequency When the Meas function 15 selected the trace detector 15 automatically set to the Posi mode Mod Freq to Sweep Time ON OFF Peak Delta Y Execute ON OFF Sound AM FM Switches ON and OFF a mode in which a sweep time is deter mined based on a modulation frequency ON Sets a modulation frequency and then sets a sweep time based on the modulation frequency OFF Cancels a mode in which a modulation frequency is set A value set for SWP Time AUTO MNL is applied to a sweep time when measurement starts Sets a level difference for a signal to be judged as a peak point during the peak search A level difference set here is used as a threshold level while searching for a peak value Displays the Sound menu For a signal where the marker is positioned sound demodulation 15 performed when a sweep ends Switches the sound demodulation function ON and OFF ON Outputs the demodulated sound signal to the PHONE terminal on the front panel OFF Cancels the sound demodulation function Switches the demodulation mode between AM and FM AM Selects the AM demodulation FM Selects the FM demodulation U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 7 MEAS 2 Volume Sets the demodulated sound volume The sound volume can be adjusted in 16 levels Pause Time Sets the demodulation time The setting range is from 100 ms to 1000 s 037
164. Table 15 displayed The cursor is positioned at the frequency setting text field of correction point 1 Press 3 0 0 and MHz The correction point 1 frequency is set to 300 MHz The cursor moves to the level setting text field Press 0 8 and GHz The correction value of correction point 1 is set to 0 8 dB The cursor moves to the frequency setting text field of correction point 2 Repeat the above procedure and complete the correction table REF 0 00 dBm MKA 3 000 GHz 10 0 dB 3 15 dB Correction Factor Table No Frequency Level 1 2700000000 GHz 3 31 dB Ps 000000000 GHz 3 15 dB 2 3 4 2006 6 7 8 8 100 CENTER1 500 GHz SPAN 3 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 40 ms ATT 10 00 dB Using the correction table U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 Using the Normalize Function and Level Correction Table 14 Press AMPLITUDE More 1 2 and Correction Factor ON OFF ON The displayed measurement value is corrected based on the correction table Correction Factor OFF Correction Factor ON REF 0 00 dBm MKA 3 000 GHz 10 0 3 13 dB REF 0 00 dBm 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 ED 90 100 ES CENTER 1 500 GHz SPAN 3 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz ATT 10 00 dB Level 2 2 1 Ref Offset ON OFF 2 input Impedance 50 75 3 High Sensitivity ON OFF 4 correction Factor ON OFF 5 Edit Corr Grid Values ON OFF Level 2 2 REF 0 00 dBm MKA 3 000 GHz 1 Ref
165. The responses of this instrument to interface messages described in this section are defined in IEEE stan dards 488 1 1978 and 488 2 1987 For more information on how to send interface messages to this instrument refer to the operation manual of the controller used 1 Interface clear This message 15 directly sent to this instrument through a signal line This instrument stops the operation of the GPIB bus by using this message Though all input output is stopped the I O buffer 15 not cleared it is cleared by DCL 2 Remote enable REN This message 15 directly sent to this instrument through a signal line If this instrument is specified as a listener when this message is TRUE it enters the remote state This instrument remains in this state until it receives a GTL command REN changes to FALSE or the LOCAL key is pressed This instrument ignores all received data when it is in the local state 6 4 03700 Series User s Guide 6 2 3 GPIB Bus Functions When it is in the remote state this instrument ignores all key entry except the LOCAL key When it is in the local lockout state referred to as Local lockout this instrument ignores all key entry Serial poll enable SPE When receiving this message from a controller this instrument enters the serial polling mode When this instrument specified as a talker in this mode it sends status bytes instead of ordinary mes sages This mode continues unti
166. UTO Automatically sets the optimum sweep time according to the frequency span RBW and VBW settings MNL sweep time can be set arbitrarily EMC Displays the EMC menu OPT28 EMC Filter ON OFF ON Uses the EMC filter OFF Cancels the EMC filter mode RBW Auto Sets the resolution bandwidth automatically according to the mea surement frequency band RBW 200 Hz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 200 Hz RBW 9 kHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 9 kHz RBW 120 kHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 120 kHz RBW 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz Auto 1 2 SPAN RBW ON OFF VBW RBW ON OFF PLL BW Auto Medium Narrow U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 17 CPL Coupled function Automatically sets the optimum RBW VBW and sweep time according to the frequency span setting Displays the Coupling 2 2 menu Switches the RBW vs frequency span function between the auto and manual settings This setting is enabled only when the RBW is set to AUTO ON The frequency vs RBW span ratio can be changed OFF The frequency RBW span value is fixed to 100 Switches the VBW vs RBW function between the auto and man ual settings This setting is enabled only when the VBW is set to AUTO ON The VBW vs RBW ratio can be changed OFF The VBW RBW value is fixed to 1 Displays the PLL Band Width menu OPT 70 Sets the band pass filter width in the PLL circuit Sets the filter width automatically so that t
167. User s Guide 7 5 9 Option 77 6 GHz Tracking Generator 7 5 9 Option 77 6 GHz Tracking Generator Frequency range 100 kHz to 6 GHz Output level range 0 to 30 dBm 0 5 dB step Output level accuracy lt 0 5dB 20MHz 10 dBm 20 to 30 C Output level flatness 10 dBm 20 to 30 C based on 20 MHz 10 dBm lt X1 dB 1 MHz to 1 GHz lt 1 5 dB 100 kHz to 3 1 GHz lt 4 2 0 dB 100 kHz to 6 GHz TG leakage lt 80 dBm Input attenuator 0 dB Output impedance 50 O nom VSWR lt 2 typ Output level lt 10 dBm Maximum allowable applied level 10 dBm 10 V DC 7 23 03700 Series User s Guide 8 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES This chapter describes the options and accessories for this instrument 8 1 Options Table 8 1 Options Description 8 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 01 Digital modulation analysis module OPT10 2 channel input option For U3741 only 15 75 Q input For U3741 only OPT20 High stability frequency reference OPT28 EMC filter OPT53 Time domain analysis option OPT70 High C N OPT75 Tracking generator 75 For U3741 only 76 Tracking generator OPT77 6 GHz tracking generator U3751 U3771 and U3772 8 1 03700 Series User s Guide 8 2 Accessories 8 2 Accessories Table 8 2 Accessories Name Product Code 50 Q 75 converter ZT 130NC DC cable A114020 Battery pack A870008 Battery charger
168. Zoom 2 ON OFF ON Splits the screen into an upper and lower display The upper screen displays the original waveform The lower screen zooms in on the area selected by the window OFF Cancels the zoom in display Window Position Sets the center position of the window Window Width Sets the window width Freq Zoom Displays the Freq Zoom menu Frequency Zoom ON OFF ON Splits the screen into an upper and lower display The upper screen displays the original waveform The lower screen zooms in on the frequency range selected by the window in which the sweep is performed OFF Cancels the dual screen display Zoom Position Sets the center position of the window Zoom Width Sets the window width Context A B Switches the active screen between A upper screen and B lower Screen A The upper screen settings can be changed B The lower screen settings can be changed Freq vs Time Displays the Freq vs Time menu Freq vs Time ON OFF ON Splits the screen into an upper and lower display The horizontal axis in the upper screen represents frequency and the lower screen represents the time zero span at the zoomed position OFF Cancels the dual screen display Frequency Pos Sets the frequency where the zero span is performed Context A B Switches the active screen between A upper screen and B lower Screen A The upper screen settings can be changed B The lower screen settings can be changed Time vs Time Sets the d
169. a recommended time of replacement in terms of the number of times of operations For replacement call the Service Center Advantest Customer Support ACS Note that the life span can become shorter than expected depending on the operation environment frequency of use and storage environment MEMO The table shows the expected life spans or recommended time of replacement only for the user s reference It does not guarantee the life of the components Table 9 1 Limited Life Parts Name Life Reference values provided by manufacturer Panel key switch 10 operations Key switch with LED 10 operations LCD back light 50 000 hours Rotary encoder 25 x 10 operations Cooling fan 40 000 hours Lithium battery cells for data backup About 3 years Mechanical relay For EXT DC 10 operations 9 4 9 5 U3700 Series User s Guide 9 4 Method of Storing the Instrument Method of Storing the Instrument When you store this instrument keep it in an environment that meets the following requirements e Reduced vibration e Not dusty Protected from direct sunlight Ambient temperature range 20 C to 60 C Relative humidity 30 to 85 When you do not use the instrument for 90 days or more store it in an appropriate moisture proof bag with desiccant Transportation For transportation use the packing materials used for the shipping of this instrument If you use other materia
170. a memory device by using the wr key and confirm it by using the Hz key ScreenShot REF 0 00 dBm 1 10 0 dBi i File Format PNG BMP 2 Auto Inc ON OFF Copy Files Media 3 Auto Inc Name Free Size 22525 Dev 0 USB Device 121 7 MB122 1 MB Menu Media CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 8 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 40 ms ATT 10 dB 3 Press the Media key The dialog box closes File output 1 Selecting a file format Select the PNG or BMP format by pressing SYSTEM More1 2 Copy Config Screen Shot Config and File Format PNG BMP 2 File name COPYxxx BMP PNG is used as the file name File number xxx is specified by Auto Inc Index and automatically increments by 1 each time a file is saved when Auto Inc is set to ON The file name COPY BMP PNG is fixed when Auto Inc is set to OFF 3 Output Images on the screen can be saved to the USB memory device by pressing the COPY key 4 28 Table 4 1 03700 Series User s Guide 4 3 5 Hard Copy Output 4 Time Stamp A time stamp date and time which uses the same format as the computer is included in a file The order in which files are saved can be checked by using this time stamp The date and time can be checked and set by panel operations or GPIB com mands Examples of GPIB commands Command to check the date and time Date SETDATE Time SETTIME Command to set the date and time Date SETDATE yy mm dd Time SETTIME hh
171. aa 5 47 5 48 5 38 5 40 5 62 5 63 5 43 5 44 110 CS CS IF Band 33 5 45 2 Channel ON OFF 5 17 Average PAUSE CONT 5 36 5 38 2 Channel Preset 5 17 5 40 5 43 2 Channels Viewer 5 17 5 44 2 d B dIy iit u nq nap haut 5 62 5 63 Average 5 25 5 29 3GPP DL Modulation 5 17 Average START STOP 5 36 5 38 DGB UV 5 62 5 63 5 39 5 43 5 44 Averaging ON OFF 5 25 5 26 5 43 5 45 5 27 5 28 Dum 5 43 5 46 5 29 5 30 eo NER 5 43 5 46 5 32 About Calibration 9 2 About Replacement of Limited Life B Parts em 9 2 207 57 5 43 5 45 Accessories sn 8 2 B ADB Mem 5 43 5 45 mpi uan 5 25 5 30 BASCO SS et ee 5 43 5 46 ADLA esie mtr 5 43 5 46 Bands Definition 5 26 5 33 5 72 5 73 5 34 AMPLITUDE 5 62 Bandwidth 6 27 7 3 7 7 Basic Measurement 4 13 7 11 Basic Operation 4 10 Amplitude Accuracy
172. according to the following procedure 1 Check that shipping container and cushioning material are damaged IMPORTANT If the shipping container or the cushioning material is damaged keep them until the following inspections are complete Check that the outside of the product is not damaged WARNING If any outside components of the product such as the cover panel front or rear LCD display power switch or connector are damaged do not turn on the power You may receive an electrical shock Check that the standard accessories listed in Table 3 1 and option accesories listed in Table 3 2 are complete and they are not damaged If any of the following occur contact an Advantest sales representative The shipping container or the cushioning material is damaged or signs of stress are found The outside of the product is damaged The standard accessories are incomplete or are damaged Defects are found in the operation check 3 1 1173700 Series User s Guide 3 1 Inspection on Delivery Power cable Table 3 1 Standard Accessories Quantity A01412 U3751 U3771 U3772 Input cable 50 Q A01037 0300 N m BNC f adaptor JUG 201A U Ferrite core ESD SR 120 Ferrite core 045 150718 5 adaptor 517 Adapter INPUT2 HE A PJ U3700 Series User s Guide BU37008 1 quantity decrea
173. aceat 6 47 CLPBW 6 47 6 47 CLSREF 6 48 an 6 42 6 42 saves 6 42 2 6 42 CNI ER 6 42 CNPOS vertere ids 6 42 6 42 6 42 CORS estne tte 6 28 CORS OFF etie dd 6 28 CORS 2 6 28 COUNT iiec a 6 42 6 28 OFF iiec terere 6 28 COVR 6 28 6 38 CR 6 47 6 27 6 27 CRDEL ce 6 27 6 47 CRIN 6 27 6 47 CS 6 25 CSBSDBL tiers 6 44 CSBSIN te Hd 6 44 CTNTSEL hapa 6 34 DB 6 54 6 54 6 54 DBM osa sauna rs 6 54 5 6 54 aasma Rr OTI 6 54 DCO a 6 39 span sa 6 39 DCD 2 sassasaqicassaasishinqsqshapnassaqasaitsssaQa 6 39 DD ii ne eee det EE 6 27 DEL 6 48 6 32 n es 6
174. ain frame Boards Power supply parts Cable LCD Panel Module O OJO O O OF O Parts fJ SJ T11363 2006 AY le BE IP EVITE DI S 35 UBL i Fr RE HE 61 11363 2006 C re t RA ASHE SE avs Doe Ee PFT X AAR SR Ht m PA REPA SA YEH Sb HAH HAS T EAUX BOE WIPE TCR BJ BEE 2 A EH ARTE i BE VE P 0 C 50 85 UF i yo E 20 60 FE 85 A 25482 KI 77 Adi ELS BH SEAS Hh 77 KEDHI BA EHEN AHS CR 1 03700 Series User s Guide TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION e 1 1 1 1 Contents of This Manual 1 1 1 2 Product OVEIVIEW uy unu kaqa asqa 2 1 3 Conventions of Notation Used in This Document 1 4 Advantest Homepage qoossstisustel icu qax Reni ceo satire ents oen 3 2 PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE U3700 2 1 21 If a Faul M aE E 2 1
175. alues for this instrument any format may be used Depending on the command a unit may be attached to the entered numeric value Integer type NR1 format p Fixed point type NR2 format poser err eO eri e Floating point type NR3 format Sign Number Ta 0 2 Unit Available units are listed below Exponential Description Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Power dB description Current Second Second Second Percentage Percentage 6 12 03700 Series User s Guide 6 5 3 Status Byte 6 5 3 Status Byte This instrument has a layered status register structure that is compliant with IEEE standard 488 2 1987 and can send various statuses of this instrument to the controller This section describes the behavioral model of status bytes and allocation of events 1 Status Register This instrument adopts the model of the status registers defined in IEEE standard 488 2 1987 The status registers consist of the condition register event register and enable register Condition Event Enable register register register 0 0 gt lt
176. anates from this instrument turn off the MAIN POWER switch remove the power cable from the AC power connector and then contact an Advantest sales representative immediately 2 2 Removing the Case The case of this instrument should only be opened by Advantest service engineers 2 3 Electromagnetic Interference This instrument may cause electromagnetic interference and affect television and radio If this instrument s power is turned off and any electromagnetic interference that may be present is reduced then this instrument has caused the interference Electromagnetic interference from this instrument may be prevented by the following precautions e Changing the direction of the antenna of the television or radio Placing this instrument on the other side of the television or radio Placing this instrument away from the television or radio Using a different power source for the television or radio and this instrument 2 4 Note when Turning on the Power When turning on the power do not connect a DUT to this instrument 2 1 03700 Series User s Guide 3 SETUP 3 SETUP This chapter describes how to set up this instrument on delivery Topics covered in this chapter are 3 1 Inspection on Delivery 3 2 Locating This Instrument 3 3 Power Supply 3 4 Caution when Connecting Peripherals 3 5 Checking Operations 31 Inspection on Delivery After receiving the product inspect the outside and the accessories
177. anels RJ45 on the rear panel 10 100Base T Protocol TCP IP Video out VGA 15pin f on the rear panel Sound out Small monophonic jack U3700 Series User s Guide 7 2 03751 Performance Specifications 7 2 03751 Performance Specifications 7 2 1 Frequency Description Specifications Frequency range 9 kHz to 8 GHz Frequency band 9 kHz to 3 1 GHz 0 3 0 GHz to 8 GHz Built in preamp 10 MHz to 8 GHz Frequency readout accuracy Marker readout x Freq reference accuracy SPAN x SPAN accuracy Residual FM Internal frequency reference stability Aging rate 2 x 10 year Temperature stability 32 5 x 1079 0 C to 50 Marker frequency counter RBW lt 100 kHz Signal level S N gt 50 dB SPAN lt 100 MHz Resolution 1 Hz to 1 kHz Accuracy Counter readout x Freq reference accuracy Residual FM ILSB Frequency stability When the internal frequency reference is used Residual FM lt 60 Hz p p 100 ms Frequency span Range 0 5 kHz to Full Accuracy 1 Signal purity 85 dBc Hz 10 kHz offset SPAN lt 200 kHz When the internal frequency reference is used Resolution bandwidth RBW Range 100 Hzto 3 MHz 1 3 sequence Accuracy 12 Video bandwidth VBW Range 10 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence 7 6 03700 Series User s Guide 7 2 2 Sweep 7 2 2 Sweep Description Specifications Sweep Sweep time setting range Zero span Sp
178. arch and X dB Down CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 FUNCtion Context index XDBDown PEAK Marker index Execute X dB Right CALCulatezz1 MARKerZ2 FUNCtion Context index XDBDown RIGHt Marker index Get Specific Marker Information 1 2 3 4 CALCulate 1 MARKerZ2 Context index marker index INFO Marker index Marker index marker enable 1 0 marker position Position Hz s marker amplitude Amplitude Execute Next Peak Search to the Left CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 MAXimum Context index LEFT Marker index Execute Next Peak Search CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 MAXimum Context index NEXT Marker index Execute Next Peak Search to the Right CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 MAXimum Context index RIGHt Marker index Execute Maximum Peak Search CALCulatez 1 MARK erZ2 MAXimum Context index PEAK Marker index Execute Next Minimum Search CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 MINimum Context index NEXT Marker index Execute Minimum Search CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 MINimum Context index PEAK Marker index Execute Minimum Maximum Search CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 PTPeak Context index Marker index Enable Marker CALCulatez1 MARKerZ2 S TATe 03 Context index 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 STATe Marker index ON OFF Select Marker Trace CALCulatezt1 MARKerZ2 TRACe 3 Context index Trace index 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 TRACe Marker index Trace index 6 78 Function descript
179. arkerLevel Left myBuff End Sub Sepa 1 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 4 Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used Example 8 Reading trace A data in ASCII format Private Sub cmdAsciiTraceGet Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer Spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa Dim i Dim trace 1001 As Integer array to contain the trace points amplitudes at the end Dim tmp As String Dim before As Integer Dim after As Integer Dim cnt Dim buf As String buf Space 1001 6 set the trace transfer format to ASCII Call ibwrt spa FORMAT ASCII query trace 1 amplitudes Call ibwrt spa TRACE DATA TRACE1 read trace buffer ascii points on 5 maximum characters digits separated by a comma Call ilrd spa buf 1001 6 cnt s i su before 1 loop on each point the buffer Do find the next comma separator after InStr before buf If after 0 Then tmp Mid buf before Else tmp Mid buf before after before End If tmp contains the next point amplitude in ASCII trace i CInt tmp before after 1 irs i 1 Loop Until i gt 1001 End Sub 6 111 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 4 Example Programs which SCPI Commands Are Used Example 9 Reading trace data in binary format Private Sub cmdGetBinary Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer Spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa Dim buf
180. at a constant level Reference level Figure A 5 Gain Uncertainty Gain Compression If the input signal is greater than a certain value the correct value is not displayed on the screen and the input signal appears as if it were compressed This phenomenon is called gain compression and it reflects the lin earity in the input signal range Normally the gain compression for a spectrum analyzer is specified as the input signal level that produces a 1 dB error from a perfect linear response A 7 U3700 Series User s Guide A 3 Glossary A 8 Maximum Input Level This is the maximum level allowed for the input circuit of the spectrum analyzer The level can be modified by the input attenuator Noise Sidebands Noise sidebands are used to show the purity of the oscillator Spectrum analyzer efficiency is reduced by noise generated in the local oscillator and phase lock loop of the analyzer This noise will appear in the vicinity of the spectrum on the screen Therefore the sideband noise of the analyzer is defined and the signals that are larger than the sideband noise of the analyzer can be analyzed The spectrum analyzer s noise sideband characteristics are shown in the following example Example Suppose the noise level measured in the resolution bandwidth of 1 kHz is 70 dB at 20 kHz apart from the carrier The noise level is normally expressed by the energy contained in the
181. ation Codes TPS Sets the number of measurement points to 501 TPL Sets the number of measurement points to 1001 Table 6 5 Binary Data Output Format Specified Code GPIB code Description Byte order 16 bit integer value from 1792 to 14592 16 bit integer value from 1792 to 14592 Order swap Absolute value IEEE 32 bit floating point type Absolute value IEEE 32 bit floating point type Order swap When not specified FORMI is used 2 The input format cannot be specified 6 63 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Table 6 6 I O Format 1 O format Description ASCII format DDDDD CRLF t Delimiter Data for one point Five byte data without header Input GPIB code Output GPIB code TAA TAB TAC Memory A Memory B Memory C Binary format 16 bit integer 6 64 1 DD DD DD DD EOI Delimiter Low order byte for 1001 501st point High order byte for 1001 501st point Low order byte for 1st point High order byte for 1st point FORM2 DD DD EOI Delimiter High order byte for 1001 501st point Low order byte for 1001 501st point High order byte for 1st point Low orderr byte for 1st point Each point data is divided into two parts high and low order bytes EOI signal is attached at the end of the data for continuous 1001 points Input GPIB code Output GPIB code Memory A Memory B Memor
182. ations when OPT 15 is installed Note NOTE Cannot be installed together with 15 Difference with the standard specifications Item Description Crosstalk between input channels when OPT 10 is installed 90 dBc Input level 10 dBm Input attenuator 0 dB RF input 2 when OPT 10 is installed Connector Impedance VSWR OPT 10 and OPT 15 cannot be installed together N type female 50 O nom Input attenuator gt 10 dB lt 1 5 1 External trigger input Can be selected as the trigger input of RF input 2 when OPT 10 is installed The input connector is a single line only 21 4 MHz IF output 7 16 When OPT 10 is installed it is only the IF output which corre sponds to RF input 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 5 2 Option 15 75 Input 7 5 2 Option 15 75 O Input Frequency Frequency range 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz Built in preamp 10 MHz to 2 2 GHz Tunable frequency 9 kHz to 3 GHz Amplitude Amplitude measurement range 134 dBuV to displayed average noise level Maximum safe input level Input attenuator 2 10 dB Average continuous power 134 dBuV Preamp Off 120 dBuV Preamp On DC voltage 50 VDCmax Input attenuator range 0 to 50 dB 10 dB step Display range 100 50 20 10 5 dB Linear Scale unit dBm dBmV dBuVemf dBpW W V Reference level setting range Log scale 31 2 dBuV to 148 8 dBuV Detector mode Normal Positive Peak Negative Peak Sample
183. ave Recall Query GET Code Argument Format Output Format CLATT Integer 0 gt 0 Warning lt 0 10 Coarse CLCREF Integer CLCREF Integer CAL 10 M Reference Fine CLFREF Integer CLFREF Integer CAL 10 M Reference Default CLDREF CAL 10 M Reference Store CLSREF F Correction ON OFF CAL Correction 6 8 17 Function Save File or File Number Save Recall CC ON OFF Command EXE SET Query GET Code SV Argument Format String Integer Code Output Format Delete File DEL String Recall File RC String Rename File New Name String String Write Protect File WP String ONJOFF File Format FILEFORMAT BIN XML FILEFORMAT 0 BIN 1 XML Media FILEMEDIA FLASH USB FILEMEDIA 0 5 USB Save Setup SVSET ON OFF SVSET 0 OFF 1 Save Trace Context 1 SVTRCIA ON OFF SVTRCIA 0 OFF 1 ON 6 47 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 17 Save Recall Function Command EXE SET Query GET Code Argument Format Code Output Format Save Trace B Context 1 SVTRCIB ON OFF SVTRCIB 0 OFF ON
184. band and captures the signal then finally sets the frequency span to a value before AUTO TUNE starts The reference level is set to the peak level of the searched signal ON Starts AUTO TUNE OFF Stops AUTO TUNE U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 15 AMPLITUDE 5 2 15 5 62 AMPLITUDE Displays the Level menu and enables the settings related to the amplitude display AMPLITUDE Ref Level ATT gt ATT AUTO MNL dB div Min ATT Vertical Scale LIN LOG Attenuation 0 dB Units Lf 10 dB div Slide Screen ON OFF 5 dB div More 1 2 2 dB div 1 dB div RefOffset ON OFF L 0 5 dB div Input Impedance 50 75 dBm High Sensitivity ON OFF dBmV nee Factor ON OFF dni dBuVemf L Round Grid Values ON OFF Watts L Volts Insert Delete Init Table Ref Level ATT ATT AUTO MNL Min ATT Attenuation 0 dB Sets the reference level Displays the Attenuation menu Switches the attenuator function between auto and manual set tings AUTO Automatically sets the attenuator value according to the reference level MNL Sets the attenuator value manually Sets the minimum value of the attenuator This setting is enabled only when the attenuator is set manually Sets the attenuator to 0 dB Displays the confirmation window before setting This setting can be set by selecting OK with step keys and press ing the unit key ENTER dB div 10 dB div 5
185. be taken into consideration when measuring the level of a noise signal Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Several resolution bandwidth filters are used to obtain the optimal resolution in a signal spectrum analysis according to the frequency span When switching from one resolution bandwidth filter to another while mea suring one signal an error is generated because of the differences in loss between resolution bandwidth fil ters This error is defined as the bandwidth switching uncertainty 1 dB l Switching uncertainty Figure 10 Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Average Noise Level This sensitivity represents spectrum analyzer s capability of detecting the smallest signal and is directly re lated with noises generated from a spectrum analyzer itself The sensitivity however varies depends on the used resolution bandwidth In general the maximum input sensitivity of a spectrum analyzer is expressed as average noise level when the instrument is used with its minimum resolution bandwidth 11 U3700 Series User s Guide A 3 Glossary VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio This shows the state of impedance matching when a spectrum analyzer is connected to a signal source that includes ideal and nominal output impedance The VSWR 15 expressed as the ratio of the maximum value to minimum value of a standing wave which consists of traveling and reflected wav
186. ble number 1 2 Sets table number 2 3 Sets table number 3 Displays the Spr Results menu Displays Spurious Measure Results Table Displays the previous screen Displays the next screen Sets the setting sequence table number for the spurious measure ment to 1 2 or 3 1 Sets table number 1 2 Sets table number 2 3 Sets table number 3 Displays the Spr Default menu Recalls the saved setting conditions Saves the currently set conditions U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 7 MEAS 2 5 2 7 MEAS 2 Noise Hz X dB Down Intermod Harmonic More 1 2 a 5 36 Frequency Counter Noise x Hz dBm Hz ON OFF dBuV sqrt Hz ON OFF L dBc Hz ON OFF Execute X dB Down Execute X dB Left Execute X dB Right X dB Level Display REL ABL ABR 1 2 Continuous Down ON OFF L Peak X dB Down Execute ON OFF Average Control gt On Trace A B C Max Order Limit Setup Pass Fail ON OFF Default Conditions 1 Execute ON OFF Average Control On Trace A B C Harmonic Max Order Fundamental ON OFF Execute ON OFF Counter Position Link to Marker ON OFF Resolution A Average START STOP Max Sweep Count Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE Restore Defaults Save Defaults Average START STOP Max Sweep Count Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE Resolution 1 kHz Resolution 100 Hz Resolution 10 Hz
187. bsolute error at 20 MHz based on the CAL signal that is input to the RF INPUTI connector Total Gain RF Path 2 Measures the absolute error at 20 MHz based on the CAL signal that is input to the RF INPUT2 connector U3771 U3772 Step ATT CAL Measures the error at 20 MHz when switching ATT RBW CAL Automatically adjusts IF filters PBW Performs the calibration of the noise power bandwidth Report HIDE SHOW Hides or displays the calibration results Calibration F Int Ref Calibrates the frequency of the crystal oscillator that is used for the internal frequency reference Coarse Changes the data of the coarse adjustment Fine Changes the data of the fine adjustment Store Saves the adjusted data The saved data is used even if this instrument is preset Default I the calibration data when this instrument 15 shipped from the actory Calibration Corrections ON OFF Switches the calibration factor ON and OFF ON Uses the CAL factor OFF Does not use the CAL factor Frequency Correction ON OFF Switches the frequency correction function ON and OFF ON Corrects the frequency characteristics OFF Cancels the frequency correction function 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM More 1 2 Color Pattern Color1 Color2 Black and White White and Black User Password Date Time Edit Date Time Displays the System 2 2 menu Selects the standard color Selects the second set of colors Selects the black and white mode w
188. cations of this instrument Loads and saves data Outputs screen data Explains the soft menu NOTE HELP is loaded and functions when the HELP key is pressed at the first time after the power is turned on Sets the shift mode which allows the functions indicated by the green font to be selected Turns on while the shift mode is set 1 2 3 menu key RETURN key U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 1 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Front Panel CLEAR lt 1 Figure 4 3 Soft Key Block Cancels data entry mode The soft key 1 to 7 correspond with the soft menu to 7 indicated to the left respectively Press the soft key to select the soft menu Returns to the previous soft menu 4 3 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 1 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Front Panel 4 4 RF INPUT 2 RF INPUT 1 500 500 OUTPUT Y RF INPUT 1 Y 750 750 REVERSE PWR H TdBuV 134 10V DC 50V DC 03741 For 75 option OPT15 and OPT75 4H Figure 4 4 Input and Output Connectors Block CAL OUT connector Outputs the calibration signal TG OUTPUT connector Outputs the tracking generator signal Option RF INPUTI connector Input the signal to be measured Measurement frequency range U3741 9 kHz 3 GHz U3751 U3771 U3772 9 kHz 8 GHz RF INPUT2 connector Input the si
189. cendia 6 31 V OS 6 30 astana 6 30 ATMIN Mo BER ane Reno 6 54 AUNITS tn 6 51 BA eet 6 51 ul M 6 51 BAB 42 2 Gee sce P ROREM RH 6 52 6 52 PORE neci mind niece ers 6 51 BMP suninman gt 6 51 AA 6 27 l 6 31 CALCB 6 31 CALCO 6 31 CAPND 6 19 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 7 AT Command Index CARRBS au oqa Q 6 44 6 48 CDB T ee 6 39 6 25 CECH 6 25 6 25 35H 6 26 2 tette hap 6 26 2 05 6 26 6 26 55 PESE 6 26 CHCON3S nta tates teer 6 26 CHTTDEL ottenere ns 6 26 6 26 Sua aga 6 47 6 48 4 5 verre ree ries 6 48 CLDREF 6 48 255 6 48 CLGAIN t
190. ct CALCulate 1 MARKer REFerence OBJEct 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer REFerence OBJEct Context index RMARker RLINe RMAR RLIN Query Reference Marker Absolute Position 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer REFerence Context index Position Hz s Query Reference Marker Absolute Amplitude 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer REFerence Amplitude Turn Off Multi Marker Mode CALCulate 1 MARKer RESet Context index Set X Axis Marker Search Area Mode CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch X MODE 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch X MODE Context index ALL INNer OUTer ALL INN OUT Set X Axis Marker Search Area Center Position CALCulatez 1 MARKer SEARch X POSition 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch X POSition Context index Frequency Time Position Hz s Set X axis Marker Search Area Width CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch X WIDTh 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch X WIDTh Context index Frequency Time Position Hz s Set the Marker Search Area Relative to the Display Line CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch Y DLINe 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch Y DLINe Context index OFF ABOVe BELow OFF ABOV BEL Set the Marker Search Area Relative to Limit Line 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch Y LIMZ2 3 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch Y LIM 2 Context index Limit line index OFF ABOVe BELow OFF ABOV BEL Set Marker Step CALCu
191. d CALibration ATTenuation 1 CALibration ATTenuation 1 Parameter Query reply Status Remarks Enable Calibration Correction CALibration CORRection STATe 1 1 CALibration CORRection STATe ON OFF 10 Select Frequency Reference Source CALibration FREQuency REFerence 1 1 CALibration FREQuency REFerence INTernal EXTernal XTAL INT EXT XTAL Coarse Adjust Internal Frequency Refer ence CALibration FREQuency REF erence COARse 1 1 CALibration FREQuency REFer ence COARse 8 bit register 8 bit register Restore Frequency Reference Adjustment Defaults CALibration FREQuency REFerence DEFault Fine Adjust Internal Frequency Reference CALibration FREQuency REFerence FINE 1 1 CALibration FREQuency REFer ence FINE 8 bit register 8 bit register Set External Frequency Reference CALibration FREQuency REFerence FREQuency 1 1 CALibration FREQuency REFer ence FREQuency Frequency Frequency Save Frequency Reference Adjustments CALibration FREQuency REFerence 5 Enable Flatness Correction CALibration FREQuency STATe 1 1 CALibration FREQuency STATe ON OFF 10 Get Total Gain Calibration Report CALibration GAIN 1 1 CALibration GAIN RFC1 RFC2 Status Get PBW Calibration Report CALibration PBW 1 1 CALibration PBW Status Get RBW Calib
192. d attachable battery Compact Approximately 308 mm W x 175 mm x 209 mm D Lightweight U3741 Approximately 5 0 kg or less without option U3751 Approximately 5 6 kg or less without option U3771 U3772 Approximately 6 kg or less without option Conventions of Notation Used in This Document The panel and soft key notations used in this manual are described below Panel key Bold Example FREQUENCY SPAN Soft keys Bold italics Example Center Span NOTE Screen displays and diagrams such as external view of the main unit in this manual are those of the U3771 in the U3700 series 1 4 03700 Series User s Guide 1 4 Advantest Homepage Advantest Homepage The product information for the U3700 series Spectrum Analyzer is published on the Advantest homepage http www advantest co jp On the homepage sample software can be downloaded and the following information can be browsed Appli cation notes such as the GP IB command table and technical notes How to access Select English PRODUCTS amp SUPPORTS Electronic Measuring Instruments and Product from the top page and then choose a product model to be browsed 1 3 03700 Series User s Guide 2 PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE U3700 2 PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE U3700 This chapter describes precautions when using this instrument Read this chapter before using this instru ment 21 Ifa Fault Occurs If any smoke smell or noise em
193. d returns to 0 0 0 0 Command RPWD The USB memory key is not recognized 1 Check 15 format If formatting the USB memory key on a PC use the FAT format Some formats such as NTFS are not recognized The USB memory key with a security function cannot be used USB port is located on the front and rear panels Attempt to change the USB memory key to a different port An incorrect measured value which is approx 6 dB higher than the correct level is displayed Is the Input Impedance set to 75 2 Set it to 50 0 AMPLITUDE Input Impedance 50 9 9 U3700 Series User s Guide 9 9 Product Disposal and Recycle 9 9 Product Disposal and Recycle This product should be disposed of according to the regulations and laws that are established in your country and municipality Before this product is disposed of separately collect components shown in the table below to prevent the spread of substances which may be harmful to the global environment humans and ecology Substance Component Polychlorinated biphenyls PCB con taining capacitors Used Not used Not used Location Parts and material Mercury containing components Used LCD monitor Fluorescent tube Batteries Used BPG 032411 Lithium ion battery Printed circuit boards Used Panel Power supply Board Printed circuit board Toner cartridges Not used Plastic containi
194. dB div 2 dB div 1 dB div 0 5 dB div Vertical Scale LIN LOG Units dBm dBmV dBuV dBuVemf dBpW Watts Volts Slide Screen ON OFF More 1 2 Ref Offset ON OFF Input Impedance 50 75 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 15 AMPLITUDE Sets the LOG scale to 10 dB div Sets the LOG scale to 5 dB div Sets the LOG scale to 2 dB div Sets the LOG scale to 1 dB div Sets the LOG scale to 0 5 dB div LIN Displays waveform data on a linear scale LOG Displays waveform data on a log scale Sets the display unit to dBm Sets the display unit to dBmV Sets the display unit to dBu V Sets the display unit to dBuVemf Sets the display unit to dBpW Sets the display unit to Watts Sets the display unit to Volts Scrolls the screen display up and down up to 100 ON Enables the function Enter the amount of the display scrolls by using the knob step keys or keypad OFF Cancels the slide function Displays the Level 2 2 menu Switches the reference level offset function ON and OFF ON The offset level can be set in the range of 0 to 100 0 dB The relationship among the displayed reference level set reference level and offset is as follows Displayed reference level Set reference level Offset OFF Cancels the offset 50 Converts the power assuming that the input impedance is 50 Q This setting is the standard value that is 50 75 Converts power assuming that the input impedance is 75 The 6 dB con
195. dBm Input attenuator gt 10 dB Preamp Off 13 dBm Input attenuator gt 0 dB Preamp On 50 VDCmax Input attenuator range 0 to 50 dB 10 dB step Display range 100 50 20 10 5 dB Linear Scale unit dBm dBmV dBuVemf dBpW W V Reference level setting range Log scale 140 dBm to 40 dBm Detector mode Normal Positive Peak Negative Peak Sample RMS Video Average 7 3 03700 Series User s Guide 7 1 4 Amplitude Accuracy 7 1 4 Amplitude Accuracy Description Specifications Calibration signal accuracy 20 MHz Frequency Amplitude Accuracy 20 MHz 20 dBm 50 3 dB Scale display accuracy Log 20 5 dB 10 dB 0 5 dB 80 dB 0 2 dB 1 dB Total level accuracy 7 1 5 Dynamic Range After performing the automatic calibration Signal level 10 dBm to 50 dBm Preamp Off Input attenuator 10 dB REF 0 dBm Temperature 20 to 30 0 8 dB Frequency range 10 MHz to 3 GHz 1 0 dB Frequency range 9 kHz to 3 GHz Description Specifications Displayed average noise level Ref level 45 dBm RBW 100 Hz 123 dBm 2 f GHz dB f lt 2 5 GHz Preamp Off 123 dBm 2 5 f GHz dB f22 5 GHz Preamp Off 138 dBm 3 f GHz dB Preamp On 1 dB gain compression Frequency range gt 20 MHz gt 5 dBm Preamp Off gt 25 dBm Preamp Second harmonic distortion 70 dBc Preamp Off Mixer input level 30 dBm Frequency gt 20 MH
196. de W The following Peak menu is displayed 1 Delta ON OFF U3700 Series User s Guide 4 2 1 Menu Operation and Data Entry 4 12 RETURN Press RETURN to return to the previous menu from the sub menu Using SHIFT The SHIFT key is used for selecting functions which are indicated in green on the key These functions are described below PRESET Returns to the initial settings ROOT Returns the soft menu to the top menu RFI Selects RF INPUT1 U3771 U3772 RF2 Selects RF INPUT2 U3771 U3772 To perform the function which is written on the key in green press the SHIFT key and then press each key Pressing the SHIFT key turns on its LED and the shift mode is available Press the SHIFT key again to cancel the shift mode The green LED turns off and the shift mode is unavailable Other keys Nothing is printed on these keys but they have the functions shown below USER Sets and cancels the USER menu COPY Displays the Copy menu Select Marker Returns one selected marker number Displaying a dialog box Pressing certain soft keys displays a dialog box Selecting items Select the horizontal items by using data knob and select the vertical items by using the step keys Entering numeric values Enter values by using the keypad and unit key Determining the setting Press the unit key ENTER to determine U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 4 3 1 Basic Measurement 4 3 Basic Measure
197. describes input saturation Cause of Input Saturation A block diagram of the input section of this instrument is shown in Figure A 1 The signal entering from the input connector is input into the mixer through the attenuator RF in O Attenuator gt Ist LO in 1st LO oscillator Figure A 1 Block Diagram of the Input Section Under normal conditions the input level and output level of the mixer are proportionate to each other However if the input level of the mixer increases the mixer becomes saturated and the output level of the mixer is disproportionate to the input level This phenomena is called input saturation and it prevents accurate measurements from being made see Figure A 2 Output level IF out Input level RF in Figure 2 Relation Between Input and Output of the Mixer 4 03700 Series User s Guide 2 2 Root Nyquist Filter Preventing Input Saturation If input saturation occurs set the most suitable attenuator value to lower the mixer input level IMPORTANT If the attenuator setting is too high the mixer input signal becomes smaller and analysis becomes impossible However if the attenuator setting is too low the internal mixer circuit may become damaged Usually the appropriate settings are automatically set for a continuous wave CW input signal if you set the attenuator to auto and set the peak of the signal to or below the reference level I
198. e the surface with a soft dry cloth CAUTION Do not allow water to splash into the inside of the instrument Do not use an organic solvent such as benzene toluene xylene or acetone and the cleanser for cleaning They can cause the paint on the cabinet to come off deform or degrade 9 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 9 1 2 Cleaning of Other Parts 9 1 2 9 2 9 3 9 2 Cleaning of Other Parts Use appropriate caution to protect this instrument from dust WARNING Remove dust periodically from wall sockets and power connector plugs Dust that is wet with humidity may cause tracking that could cause a fire The rear panel is equipped with an exhaust cooling fan and the side and the bottom panels have exhaust vents Keep these vents clean for sufficient exhaustion If dust piled on the vents causes exhaustion to become poor the temperature inside will rise and the instrument will not work cor rectly About Calibration Calibration should be performed periodically to prevent performance deterioration or to adjust chronological performance changes The recommended period of regular calibration is once a year Calibration is done at the factory site For more information call a sales representative About Replacement of Limited Life Parts Table 9 1 lists the proper limited life parts of this instrument The table also shows the number of operations for the expected life spans of each of these parts to suggest
199. e do ensure you have already save an environment for this Power Measure The power measure trace is in blank mode Please change to Write mode Trace gt Refresh gt Write Scale is Linear Mode Please select dB div scale Level gt dB div The target stored trace is the same to the active trace Impossible to set all the trace in blank mode The active trace is in blank mode Noise Measure dBc Hz Impossible to work on the reference marker Impossible to work on the reference marker The delta mode is disable The fixed mode is active The active marker is not enable There is no enable marker Span is not set to 0 Hz Please change span Span is set 0 Hz Please change span Impossible to change the parameter Please insert data in channel table Impossible to change the parameter Please switch on at least one formula Impossible to change the Stop Frequency via normal mode Impossible to change the Start Frequency via normal mode Impossible to change the Center Frequency via normal mode Impossible to change the Stop Frequency via channel mode Impossible to change the Start Frequency via channel mode Impossible to change the Center Frequency via channel mode Could not save screen copy The screen copy cannot be saved on the analyzer memory Please select another media Cannot remove protected file 961 Cannot
200. easurement Display for Noise Power Converted into 5 6 MHz Bandwidth 4 54 4 23 VSWR Measurement A 4 59 6 1 GPIB COofnectloli 6 3 6 2 IE WELL MEE 6 6 6 3 Connection of Cross over Cables essent 6 7 6 4 Status Register Arrangement 1 eese eU e E HE e o odo 6 14 6 5 Details of Status Register 2 2 nennen nennen nennen nennen nennen 6 15 6 6 Structure of the Status Byte Register sse entren ene 6 16 6 7 Relationship between the Screen Graticule and Trace Data 2 2 6 62 1 Block Diagram of the Input Section A 4 A 2 Relation Between Input and Output of the Mixer sse A 4 3 Characteristics of Root Nyquist Filter 2 A 6 A 4 Resolution Bandwidth n a a Ae ER ERES A 7 A 5 Uncertainty AREE 7 6 Noise SIdebands uuu anan Ret waka 8 1 U3700 Series User s Guide List of Illustrations No Title Page 7 Spurious Response 9 8 Occupied Bandwidth estne re aimee e A 10 9 Bandwidth Selectivity A 10 A 10 Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty 11 11 U reer eer A 12 F 2 03700 Series User s Guide LIST OF TABLES No Title Page 3 1 Standard Accessories
201. ectrum mode Sweep time accuracy 50 us to 1000 s 20 ms to 1000 s 2 Zero Span Sweep mode REPEAT SINGLE Trigger function Trigger source 7 2 3 Amplitude Free run Video IF External Description Specifications Amplitude measurement range 30 dBm to displayed average noise level Maximum safe input level Average continuous power DC voltage 30 dBm Input attenuator gt 10 dB Preamp Off 13 dBm Input attenuator gt 10 dB Preamp 15 VDCmax Input attenuator range 0 to 50 dB 10 dB step Display range 100 50 20 10 5 dB Linear Scale unit dBm dBmV dBuVemf dBpW W V Reference level setting range Log scale 140 dBm to 40 dBm Detector mode Normal Positive Peak Negative Peak Sample RMS Video Average 7 7 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 2 4 Amplitude Accuracy 7 2 4 Amplitude Accuracy Description Specifications Calibration signal accuracy 20 MHz Frequency Amplitude Accuracy 20 MHz 20 dBm 50 3 dB Scale display accuracy Log 20 5 dB 10 dB 0 5 dB 80 dB 0 2 1 dB Total level accuracy 7 2 5 Dynamic Range After performing the automatic calibration Image Suppression Off Signal level 10 dBm to 50 dBm Preamp Input attenu ator 10dB REF 0 dBm Temperature 20 C to 30 C 0 8 dB Frequency range 10 MHz to 3 1 GHz 1 04 Frequency range 3 1 GHz to 8 GHz 1 5 dB Frequency ran
202. ecute X dB Down Execute X dB Left Execute XB Right Display ABL ABR More 172 SPAN 200 0 MHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 dB 4 35 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 7 USER Key 4 3 7 USER Key A soft menu related to operation keys and extended function keys can be set to the USER key menu The operability is improved by allocating functions which are frequently used or are located in a deep multilayer menu to the USER key menu How to set a function menu to the USER menu 1 Display a function menu which is set to the USER menu in the soft menu dis play area 2 Press SHIFT and then USER 3 Press a menu key to be set If canceling the setting press any other operation key If setting an additional function menu to the USER menu repeat the above procedure How to delete a function menu from the USER menu 1 Press USER to display the USER menu 2 Press SHIFT and then USER 3 Press a menu key to be deleted If deleting an additional soft key repeat the above procedure 4 36 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 Measurement Examples 4 4 Measurement Examples Descriptions regarding Turning on the power and Initializing this instrument are omitted from this chap ter 4 4 1 Using the Normalize Function and Level Correction Table When a signal is measured by using a long measurement cable the measurement level accuracy can be improved by correcting the cable frequency loss Functions used
203. ed Up to 999 counts can be set ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then calculates the moving average Selects a trace in which to execute the average power measure ment Sets a measuring range in which to execute the average power measurement Displays the Avg P Win menu FULL Measures the average power in the full measuring span WIN Measures the average power the measuring window Sets the measuring window position Sets the measuring window width Displays the Pow Default menu Recalls the saved setting conditions Saves the currently set conditions U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 OBW ACP Execute ON OFF Average Control Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE On Trace A B C Default Conditions Restore Defaults Save Defaults Execute ON OFF Average Control Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Displays the OBW menu ON OFF Performs an occupied bandwidth measurement Cancels the occupied bandwidth measurement Switches the averaging function ON and OFF ON OFF Measures the occupied bandwidth power Cancels the averaging function Sets the number of times averaging 15 performed Up to 999 counts can be set ONCE SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process ter
204. ed ground terminal The instrument will not be grounded if an extension cord which does not include a protected ground terminal is used 3 5 03700 Series User s Guide 3 3 2 Using Battery 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 6 Using Battery The U3700 series can use a battery as a power source An Anton Bauer s battery pack can be used in the U3700 series The DIONIC 90 compact lithium ion battery pack is recommended The DIONIC 90 battery pack specifications Capacity 90 WH Nominal Output voltage 14 4 V Weight Approx 0 7 kg Dimensions 133 x 89 x 54 mm For more information refer to the battery pack operation manual INFORMATION Runtime hours U3741 3 hours 03751 2 5 hours U3771 72 2 hours NOTE The battery life varies depending on the usage situation If using a battery stored over the long term check the runtime in advance Battery Mount System The QR Gold Mount System which is included in professional video cameras worldwide is included in this instrument 1 How to remove and replace the battery pack Align the side of the battery pack that contains the connector with the battery mount on the rear panel of this instrument and push it in and down The battery is attached when a click is heard Turn off the power supply ofthis instrument when detaching the battery To detach the battery lift the battery up while pushing the eject button on the battery mount 03700 Series User s Guide 3 3
205. eep a space of 10 centimeters between the side panel and the wall Do not use this instrument on its side Direct sunlight N on Corrosive Ge 88 Line Filter Vibration Avoid operating in these areas Use a noise cut filter if noise is unavoidable on the AC power line Side Do notuse this instrument on its side Keep a space of 10 centimeters from the wall Figure 3 1 Operating Environment 3 3 U3700 Series User s Guide 3 3 Power Supply 3 3 Power Supply This instrument can use the following three types of power sources AC Power Supply Automatically switches the power supply voltage between 100 V AC and 200 V AC A battery Use an external battery pack A870008 Recommended battery pack DIONIC90 Manufactured by Anton Bauer Inc Anexternal DC power supply Use an external DC power cable A114020 CAUTION Connect this instrument to an AC power supply DC power supply or battery 3 3 1 Using the AC Power Supply This section describes power requirements and how to connect the power cable 3 3 1 1 AC Power Requirements The AC power requirements of this instrument are shown in Table 3 4 Check that the power supply which 15 supplied to this instrument satisfies the conditions shown in Table 3 4 Table 3 4 Power Requirements 100 V AC 200 V AC Remarks Powe
206. eer Ies 5 36 X dB Level 5 nc tees 5 36 X Search Domain 5 47 Y Y ABS REF DL 5 65 Y Range ON OFF 5 47 Y Search Domain 5 47 5 51 Z Zero Span aa aaa 5 61 Zoom and Contexts 5 65 Zoom Position 5 66 Zoom 5 66 8 5 12 5 29 5 67 5 29 5 50 5 65 5 67 5 70 5 67 5 29 5 50 5 65 5 67 5 70 5 44 5 14 5 19 5 68 5 37 5 37 5 50 5 68 5 49 5 50 5 69 5 70 5 70
207. eger Remarks Enable RMS Detector SENSe 1 AVERage TYPE 22 1 SENSe 1 AVERage TY PE Context index RMS VIDeo RMS VID Set EMC Filter SENSe 1 BANDwidth EMC 1 1 SENSe 1 BANDwidth EMC Context index AUTO W200 W9K W120k W1M AUTO W200 W9K W120 W1M Set EMC Enable SENSe 1 BANDwidth EMC STATe 1 1 SENSe 1 BANDwidth EMC STATe Context index 10 Set Video Bandwidth SENSe 1 BANDwidth VIDeo 2 1 SENSe 1 BANDwidth VIDeo Context index Frequency Frequency Enable Video Band Width Auto Coupling SENSe 1 BANDwidth VIDeo 2 1 SENSe 1 BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO Context index 10 Resolution Width SENSe 1 BANDwidth RESolution 2 1 SENSe 1 BANDwidth RESolution Context index Frequency Frequency Enable Resolution Band Width Auto Coupling SENSe 1 BANDwidth RESolution AUTO 22 1 SENSe 1 BANDwidth RESolution AUTO Context index ON OFF PLL Band Width SENSe BANDwidth PLL 1 1 SENSe BANDwidth PLL AUTO MEDIum NARRow AUTO MEDI NARR Enable All Auto Coupling Context Dependent Command SENSe 1 COUPle 2 1 SENSe 1 COUPle Context index ALL NONE ALL NONE Enable Trace Detector Auto Selec tion SENSe 1 DETector 2 AUTO 23 1 SENSe 1 DETector 2 AUTO Context index Trace i
208. eim 6 36 IMMRES 6 39 ai 6 36 IMODR 55 6 39 MKNRSEL nieto 6 35 6 40 MKSPOS eere 6 38 IMS AME restent rer eire Henn 6 40 WID asa 6 38 INSTR u aa qaqa aa aq aqna 6 51 MKSX 6 38 IP RST 6 51 MEKSYDLDL a u 6 38 a quay 6 54 6 38 LARNG soq Guang qaqay 6 34 2 rere 6 38 LBRNG 6 34 MKTRACE eene 6 36 LIMAPOS etie eed 6 33 ML 6 35 LIMAS 6 33 MLAN gaa ak ua a ataqa 6 35 EIMASET 5 one nitens 6 33 MIEN 6 35 LIMPOS 6 33 MLNS 6 35 EIMS ee seiiet e RE R 6 33 MLR eai 6 36 LIMSE 6 33 MIDSED tete ettet risit et 6 36 6 33 MLTOBE 5 6 35 Inn 6 27 MLTSCR eee 6 34 ELO asa 6 51 8 ORE REA REESE 6 38 EMTA EET 6 33 aquya ices 6 51 LMTADETLF 2 6 33 6 35 LMTADELT 6 33 MPA 6 36
209. er register buffer ibo Service request Status byte register Figure 6 4 Status Register Arrangement 6 14 03700 Series User s Guide 6 5 3 Status Byte OPREVT Averaging Power on Command error Measuring Execution error Sweeping Calibrating Standard operation status register Device dependent error Query error Standard event register Status byte register Figure 6 5 Details of Status Register 2 Event Enable Register Each event register has an enable register to determine which bit is available The enable register sets the corresponding bit in decimal value Saervice request enable register setting SRE Standard event status enable register setting ESE Operation status enable register setting OPR 6 15 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 5 3 Status Byte 3 Standard Operation Status Register Assignment in the standard operation status register is listed below Functional definition Description Always 0 Averaging Set to 1 when averaging is complete Always 0 Measuring Set to 1 when sequence measuring is complete Sweeping Set to 1 when sweeping 15 complete Always 0 Calibrating Set to 1 when correction data acquisition is completed 4 Status Byte Register The status byte register sum
210. er signal Sets the delay time from a trigger point Setting range 0 sec to sec Sets the gate time width Setting range 50 usec to 1 sec 12 t3 gate signal 1 t1 Gate Delay t2 Gate Width Measuring Window Window HIDE SHOW Window Position Window Width Window Sweep ON OFF Displays the Window menu HIDE Hides the measuring window SHOW Displays the measuring window Sets the center position of the window Sets the window width ON Performs the sweep only in the range set in the measuring window OFF Performs the sweep in the range of the set span width U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options Limit Lines Pass Fail ON OFF Line 1 ON OFF Line 1 ABV BLW Line 2 ON OFF Line 2 ABV BLW Pass Fail Config X ABS CF FA Shift X ON OFF Y ABS REF DL Displays the Pass Fail menu Switches the Pass Fail Judgment due to the comparison with the limit value ON and OFF ON Performs the Pass Fail judgment Performs the Judgment in each sweep If the limit line is not defined this setting cannot be used OFF Does not perform the Pass Fail judgment Switches limit line 1 ON and OFF ON Displays limit line 1 OFF Hides limit line 1 Sets the judgment condition for limit line 1 ABV Sets the range above limit line 1 as the PASS condition BLW Sets the range below limit line 1 as the PASS condition Switches limit line 2 ON and OFF ON Display
211. eries User s Guide 5 2 SYSTEM Displays the software version dialog box Information U3751 SN 0141101364 Software Options Version JOO 74 Tracking Generator Build 1 28 ElectroMagnetic Compatibility Platform 2 4 71 Boards Configurations Type B IF DSP 3 19 IF FPGA 3 21 IF CPLD 2 5 Mother 6 72 Mother CPLD 4 0 Synthesizer FPGA 6 11 ON Displays set values such as the center frequency on the top and bottom of the vertical scale OFF Hides set values and zooms into the area in which set values are displayed Selects the signal source of the reference frequency Frequency Reference INT EXT XTL Ref Freq Ref Freq 10 MHz INT Selects the internal signal source EXT Uses an external input signal from the EXT REF connector XTL Selects an optional crystal oscillator The reference frequency can be changed by using the step keys The following frequencies can be set as the reference frequency 1 MHz 1 544 MHz 2 048 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz 12 8 MHz 13 MHz 13 824 MHz 14 4 MHz 15 36 MHz 15 4 MHz 16 8 MHz 19 2 MHz 19 44 MHz 19 6608 MHz 19 68 MHz 19 8 MHz 20 MHz 26 MHz Sets the reference frequency to 10 MHz 5 9 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM Remote Control Displays the Remote Ctrl menu GPIB Address Sets the GPIB address of this instrument LAN IP Address Sets the IP address of this instrument Displays the Network Setting dialog
212. ers SP 200MZ RC 5 Recalls the data from Register 5 6 55 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Example 6 Enter Limit linel in the table and turn Limit line 1 on Call ibclr spa Performs a device clear Call ibwrt spa LMTADEL Clears the table used for Limit Line 1 Call ibwrt spa AUNITS DBUV Sets the level unit to dByuV Call ibwrt spa LMTAIN 25MZ 49 5DB Enters data used by Limit Line 1 Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 35MZ 49 5DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 35MZ 51 5DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 55MZ 51 5DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 55MZ 54 3DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 65MZ 54 3DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 65MZ 57 0DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 68MZ 57 0DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 68MZ 60 0DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 75MZ 60 0DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 75MZ 62 5DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 82MZ 62 5DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 82MZ 64 7DB Call ibwrt spa FA OMZ Sets the start frequency to 0 MHz Call ibwrt spa FB 100MZ Sets the stop frequency to 100 MHz Call ibwrt spa LMTA ON Turns Limit line 1 on 6 56 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 3 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Sample Programs for Reading Data In order to output measurement data or settings use the xx command This ensures that the data is read when this instrument is in the talker mode Available output formats are listed in the
213. es The VSWR 1s another expression of the reflection coefficient or return loss Referring to Figure A 11 the signal E1 at receiving end the spectrum analyzer input section is the same as the signal 0 at the transmitting end if the impedance of the receiving end is matched to that of the trans mitting end The reflection coefficient is expressed in the formula shown below when the reflected wave ER exists due to a mismatch between the impedances Reflection coefficient m Reflected wave Traveling wave Ep The Return loss is expressed in the formula shown below Return loss 20 log Eg Eg dB VSWR Eg Eg Eo The relationship of VSWR with the reflection coefficient is as follows VSWR 1 mJ 1 m The range of VSWR is between 1 and eo the nearer to 1 this value is the better the state of impedance match ing is Signal to be measured Spectrum analyzer Sender Ep PE E Receiver Traveling wave Reflected wave Figure A 11 VSWR U3700 Series User s Guide 4 dB Conversion Formula A 4 dB Conversion Formula 1 Definitions 0 dBV 1 Vrms Y dBV 20 log SY X mW 0 dBm 1 mW Y dBm 10 log Faw OdByV 1pVims Y dBuV 20 log Ne XpW 0 dBpw pW Y dBpw 10 log T pw 2 Conversion formulas If R 50 x If R 75 x dBV dBm 13 dB dBV dBm 11 dB dBuV dBm 107 dB dBuV dBm 109 dB dBuVemfz dBm 13 dB dBuVemf dBm 115 dB dBpw dBm 90
214. es User s Guide 51 M Mod Mode Mode More Nega Norm 5 4 Mkr Step AUTO MNL Mkr to CF Step Mkr to Mkr Step gt Next Peak Right Noise Hz enu Index Freq to Sweep Time ON OFF FULL CARR Index Value 1 2 5 50 5 48 5 31 5 31 5 31 5 30 5 45 5 26 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 32 5 34 5 36 5 38 5 40 Others HIDE SHOW Paper Format Parser AT SCPI me Pass Fail Config Pass Fail ON OFF Peak List Frequency Peak List Level 1 RR Peak Menu Peak to CF Peak to Ref ocio cineres Peak Zoom Power Average Previous Print Config eec eee R3131 Mode ON OFF R3162 Mode ON OFF Range FULL WIN RBW 1 MHz RBW 200 HZ e RBW 9 kHz eeeee RBW Auto RBW CAL Recall Ref Freq Ref Freq 10 MHz Ref Level eese Ref Object Ref Offset ON OFF Ref Disp Lines Reference Line Reference Marker Refresh Refresh Write Remote Control 2 2 Remove File 5 48 5 15 5 11 5 68 5 39 5 68 5 42 5 11 5 38 5 41 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 48 5 73 5 45 5 44 5 35 5 15 5 11 5 10 5 29 5 11 5 21 5 9 5 9 5 48 5 63 5 32 5 69 5 48 5 56 5 69 5 48 5 44 5 44 5 10 5 14 03700 Series User s Guide 5 Menu Index 5 18 5 19 Spectrum Emission 5 25 5 32 Rename File eee 5
215. esult 15 entered into memory C When trace is set to the Write mode the data acquired in the sweep is subtracted from the data in memory B and the result is entered into memory C When trace 15 set to the Write mode the data on the display line is subtracted from the data acquired in the sweep and the result is entered into memory A When trace B is set to the Write mode the data on the display line is subtracted from the data acquired in the sweep and the result is entered into memory B ON Displays and activates the display line OFF Cancels the display line Displays the Store menu Copies the active trace data and sets to the View mode Saves the active trace data to trace memory A Saves the active trace data to trace memory B Saves active trace data to trace memory C Selects the applied trace memory Selects the applied trace memory Selects the applied trace memory 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 9 5 2 9 Displays the Marker menu and an active marker by pressing key The frequency and level on the marker are displayed in the marker area Select Marker Marker ON OFF Marker Trace A B C Delta Mode gt Delta ON OFF Peak Menu a Ref Object 5 Reference Marker Clear Fixed Mkr ON OFF Reference Line L More 1 2 1 Delta Mkr ON OFF i L Others HIDESHOW Clear Others Display List ON OFF Mkr Step AUTO MNL Mode Ind
216. esults amp ResultACP End Sub 6 74 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 SCPI Command Reference 6 10 SCPI Command Reference This chapter describes the SCPI command reference for this instrument 6 10 1 Command Reference Syntax This section describes the function syntax and parameter of each SCPI command discussed in this chap ter Function description How to use a command or operations when the command is executed are described SCPI command Syntax when the command is sent from an external controller to this instrument is described Example Marker setting 10 Enable Marker CALCulate l MARKer 2 STATe 23 Context index 1 CALCulate 1 MARKerZ2 STATe Space m The syntax consists of a command section and parameter section The command section and parameter section are delimited by a space 1 2 and 3 are parameters required for sending a command A number that follows on or corresponds to a row number in the parameter column The parameter may be omitted If omitted the parameter is set to 1 The parameter cannot be omitted Lowercase alphabetical characters written in syntax can be omitted shows that the command is optional This command can be omitted shows that only one item is required to be selected from multiple items 6 75 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 1 Command Reference Syntax Parameter Following parameters from 1 to 7 can be omitted
217. et Limit Lines Time Offset CALCulate LLINe CMODe X OFFSet TIME 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe X OFFSet TIME Select Limit Lines Y axis Positioning CALCulate LLINe CMODe Y 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe Y ABSolute TOP DLINe ABS TOP DLIN Set Limit Lines Y axis Offset CALCulate LLINe CMODe Y OFFSet 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe Y OFFSet Relative amplitude Relative amplitude 6 81 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Enable Limit Line Y axis Offset SCPI command CALCulate LLINe CMODe Y OFFSet STATe 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe Y OFFSet STATe Parameter Query reply Remarks Select Limit Line Domain CALCulate LLINe CONrol DOMain 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CONrol DOMain FREQuency TIME FREQ TIME Query Limit Line Application Result 1 CALCulate LLINe FAIL Pass Fail Result Enable Limit Line Application CALCulate LLINe TESTing STATe 1 1 CALCulate LLINe TESTing STATe ON OFF 10 Execute Noise Per Herz CALCulate MARKer 1 FUNCtion 22 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Marker index NOISe OFF DBUV DBC NOIS OFF DBUV DBC Set Frequency Counter Position CALCulate MARKer FCOunt POSition 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt POSition Frequency Frequency Set Frequency Counter Resolution CALCulate MARKer FCOunt RESolution 1 1 CAL
218. ex Value Signal Track gt Signal Track ON OFF Y Range ON OFF Peak Menu Select Marker Next Peak Next Peak Right Next Peak Left Config P Peak Delta Y p L More 1 2 Continuous Peak ON OFF X Search Domain _________ Couple to Win OFF IN OUT _ Search Domain sae gt Min Peak 22 2 Next Min Peak Window Widt Min Max Peak Couple to DL OFF ABV BLW Peak List Frequency Display Line ON OFF Peak List Level Couple to Line 1 OFF ABV BLW Display List ON OFF Couple to Line 2 OFF ABV BLW Edit Limit Lines Limit Line 1 2 Delete Entry Insert Entry Table Init 5 47 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 9 MKR Select Marker Marker ON OFF Marker Trace A B C Delta Mode Delta ON OFF Ref Object Reference Marker Reference Line Fixed Mkr ON OFF 1 Delta Mkr ON OFF Peak Menu Clear All More 1 2 Others HIDE SHOW Clear Others Display List ON OFF Mkr Step AUTO MNL Selects the active marker and sets its position The marker number increases by one each time the key is pressed The marker number cycles from 1 to 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 The marker number decreases by one if SHIFT is pressed and then Select Marker is pressed Activates the marker selected by Select Marker Moves the active marker to the selected trace Displays the Delta Marker menu Switches the delta marker display function ON and OFF ON Displays a del
219. f 20 msec is too fast for the set conditions 4 23 03700 Series User s Guide 4 3 3 How to Cancel the UNCAL Message REF 0 00 dBm 100 CENTER 20 00000 MHz SPAN 10 00 kHz RBW 300 Hz VBW 300 Hz ATT 10 dB Figure 4 17 Displaying the UNCAL Message How to cancel the UNCAL message 11 Press CPL RBW AUTO MNL 1 and kHz Setting the RBW to 1 kHz cancels the UNCAL message because the sweep time of 20 msec meets the set conditions Coupling REF 0 00 dBm RBW AUTO MNL VBW AUTO MNL Sweep Time AUTO MNL All Auto 90 s NEN 100 CENTER 20 00000 MHz SPAN 10 00 kHz VBW 1 kHz ATT 10 dB Figure 4 18 Canceling the UNCAL Message 4 24 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 4 Identifying an Image Signal 4 3 4 Identifying an Image Signal This function 15 available only for the U3751 U3771 and U3772 This instrument may display an image signal depending on the input signal If measuring an unknown frequency signal the real signal and image signal must be identified before start ing the measurement The Image Suppression and Signal Identification functions can be used to identify the image signal Image Suppression function Detects image signals and automatically deletes them from the display Press FREQUENCY 1 2 and Image Suppression ON OFF Frequency 2 2 OFF REF 0 00 dBm MKR 6 760 GHz 1 Signal 10 0 dBi 6 27 dBm Identification ON OFF 1 2 Image Sup
220. f Commands Query reply Remarks Frequency Enable Root Nyquist Filter SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC STATe 1 1 SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC STATe ON OFF Enable ACP Graph Display SENSe ACPower GRAPh 1 1 SENSe ACPower GRAPh ON OFF Insert New Channel in ACP Chan nel Table SENSe ACPower OFFSet DATA 1 Channel Spacing Frequency Channel Width Frequency Delete ACP Channel Table SENSe ACPower OFFSet DATA DELete Select ACP Trace SENSe ACPower TRACe 1 1 SENSe ACPower TRACe Trace index Trace index Set Average Power Maximum Sweep Count SENSe AVPower AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe AVPower AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set Average Power Averaging Con trol Mode SENSe AVPower AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe AVPower AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Enable Average Power Averaging SENSe AVPower AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe AVPower AVERage STATe ON OFF Restore Power Average Setting SENSe AVPower DATA LOAD Save Current Settings for Power Average SENSe AVPower DATA SAVE Set Power Average Trace SENSe AVPower TRACe 1 1 SENSe AVPower TRACe Trace index Trace index Set Power Average Range SENSe AVPower WINDow 1 1 SENSe AVPower WINDow ON OFF 10 Set Measuring Window Position Average Power SE
221. f the resolution bandwidth RBW is narrower than the modulation bandwidth in the measurement ofan input signal with a wide modulation band the display level decreases Therefore the attenuator must be manually set to the optimum value Confirming that the attenuator is set to the optimum value 1 Obtain a rough set value for the attenuator by using the following formula The maximum input level of the mixer is 5 dBm Input attenuator set value dB gt Input level dBm 10 dB 2 Decrease the attenuator setting in steps while watching the screen If the peak value on the screen does not change no input saturation occurs and the measurement can be continued If the peak value changes increase the attenuator setting to eliminate the change A 2 2 Root Nyquist Filter When measuring the adjacent channel leakage power this instrument is able to make a correction to the input signal equivalent to as if the signal passed through the root Nyquist filter When calculating the power for each channel by integrating the trace data the power is multiplied by the coefficient of the root Nyquist filter at the corresponding frequency H n P n b P y X10 xH n 1 1 a ami b fucn The coefficient ofthe root Nyquist filter H n is calculated from the symbol rate T and the roll off factor a by using the following formula 1 0 lt fl 1 2 COS T 4a 2x f x 1 11 1 2 lt
222. ference 15 used Resolution bandwidth RBW Range 30 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence Accuracy 12 7 20 U3700 Series User s Guide Dynamic Range 7 5 7 Option 75 75 Tracking Generator Description Specifications Displayed average noise level RF Input 1 RF Input 2 Frequency range gt 10 MHz Ref level lt 45 dBm RBW 30 Hz 126 dBm 2 f GHz dB BandO Preamplifier Off 125 dBm 1 2 f GHz dB Band Preamplifier Off 141 dBm 3 f GHz dB TBD 40 Preamplifier On 142 dBm 1 4 f GHz dB Bandi Preamplifier On 124 dBm 2 f GHz dB 0 123 dBm 1 5 f GHz dB Band1 114 dBm Band2 112 dBm Band3 108 dBm Band4 7 5 7 Option 75 75 Tracking Generator Description Specifications Frequency range 100 kHz to 2 2 GHz Frequency offset Range Resolution Accuracy 0 to 1 GHz 1 kHz 300 Hz Output level range 107 to 47dBuV 0 5 dB step Output level accuracy 0 5 dB 20 MHz 97 dBuV 20 C to 30 C Output level flatness Reference signal level 97 Frequency 20 MHz 1 04 1 MHz to 1 GHz 1 5 dB 100 kHz to 2 2 GHz Output level switching uncertainty Reference level 97 dBuV 1 0 dB 1 MHz to 1 GHz 107 to 47 dBuV 2 0 dB 1 MHz to 2 2 GHz 107 to 47 dBuV 3 0 dB 100 kHz to 2 2 GHz 107 to 77 dBuV Frequency Offset OFF 4 0 dB 100 kHz to 2 2 GHz 77 to 47 dBuV Frequency Offset OFF 5 0 dB 100 kHz to 2 2 GHz 107 to
223. ge 9 kHz to 10 MHz Description Specifications Displayed average noise level Frequency range 10 MHz to 8 GHz Ref level lt 45 dBm RBW 100 Hz 123 dBm 2 f GHz dB BandO Preamp Off 122 dBm 1 f GHz dB Preamp Off 138 dBm 3 f GHz dB 40 Preamp 139 dBm 1 3 f GHz dB Bandli Preamp On 1 dB gain compression Frequency range 10 MHz to 8 GHz gt 8 dBm Preamp Off gt 25 dBm Preamp Second harmonic distortion lt 70 dBc Preamp Off Mixer input level 40 dBm Frequency gt 200 MHz lt 75 dBc typ Preamp Off Mixer input level 30 dBm Frequency gt 300 MHz Third order intermodulation distortion TOD Frequency range 10 MHz to 8 GHz Preamp Off Mixer input level 20 dBm Frequency separation 200 kHz 50 dBc Image responses Multiple responses and Out of band responses Image Suppression On 60 dBc Residual responses 7 8 Frequency 10 MHz to 8 GHz 80dBm Preamp Off 03700 Series User s Guide 7 2 6 Input and Output 7 2 6 Input and Output Description Specifications RF input Connector Impedance VSWR Type N f on the front panel 50 O nom Input attenuator 2 10 dB lt 1 71 lt 3 0 GHz 2 0 1 gt 3 0 GHz Calibration signal output Connector Impedance Frequency Level BNC f on the front panel 50 O nom 20 MHz 20 dBm External trigger input Connector Impedance Trigger level BNC f on
224. gital Broadcasting Channel Number and Frequency Analyzer s Frequency range Center frequency MHz MHz 662 00 668 00 665 142857 668 00 674 00 671 142857 674 00 680 00 677 142857 680 00 686 00 683 142857 686 00 692 00 689 142857 692 00 698 00 695 142857 698 00 704 00 701 142857 704 00 710 00 707 142857 710 00 716 00 713 142857 716 00 722 00 719 142857 722 00 728 00 725 142857 728 00 734 00 731 142857 734 00 740 00 737 142857 740 00 746 00 743 142857 740 00 752 00 749 142857 752 00 758 00 755 142857 758 00 764 00 761 142857 764 00 770 00 767 142857 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 4 Satellite Broadcasting BS IF Band Channel Number and Frequency A 6 4 Satellite Broadcasting BS IF Band Channel Number and Frequency Analyzer s Frequency range Center frequency ame MHz MHz 1032 23 1066 73 1070 59 1105 09 1112 70 1139 70 1151 06 1178 06 1189 42 1216 42 1227 78 1254 78 1262 39 1296 89 1300 75 1335 25 1339 11 1373 61 1377 47 1411 97 1415 83 1450 33 1454 19 1488 69 A 6 5 110 CS CS IF Band Channel Number and Frequency Analyzer s Frequency range Center frequency MHz MHz 1595 75 1630 25 1635 75 1670 25 1675 75 1710 25 1715 75 1750 25 1755 75 1790 25 1795 75 1830 25 1835 75 1870 25 1875 75 1910 25
225. gnal to be measured Measurement frequency range U3771 10 MHz to 31 8 GHz U3772 10 MHz to 43 GHz CAUTION 1 Do not apply an RF power or DC voltage that exceeds the limited value to the INPUT and OUTPUT con nectors Be careful of static electricity Internal circuit components such as the input attenuator and mixer may be damaged The precision microwave connector is used as the RF INPUT2 connector This connector is compatible with the K connector K connector is a trademark of Anritsu Corporation and be connected to a common SMA connector Be careful when handling this connector because the connector is delicate and is damaged easily Use the included adapter HE A PJ if the connection and disconnection to this connector are per formed frequently For the 75 Q option OPTI5 and OPT75 input and output connectors are changed to 75 type con nectors 50 Q cable or connector is connected to a 75 connector the center contact of the 75 connector may be damaged Verify that cables and connectors which are used are 75 type MEAS 1 MEAS 2 USER TRACE MKR PEAK gt FREQUENCY SPAN AMPLITUDE EXT CFG CPL U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 1 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Front Panel EXT CFG 14 15 Figure4 5 Operation Ke
226. he character string Sep2 InStr sepl 1 Rdbuff 0 Searches for the next comma LvlL Mid Rdbuff sepl 1 sep2 sepl 1 Reads the string between the first and second commas InStr sep2 1 Rdbuff 0 Searches for the next comma FrgH Mid Rdbuff sep2 1 sepl sep2 1 Reads the string between the second and third commas Sep2 InStr sepl Rdbuff Chr 13 0 Searches for the terminator CR 6 70 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 7 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control LvlL Mid Rdbuff sepl 1 sep2 sepl 1 Reads the string between the third comma and the CR Displays the data on the screen RichTextBoxl Text RichTextBoxl Text amp FrqL amp Hz amp LvlL amp vbCrLf RichTextBoxl Text RichTextBoxl Text FrgH amp Hz amp LvlL amp vbCrLf Next i DoEvents Next j Example Programs Which Use the Status Byte Example 1 Execute a single sweep and wait until its finished when not using SRQ Example 2 Dim state As Integer Call ibclr spa Call ibwrt spa SI Call ibwrt spa OPR8 Call ibwrt spa CLS Call ibwrt spa SI Do Call ibwrt spa STB Rdbuff Space 8 Call ibrd spa Rdbuff state Val Rdbuff DoEvents Loop Until state And 128 Performs a Device Clear Turns the single sweep mode on Enables the sweep end bit of the operation status register Clears the status byte Beg
227. he button on the cable connector WS NL DC power supply input connector XLR 4 pins Connector pin location Pin number 1 GND Pin number 2 N C Pin number 3 N C Pin number 4 terminal 3 8 03700 Series User s Guide 3 4 Caution when Connecting Peripherals 3 4 Caution when Connecting Peripherals Use shielded cables when connecting peripherals to the USB and LAN connectors on this instrument Attach the included ferrite core ESD SR 120 to the cable Figure 3 3 Attachment of a Ferrite Core 1 When connecting an earphone to the PHONE connector attach the included ferrite core E04SR150718 to the earphone cable Figure 3 4 Attachment of a Ferrite Core 2 3 9 U3700 Series User s Guide 3 5 Checking Operations 3 5 Checking Operations This section describes how to check operations by using the calibration function of this instrument Check that this instrument operates correctly by following the procedure below Starting this instrument 1 Connect the power cable according to 3 3 1 2 Connecting the Power Cable 2 AC power switch on the rear panel 3 Three seconds after turning on the AC power switch on the rear panel press the power switch on the front panel to turn on the instrument The power supply and the green power light turn on Figure3 5 POWER Switch 4 system boots up
228. he optimum phase noise characteristics corresponding to the frequency span can be obtained Sets the filter width to Medium Sets the filter width to Narrow The phase noise around 300 kHz to 2 MHz away from the carrier 18 improved CAUTION When PLL Band Width is set to Medium or Narrow the phase noise may deteriorate depending on the set frequency span In such a case set to AUTO 03700 Series User s Guide 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 OVERVIEW OF REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW OF REMOTE CONTROL This chapter describes the overview of the remote control system Remote Control Types of Systems The following two types of remote control systems can be configured depending on the interface Interface Overview The external controller controls the U3700 Series and other devices which are connected with each other through the GPIB in this system For more information refer to 6 2 GPIB Remote Control Sys GPIB Talker Listener mode tem on page 6 2 The external controller controls the U3700 Series and other devices which are connected with each other through LAN in this system For more information refer to 6 3 LAN Remote Control System on page 6 6 Selecting the Command Set Either the AT Advantest command set or SCPI command set is selected as a command set used for pro gramming in this instrument Both command sets cannot be used together Press SYSTEM Remote Control a
229. hic Z 1 Screen U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options ON Sets the offset dB of the vertical axis from the limit line The limit line display is shifted by the level offset ON Displays the display line Sets the position of the display line OFF Hides the display line Displays the Limit Line menu 1 Edits limit 1 2 Edits limit 2 Deletes a line on which cursor is positioned in limit line table Inserts a line in the limit line table Clears all settings in the limit line table Displays the Display menu Switches the display of the display line which is used as the ref erence line when trace levels are compared between ON and OFF ON Displays the display line OFF Hides the display line Switches the display ofthe reference line which is used as the ref erence to display level data in relative value between ON and OFF ON Displays the reference line The reference position can be changed OFF Hides the reference line Displays the Zoom Contexts menu Displays the G Zoom 1 Screen menu Graphic Zoom 1 ON OFF Window Position Window Width ON Zooms in the area selected by the window OFF Cancels the zoom in display Sets the center position of the window Sets the window width U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options Graphic Z 2 Screens Displays the G Zoom 2 Screen menu Graphic
230. hite traces Selects the white and black mode black traces Sets the password used to lock the panel The password 15 set to 0 0 0 0 when this instrument is shipped from the factory The password can be changed in the dialog box Password Change Old Password Password Confirm New Password A password can be initialized 0 0 0 0 through the GPIB GPIB AT command RPWD Displays the Date Time menu Sets a date and time They are set or changed in the dialog window Date Time Configuration Year Month Day 98 29 Hour Minute E E Year Set a year Month Set a month Day Set a date Hour Set an hour Minute Seta minute Format Show ON OFF Copy Config Copy Copy Device FILE PRT Screen Shot Config File Format PNG BMP Auto Inc ON OFF Auto Inc Index U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM Sets date display formats They are set or changed in the dialog window Date and Time Format Date Format MDY YMD Day Format Hum Short Long Month Format Num Short Long Year Format Short Long Time Format 24 Hours 12 Hours Switches ON and OFF the date display ON Displays the date OFF Hides the date display Displays the Copy menu Outputs screen data according to Config Specifies the copy output device FILE Selects an external USB memory device PRT Selects a printer Displays the File Config menu Selects either PNG po
231. ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 65 MHZ 57 0 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 68 MHZ 57 0 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 68 MHZ 60 0 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 75 MHZ 60 0 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 75 MHZ 62 5 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 82 MHZ 62 5 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 82 MHZ 64 7 Set up the instrument Call ibwrt spa FREQ START 0 HZ Call ibwrt spa FREQ STOP 100 MHZ Display limit line 1 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DISPLAY ON End Sub 6 109 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 4 Example Programs which SCPI Commands Are Used 6 110 Example 7 Reading and displaying the marker level Private Sub cmdEx2 1 Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa Reading and displaying the marker level Set up the instrument Call ibwrt spa FREQ CENT 30 MHZ Call ibwrt spa FREQ SPAN 1 MHZ Enable marker 1 Call ibwrt spa CALC MARK1 STATE ON Set the marker to 30 MHz Call ibwrt spa CALC MARK1 x 30 MHZ Call ibwrt spa SENS SWEEP TIME 2 S Execute a single uninterruptible sweep Call ibwrt spa INIT TS Request the marker level read out and read the answer Call ibwrt spa CALC MARK1 y Dim myBuff As String Dim sepa As Integer myBuff Space 30 Call ilrd spa myBuff 30 Sepa InStr 1 myBuff vbCrLf txbAnswer Text M
232. ig 0 DLIM2 4 ibwrt spa Call ibrdi spa tr 1001 2 For 0 1000 Step 1 f tmp tr i Rslt tmp And amp HFF amp 256 Rslt Rslt res res amp Str Rslt Call Call ibwrt spa As String f DLIMO 0 1000 Step 1 d Space 7 f tmp And amp HFF00 amp amp vbCrLf Allocates an array in the buffer for 1001 points Performs a Device Clear CR LF EOI Repeats the operation for 1001 points Allocates 7 bytes 5 bytes for the data and 2 bytes for delimiters Reads the data Displays the data on the screen Left tr i 5 amp vbCrLf Reading the memory A data in binary format Allocates an array in the buffer for 1001 points tmp As Integer Performs a device clear IbcEndBitIsNormal 0 Sets the GPIB board software so that the end bit of the Ibsta variable is set to 1 only when EOI has been received Sets the delimiter to EOI only Requests Trace A in binary data Reads 1001 points of binary data Repeats the operation for 1001 points Swaps the high and low bites 256 Displays the data on the screen DoEvents Next i RichTextBoxl Text res Call ibwrt spa DLIMO Call ibconfig 0 6 66 Sets the delimiter to the CR LF EOI IbcEndBitIsNormal 1 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Example3 Entering data into memory A in ASCII format Dim trdata 1000 As
233. index Marker index Marker index Query Markers List 1 2 3 4 5 CALCulate 1 MARKer ALL INFO Context index number of rows marker index Marker index marker enable 110 marker position Position Hz s marker amplitude Amplitude Clear All Markers CALCulate 1 MARKer AOFF Context index Enable Continuous Peak Search CALCulate 1 MARKer CPEak STATe 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer CPEak STATe Context index 10 Enable Fixed Reference Mode CALCulate 1 MARKer DELTa FIXed STATe 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer DELTa FIXed STATe Context index ON OFF Enable Marker Delta Mode CALCulate 1 MARKer DELTa STATe 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer DELTa STATe Context index ON OFF Set Center Frequency from Peak CALCulate 1 MARKer MA Ximum SET CENTer Context index Set Reference Level from Peak CALCulate 1 MARKer MA Ximum SET RLEVel Context index Set Marker Mode CALCulate 1 MARKer MODE 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer MODE Context index POSition DELTa POS DELT 6 79 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Set Peak Excursion SCPI command CALCulate 1 MARKer PEAK EXCursion 4 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer PEAK EXCursion Parameter Context index Number Query reply Number Remarks Set the Delta Marker Reference Obje
234. index Trace index Trace index Order Peak in Position or Amplitude Order DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe MATH PEAK SORT 22 Context index FREQuency AMPLitude Set dB per Screen Division DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision 22 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Context index Relative amplitude Relative amplitude Set Reference Level DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe YE SCALeJ RLEVel 22 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel Context index Amplitude Amplitude 6 87 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Set Reference Level Offset SCPI command DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe YE SCALeJ RLEVel OFFSet 22 1 DISPlay WINDowz1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Parameter Context index Relative amplitude Query reply Relative amplitude Remarks Enable Reference Level Offset DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet STATe 2 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet STATe Context Index Set Vertical Scale DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe SPACing 2 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe SPACing Context index LINear LOGarithmic LINILOG Acquire Trace Normalization Data 6 88 DISPlay WINDow TRACe 1 NCORrection STORe Trace index 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6
235. ines Limit Line 1 2 Delete Entry Insert Entry Table Init Select Marker Selects the active marker The marker number increases by one each time the key is pressed The marker number decreases by one if SHIFT 1s pressed and then Select Marker is pressed Next Peak Moves the marker to the next highest peak from the current marker position in the search range Next Peak Right Moves the marker to the next peak on the right higher frequency than the current marker position in the search range Next Peak Left Moves the marker to the next peak on the left lower frequency than the current marker position in the search range Config Displays the Peak Cfg menu Peak Delta Y Sets the level difference from the peak in which a signal is recog nized as a peak point during the peak search This level difference is used as the threshold level for the peak point search Continuous Peak ON OFF Switches the continuous peak search function ON and OFF X Search Domain 5 50 ON OFF Displays the X PK Area menu Repeats the peak search in each sweep Cancels the continuous peak search function Couple to Win OFF IN OUT U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 10 PEAK Sets a peak search range on the horizontal axis OFF Sets the full range on the screen as the search range IN Sets the inside of the displayed window as the search range OUT Sets the outside of the displayed window as the search range Window Posi
236. ins sweeping Requests the value of the status byte Reserve a maximum of 8 bytes including the delimiter Reads the data Converts the character string into numeric values Checks the loop for other events currently taking place Exits from the loop if the sweep end bit is set to 1 Reading the peak frequency and level at the end of a single sweep when using SRQ Dim boardID As Integer I As Integer res As Integer CFLEV As String Dim Dim Dim boardID 0 Call ibclr spa Call ibwrt spa SI Call ibwrt spa CLS Call ibwrt spa OPR 8 Call ibwrt spa SRE 128 Call ibwrt spa 50 Sets the board ID Performs a Device Clear Turns the single sweep mode on Clears the status byte Enables the Sweep end bit of the operation status register Enables the Operation status bit of the status byte Specifies Send mode for the SRQ signal 6 71 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control For I 1 10 Step 1 Sets up a 10 loop Call ibwrt spa SI Begins sweeping Call WaitSRQ boardID res Waits until SRQ interruption occurs Call ibrsp spa res Executes serial polling Call ibwrt spa PS Executes the peak search Call ibwrt spa MFL Request the values of the marker frequency and level Rdbuff Space 43 Reserves 43 bytes Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Reads the data CFLEV Left Rdbuff InStr 1 Rdbuff Chr 13 0 1 RichTextBoxl Tex
237. ion Set Marker Position SCPI command CALCulate 1 MARK erz2 X 3 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 X Parameter Context index Marker index Frequency Time U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply Position Hz s Remarks Get Marker Absolute Position 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 X ABSolute Context index Marker index Position Hz s Get Marker Coordinates 1 2 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 XY Context index Marker index Position Hz s amplitude Amplitude Get Marker Amplitude 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 Y Context index Marker index Amplitude Get Marker Absolute Amplitude 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 Y ABSolute Context index Marker index Amplitude Set Center Frequency from Marker Position CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 SET CENTer Context index Marker index Set Marker Step from Marker Position CALCulatezz1 MARKerZ2 SET MARKer STEP Context index Marker index Set Reference Level from Marker Amplitude CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 SET RLEVel Context index Marker index Set Span from Marker Delta Position Difference CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 SET SPAN Context index Marker index Set Center Frequency Step from Marker Position CALCulatez1 MARKerZ2 SET STEP Context index Marker index Select Active Marker CALCulate 1 MARKer ACTive 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer ACTive Context
238. ion ON and OFF ON Measures the average channel power OFF Cancels the averaging function Sets the number of times averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then calculates the moving average Selects a trace in which to execute the channel power measure ment Activates the settings of the measuring window position Activates the setting of the measuring window width Displays the Pow Default menu Recalls the saved setting conditions Saves the currently set conditions U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Total Power Measures the total power in the measuring span Displays the Toal Pow menu The total power can be obtained by using the following equation P n X2 I SPAN Pr 10og 2 10 x PEW X Toor 1 Total power to be obtained P n Displayed data at each trace point dBm SPAN Span setting value PBW Noise power bandwidth 1 2 1001 Execute ON OFF ON Performs a total power measurement OFF Cancels the total power measurement Average Control Performs the average settings for the total power measurement Displays the Tot P Avg menu Averaging ON OFF Switches the averaging function ON and OFF ON Measures the average total power OFF Cancels the averaging function Max Sweep Count Sets the number of time
239. ious measurement Selects a trace in which to execute the spurious measurement Displays the Spr Config menu At the same time the Spurious Bands setting window is dis played The start and stop frequencies of the spurious measurement band the RBW VBW sweep time attenuator reference level preamp ON or OFF and judgment level value used in the measure ment can be set in the Spurious Bands setting window Spurious Bands No 1 2 3 Start MENNEEEEEEE NES RBW Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual VBW Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual ATT Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Ref Level Preamp On Off On Off On Off op p 9 Insert Delete Init Table Table No 1 2 3 Results Previous Band Next Band Table No 1 2 3 Default Conditions Restore Defaults Save Defaults U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Inserts a column in which spurious measurement conditions can be set at the current cursor position The data contained in the row that existed in the position before insertion is copied to each setting value as new row data Deletes a column of measurement conditions from the current cursor position Initializes all data in the table currently being edited Sets the setting sequence table number for the spurious measure ment to 1 2 or 3 1 Sets ta
240. isplays the data on the screen 6 61 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control 6 9 1 4 6 62 Sample Programs for Inputting or Outputting Trace Data Trace data on the screen Includes data for 501 or 1001 points on the frequency axis For inputting and out putting data it is necessary to transfer data for 501 or 1001 points from the left side start frequency in order Each point level is expressed by an integer from 1792 to 14592 however if the trace exceeds the upper limit of the vertical scale a value greater than 14592 1s transferred 14592 Trace data value 1792 i i i 1 101 201 301 401 501 601 701 801 901 1001 51 101 151 201 251 301 351 401 451 501 Number of data points Figure 6 7 Relationship between the Screen Graticule and Trace Data Trace data can be input or output in either ASCII or binary format Specify the output by using 16 bit integer data or the absolute value when outputting a value with binary data For the 1 or FORM3 format transfer data in order from the high order byte of the data For the FORM2 or FORM4 format transfer data in order from the low order byte NOTE Only dB can be used as a unit for the absolute value output When the Units setting is Watts or Volts a value with a unit of dBm is output 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Table 6 4 Trace Point Specific
241. l Power b gt Execute ON OFF Average Control Averaging ON OFF On Trace A B C Max Sweep Count Default Conditions Average ONCE SLIDE gt Restore Defaults Save Defaults Average Power gt Execute ON OFF Average Control Averaging ON OFF On Trace A B C Max Sweep Count Window W__ Average ONCE SLIDE Default Conditions Range FULL WIN Window Position Window Width Restore Defaults Save Defaults OBW d Execute ON OFF Average Control Averaging ON OFF On Trace A B C Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Default Conditions ______ Restore Defaults u Save Defaults 5 25 U3700 Series User s Guide 52 6 MEAS 1 5 26 ACP e 9 Execute ON OFF Mode FULL CARR Config Channel Definition Graph ON OFF Default Conditions Spectrum Emission f F Execute ON OFF Spurious g On Trace A B C Config Bands Definition Default Conditions _ Average Control Average Control Execute ON OFF On Trace A B C Results Table No 1 2 3 Default Conditions Bands Definition y Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Carrier Bandwidth Ch Windows ON OFF Nyquist Filter ON OFF Nyq Symbo
242. l Rate Roll Off Factor Insert Channel Delete Channel Init Table Restore Defaults Save Defaults Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Carrier Bandwidth Ref Power CHN PEAK Ch Windows ON OFF Show Mask ON OFF Nyquist Filter ON OFF Nyq Symbol Rate Nyq Roll Off Factor Delete Band L Init Table Restore Defaults Save Defaults Insert Band Delete Band Init Table Table No 1 2 3 Previous Band Next Band Restore Defaults L_ Save Defaults Channel Power Execute ON OFF Average Control Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE On Trace A B C Channel Position Channel Width Default Conditions Restore Defaults Save Defaults U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Activates the measuring window and displays the Channel P menu The channel power can be obtained by using the following equation P n Xi 415 SPAN 10log X 10 x aw X Go xi Channel power to obtained P n Displayed data at each trace point dBm SPAN Channel Width setting value PBW Noise power bandwidth Trace point at window s left edge X2 Trace point at the window s right edge ON Performs a channel power measurement OFF Cancels the channel power measurement Performs the average settings for the channel power measure ment Displays the Ch Avg menu Switches the averaging funct
243. l functionality The file is not compatible with this FUS version The TTL Trigger level is available only in EXTERNAL mode The Trigger level is available only in IF or VIDEO mode The Trigger slope is not available in FREE RUN mode The Trigger video is only available in zero span mode The ACP graph mode is ON Watt and Volt Units is not allowed The ACP graph mode is not allowed in multi context mode The Carrier Band Width is not available when Nyquist Filter is ON Please change to OFF Meas 1 gt gt Config gt Nyquist Filter The Carrier Band Width is not available in FULL mode screen Please change to CARR mode Meas 1 gt gt Mode The ACP Power Measure is executed on Trace A This trace is actually in blank mode Please change to Write mode Trace gt Refresh gt Write The ACP Channel definition table is empty The Carrier Band Width is not available when Nyquist Filter is ON Please change to OFF Meas 1 SEM gt Config gt Nyquist Filter The SEM table is empty Impossible to insert in the SEM table Overlapping Band 9 5 U3700 Series User s Guide 9 7 List of Error Messages Error code Displayed Message Pass Fail functionality not authorized Spectrum Emission Mask active The power measure is performed on a blank trace The OBW Power Measure is active The Power Measure environment is not valid Pleas
244. l this instrument receives a serial polling disable SPD message or an IFC message When this instrument is sending a service request SRQ message to the controller bit6 RQS bit of response data is set to 1 TRUE After transmission is completed RQS bit is set to 0 FALSE Ser vice request SRQ messages are directly sent through a signal line Device clear DCL When receiving DCL this instrument performs the following operations Clearing the input and output buffers Resetting the syntax analysis execution control and response data generation units Canceling all the commands that impede the remote command to be executed next Canceling any commands that are waiting for other parameters The following operations are not executed Changing data that is set or stored in this instrument Interrupting front panel operations Affecting or interrupting the operations of this instrument mid execution Changing status byte excluding is set to 0 as a result of clearing the output buffer Selected device clear SDC Performs the same operation as DCL However SDC is executed only when this instrument is a lis tener In other cases it is ignored Go to local GTL This message sets this instrument to the local state In the local state all front panel operations are enabled Local lockout LLO This message sets this instrument to the local lockout state When this instrument enters the
245. late 1 MARKer STEP 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer STEP Context index Fre quency Time Position Hz s Enable Marker Step Auto CALCulate 1 MARKer STEP AUTO 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer STEP AUTO Context index ON OFF 10 Set Signal Track Y Ranging Excursion CALCulate 1 MARKer TRCKing EXCursion 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer TRCKing EXCursion Context index Relative amplitude Relative amplitude Enable Signal Track Y Ranging CALCulate 1 MARKer TRCKing EXCursion S TATe 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer TRCKing EXCursion STATe Context index 10 Set Marker Readout Mode CALCulate 1 MARKer X READout 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer X READout Context index NORMal INVerse NORMINV Set Measuring Window Position 6 80 CALCulate 1 WINDow POSition 22 1 CALCulate 1 WINDow POSition Context index Frequency Time Position Hz s Function description Set Measuring Window Width SCPI command CALCulate 1 WINDow WIDTh 2 1 CALCulate 1 WINDow WIDTh U3700 Series User s Guide Parameter Context index Frequency Time 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply Position Hz s Remarks Insert a Limit Line Vertex CALCulate LLINe 1 DATA 22 CALCulate LLINe 1 DATA 2 Limit line index X coordinate of limit line point Time ordinate of limit line point Relative amplitude Insert a Frequency Domain Limit Li
246. lating the CN ratio The CN ratio can be obtained by calculating the values which are measured from the carrier C and noise N level measurements C a value in step 8 N a value in step 15 CN ratio C N 58 33 34 26 24 07 dB 4 56 4 4 6 03700 Series User s Guide 4 4 6 Television Signal Measurement Television Signal Measurement Japanese television channels are pre saved to 15 75 input option The table can be read using the Recall function and a measurement frequency can be set using the channel number Registered files and setting conditions 1 CATV CH CATV channel See A 6 1 2 VHF amp UHF CH VHF and UHF channels See A 6 2 3 BS IF CH BS IF channel See A 6 4 4 CS IF CH CS IF channel See A 6 5 5 Digital CH Terrestrial digital channel See A 6 3 6 Digital Noise Terrestrial digital noise measurement 7 Digital ChPower Terrestrial digital channel power measurement Recall the file and refer to the registered channel table The center frequency can be set using the channel number Change SPAN REF LEVEL and input attenuator settings according to the operating environment NOTE When the 6 Digital Noise file is recalled the input attenuator is set to 0 dB Be careful of the input signal level Example of recalling the 7 Digital ChPower file and measuring the Channel 28 power Procedure 1 Press FILE and Recall The Recall window is displayed 2 knob to se
247. le to an electrical outlet 4 Turnon AC power switch on the rear panel After turning on the AC power switch wait for three seconds or more 5 the power switch on the front panel MEMO The display may be different depending on the state of the instrument when the power was last turned off NOTE Before turning the power on remove the USB memory key Otherwise the system does not start Initializes the settings of this instrument 6 Press SHIFT and SYSTEM PRESET Initial setting conditions are loaded Frequency REF 0 00 dBm 1 10 0 dB center ICENTER 2000 GHz Stop Offset ON OFF 4 Frequency 5 CF Step Size AUTO MNL 6 Channel Input 100 t CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 8 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 80 ms ATT 10 dB Figure 4 8 Initial Setting Screen 03700 Series User s Guide 4 3 1 Calibration Selecting the input connector For the U3741 and U3751 only RF INPUTI can be used as the input connector No need to select the input connector For the U3771 and U3772 select the input to be performed the calibration Press SHIFT and RF1 RF INPUT1 is selected Press SHIFT and 0 RF INPUT2 is selected The calibration of either RF INPUT1 or RF INPUT2 can be performed first The following describes the procedure in which the calibration of RF INPUTI is performed first Connecting the input signal Connect the calibration signal 7
248. lect the 7 Digital ChPower dat file 75 2007 Feb 16 17 23 REF 108 75 1 10 0 dBi Save Recall Media Hash Memory Files File Info 7_Digital_ChPower dat File Name Modified Size Mode 07 2 16 16 067 1 07 2 16 16 067 1 aon 07 2 16 16 066 5 1725 7 07 2 15 15 05 6 5 KB 5 Digital CH dat 07 2 16 16 06 7 1 a Digital 07 2 16 16 067 1 Digital ChPower dat 07 2 16 16 06 7 1 KB Channel ACP Items Spurious Corr Factor Digital ChPower dat Recall Cancel Media CENTER 1 500 GHz SPAN 3 000 GHz RBW 1 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 60ms ATT 10 00 dB 4 57 03700 Series User s Guide 4 4 6 Television Signal Measurement 3 Press Hzor The 7_Digital_ChPower dat file 15 determined as a file to be recalled 4 Press Hz or W Select the Recall button 5 Press Hz The terrestrial digital broadcasting channel table and measurement conditions are recalled and set 6 Press FREQUENCY 2 8 and Hz The center frequency is set to 563 14 MHz that is for Channel 28 At the same time the channel power measurement starts and then the measure ment result is displayed 759 2007 Feb 16 17 21 Freauencv REF 80 00 DL 62 02 MKR 563 14 1 10 0 dB 36 22 Center g CENTER n 28 MHz Stop Offset OFF i 4 Frequency TF Step Size AUTO MNL 2 o um m CONSU OTIS
249. lied trace memory Calc Displays the Calc Mode menu The selected setting 15 displayed at the bottom of the menu Write Displays the waveform data acquired in the default settings Min Hold Displays the minimum value of points in each trace sample Max Hold Displays the maximum value of points in each trace sample Average Displays the Video Average menu The Video average performs averaging of the display data Average START STOP START Performs averaging STOP Cancels averaging Max Sweep Count Sets the number of times Video averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set Average PAUSE CONT PAUSE Pauses averaging and displays the current number of times averaging has been performed CONT Restarts averaging from the point in which averaging was paused Average ONCE SLIDE ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and repeats averaging continuously by using the last data Power Average Displays the Power Average menu Performs averaging of power W and draws waveforms Average START STOP START Performs averaging STOP Cancels averaging Max Sweep Count Sets the number of times Video averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set Average PAUSE CONT PAUSE Pauses averaging and displays the current number of times averaging has been performed CONT Restarts averaging from the point in which averaging was
250. lizes the channel table Clears all settings U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 13 FREQUENCY Formula 1 ON OFF Formula 2 ON OFF Formula 3 ON OFF Sets the mathematical formula used in the channel input mode This function is enabled when Freq Input Mode is set to CALC More 1 2 Displays the Frequency 2 2 menu Signal Identification ON OFF U3751 U3771 U3772 ON Turns on the Signal Identification function Image signals shift on the screen but the signals do not move in each sweep OFF Cancels the Signal Identification function Image Suppression ON OFF U3751 U3771 U3772 ON Turns on the Image Suppression function Detects image signals and deletes them from the display OFF Cancels the Image Suppression function 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 14 Span Full Span Zero Span Last Span Peak Zoom Auto Tune 5 2 14 SPAN Span Full Span Zero Span Last Span Peak Zoom Auto Tune Sets the frequency span The frequency range is displayed by the center frequency and fre quency span Sets the frequency span to full span SPAN 8 GHz Sets the zero span mode at the center frequency Returns the frequency span to the previous value Displays the marker at the highest peak in the targeted search range and sets the frequency ofthe marker to the center frequency Atthis time the frequency span is changed to 1 10 ofthe currently set value Searches the maximum signal level in the full
251. ls pack the instrument using the following procedure 1 Install the protection cover of the touch screen display on this instrument 2 Cover the instrument with a protective plastic sheet Put desiccant inside for protection from mois ture 3 Prepare a carton case The panels of the case must be 5 mm or more thick The inner dimensions must be 10 cm or more larger than the physical size of this instrument because cushioning materials are placed inside Place the instrument so that it is covered with cushioning or plastic foam material on all sides The cushioning material must be 4 cm or more thick 4 Seal the carton case with an industrial stapler or packing tape 9 6 Notes for Requesting Repair Replacement of Parts and Periodic Calibration 9 6 1 9 6 2 Work Request Attach a tag indicating the following data to this instrument when you send it to a sales representative Your company name and address Name of the person in charge Serial number on the rear panel What work to request repair or periodic calibration Destination and Phone Number for Contact Call Advantest MS Measuring Instruments Call Center 9 3 U3700 Series User s Guide 9 7 List of Error Messages 9 7 List of Error Messages This section describes error messages which are displayed because of function restrictions or errors in oper ation of this instrument Error code Displayed Message Some formula parameters are o
252. ls the saved setting conditions Saves the currently set conditions Displays the SEM Spectrum Emission Mask menu ON Performs a spectrum emission mask measurement OFF Terminates the spectrum emission mask measurement Displays the SEM Avg menu Switches the averaging function ON and OFF ON Measures the spectrum emission mask OFF Cancels the averaging function Sets the number of times averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then calculates the moving average On Trace A B C Selects a trace in which to execute the spectrum emission mask measurement Config Displays the SEM Cfg menu Carrier Bandwidth Sets the power conversion bandwidth for carrier signals Ref Power CHN PEAK Switches the calculation mode of the reference power between the Channel mode and the Peak Power mode Calculates the channel power and sets the result as the reference power for the mask measurement PEAK Sets the Peak power value of the waveform as the reference power for the mask measurement Ch Windows ON OFF ON Displays the SEM window OFF Hides the SEM window Show Mask ON OFF ON Displays the Mask line OFF Hides the Mask line Nyquist Filter ON OFF Switches the Nyquist filter function ON and OFF Symbol Rate Nyq Roll Off Factor Bands Definition Delete Band
253. m 3GPP DL Modulation Spectrum Analyzer 2 Channels Viewer 2 Channel ON OFF Spectrum RF1 Spectrum RF2 2 Channel Preset U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 2 APPLI 2 Channels Viewer P 2 Channel ON OFF Spectrum RF1 Spectrum RF2 2 Channel Preset Context RF2 RF1 Refer to the separate volume of the U3700 Series 50 User s Guide FOE 8440247 Displays the 2 Channel menu Functions only for the U3771 or U3772 Sets the 2 Channels Viewer mode The sweep and measurement are performed only for the active channel The active channel screen is enclosed within a red frame 2 Channel REF 0 00 dBm 1 2 Channel OFF 2 Spectrum RFI 3 Spectrum RF2 100 CENTER 21 500 GHz SPAN 43 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 430 ms 10 00 dB REF 0 00 dBm Context 100 CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 8 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 90 ms ATT 10 00 dB ON Splits the screen into an upper and lower windows Upper window INPUT2 Lower window INPUT1 OFF Cancels the dual screen display The measurement display returns to the active channel screen Cancels the 2 Channel mode and enables INPUTI Cancels the 2 Channel mode and enables INPUT2 Initializes the INPUTI and INPUT2 settings 5 17 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 3 FILE Context RF2 RF1 5 2 3 FILE Displays the File menu Save Save as File Control Recall Items Title Media Sa
254. m by using the data knob Rotating the data knob in the clockwise direction increases the reference level in steps of 0 1 dBm Rotate the data knob until the display of the active func tion display area shows 0 5 dBm Rotating the data knob in the counterclockwise direction decreases the refer ence level in steps of 0 1 dBm ACTIVE OFF Pressing the CLEAR key hides the active function display area Data cannot be entered if the active function display area is hidden To redisplay the active function display area press a panel key or soft key Menu layer Certain soft menus have W at the right end and the sub menu is displayed by pressing the soft key Certain soft menus such as ON OFF or AUTO MNL switch the setting by pressing the soft key Press MKR The following Marker menu is displayed 1 Select Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker Trace A B C 4 Delta Mode W 5 Peak Menu W 6 Clear AII 7 More 1 2 W Switching the setting If a menu includes a dual state button such as ON OFF or AUTO MNL the state can be switched by pressing the soft key The selected setting is displayed convexly The non selected setting 1s displayed concavely Example Press 2 Marker ON OFF The setting 1s turned OFF and the markers disappear Press 2 Marker ON OFF again to turn the setting ON and the markers re ap pear Sub menu display Pressing a soft key which has W to the right of the menu displays a sub menu Example Press 4 Delta Mo
255. marizes the information from the status register A summary of this status byte register is sent to the controller as a service request Therefore the status byte register operates slightly differently than the status register structure This section describes the status byte register The structure of the status byte register is shown in Figure 6 6 ars je eT Tr Te Figure 6 6 Structure of the Status Byte Register This status byte register follows the status register except for the following three points summary of the status byte register is written to bit6 of the status byte register Bit6 of the enable register is always valid and cannot be changed Bit6 MSS ofthe status byte register writes RQS of the service request 6 16 03700 Series User s Guide 6 5 3 Status Byte This register responds to the serial polling from the controller When the register responds to the serial polling 10 to bit5 bit7 and RQS of the status byte register are read and then RQS is reset to 0 No other bits are cleared until each factor is set to 0 The status byte register ROS and MSS can be cleared by executing CLS and S2 Consequently the SRQ is set to FALSE The meaning of each bit in the status byte register is shown below Functional definition Description A summary of the standard operation status register The summary bit of the entire status data structure RQS 15 set
256. mat 5 5 eere 6 12 Date Time x t rns tv Res 5 8 dB Conversion Formula A 13 5 62 dBc Hz ON OFF 5 36 ABM serrare a 5 62 dBm Hz ON OFF 5 36 dBmV u uy 5 62 dBHV Res 5 62 dBuV sqrt Hz ON OFF 5 36 dB Vemf esce 5 62 dBpW i4 eco tiere 5 62 DC Power Requirements 3 8 eere 5 7 Default Conditions 5 25 5 27 5 29 5 32 5 35 5 39 Delay sore nete dti 5 65 Delete tecto tree erre 5 62 Delete Band 5 26 5 35 Delete Channel 5 26 Delete Entry sss 5 47 5 52 5 69 Delete Line eese 5 57 Delta Mode 5 47 Delta 2 2 5 47 Delta Ref Line ON OFF 5 55 Delta to CF 5 54 Delta to CF 5 54 Delta to Mkr Step 5 54 Delta to Span 5 54 Destination and Phone Number for jour mE 9 3 Det Avg Mode RMS Video 5 43 Details of the three status registers 6 15 Detector 5 43 Detector AUTO MNL 5 43 Display E 6 33 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 1
257. me of the 1 Ref Level menu is displayed in red This red frame menu means that data can be entered 2 Dataentry If the set value is displayed in the active function display area it can be changed by using keypad step key or data knob Data entry by using the keypad Enter data by using the keypad decimal point key BK SP backspace key and minus key If any wrong numbers are entered by using the keypad use the BK SP to delete a character to the left and enter the correct number If no data is entered and BK SP 15 pressed minus is entered After entering data press the unit key ENTER to complete the entry If any other panel key is pressed before the unit key is pressed any entered data becomes invalid Example Set the reference level to 20 dBm by using the keypad Press 2 0 GHz dBM or 2 0 MHz dBM 4 10 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 2 1 Menu Operation and Data Entry Data entry by using the step key The step key enters data in the defined step size Pressing W decreases data and pressing increase data Example Set the reference level to 0 0 dBm by using the step key Press the step key The reference level is set to 10 0 dBm Press the step key again to set to 0 0 dBm Data entry by using the data knob The data knob enters data in the determined display resolution The data knob is available for the fine adjustment of the entry data Example Set the reference level to 0 5 dB
258. ment This section uses the following measurement examples to describes basic measurement procedures which will allow the user to become familiar with the operation of this instrument 431 Calibration 4 3 2 Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers 4 3 3 How to Cancel the UNCAL Message 4 3 4 Identifying an Image Signal 4 3 5 Hard Copy Output Calibration Correcting the measurement by using the calibration factor which is acquired from the calibration can increase the measurement accuracy Calibration items Total Gain Measuring the calibration signal of 20 dBm and acquiring the level difference Step ATT Minimizing the level error when switching STEP ATT at 20 MHz RBW Optimizing the RBW adjustment and minimizing the level error when switching RBW PBW Noise power bandwidth IMPORTANT Perform calibration after allowing a warm up time of 5 minutes or more Required equipment This instrument Conversion adaptor N m BNC f Conversion adaptor BNC f SMA m Input cable BNC m BNC m 4 13 03700 Series User s Guide 4 3 1 Calibration Turning on the power supply Initialization 4 14 1 Verify that the AC power switch the rear panel is set to OFF 2 Connect the included power cable to the AC power connector on the rear panel CAUTION To prevent damage do not supply a voltage and frequency which exceed the specified range to this instrument 3 Connect the power cab
259. minates Performs averaging for the set number of times and then calculates the moving average Selects a trace in which to execute the occupied bandwidth mea surement Sets the ratio of the occupied bandwidth power to the total power in percentage The initial value is 99 Displays the OBW Default menu Recalls the saved setting conditions Saves the currently set conditions Displays the ACP menu ON OFF Performs the adjacent channel leakage power measurement Cancels the adjacent channel leakage power measurement Switches the averaging function ON and OFF ON OFF Measures the adjacent channel leakage power Cancels the averaging function Sets the number of times averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set ONCE MUL Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates Performs averaging for the set number of times and then calculates the moving average 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Mode FULL CARR FULL Calculates the adjacent channel leakage power in relation to the reference power the measurement of which is taken from the full bandwidth on the screen CARR Calculates the adjacent channel leakage power to the reference power the measurement of which is taken from the bandwidth set in Carrier Bandwidth Config Displays the ACP Cfg menu Carrier Bandwidth Sets the measurement bandwidth of channel power measurement used
260. mm ss Example Set the date to January 1 2005 SETDATE 050101 Set the time to 10 10 SETTIME 101000 USB Memory Devices Whose Operation with this Instrument has Already Checked Manufacturer Model name BUFFALO RUF C128ML U2 RUF2 M128 256 1G RUF2 E2GL BL HAGIWARA HUD 128PJ IO DATA EasyDisk EDP 128 TB B128 TB ST2G K LEXAR JumpDrive 128MB SanDisk CruzerMini 128MB SDCZA 128 J65 SDCZ23 002G J65N ADTEC AD UMX128MSB GREEN HOUSE GH UFDI28PLZ ELECOM MF PU2128SV MF AU202GSV Princeton PFU 2JU 128 256 512 1G Transcend TS2GJF160 For 256 type operation with this instrument has also been checked NOTE The USB memory key with a security function cannot be used 4 29 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG OPT76 OPT77 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG OPT76 OPT77 Measures the characteristics of the bandpass filter whose pass band is located near the frequency of 1900 MHz Measuring the insertion loss and pass bandwidth of the filter Required equipment This instrument Conversion adaptor N m BNC f x2 Input cable BNC m BNC m Turning on the power supply IMPORTANT Use this instrument within the specified temperature range to perform accurate measurements Perform calibration after allowing a warm up time of 5 minutes or more 1 Verify that the AC power switch on the rear panel is set to OFF 2 Connec
261. n describes the step by step procedures in which the GPIB bus is controlled by the Visual Basic programs For operations such as initializing variables and defining function routines which depend on Visual Basic the notational rules for the Visual Basic program must be applied 6 9 1 1 Reading the GPIB Control Library for Visual Basic To control the GPIB board provided by NI Corp by using the program described in the Visual Basic lan guage the two files must be built into the Visual Basic Project Those two files are the VBIB 32 BAS file in which the GPIB communication interface for the Visual Basic language provided by the NI Corp is described and the NIGLOBAL BAS file in which errors and timeout values are defined 6 9 1 2 Program Examples Using VB Example Setting the center frequency after resetting this instrument Call ibdev 0 8 T10S 1 0 SPA Initialize Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa IP preset Call ibwrt spa CF 30MZ Sets the center frequency to 30 MHz Example2 Setting the start frequency to 300 kHz setting the stop frequency to 800 kHz and adding 50 kHz to the frequency offset Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa FA 300KZ Sets the start frequency to 300 kHz Call ibwrt spa 800KZ Sets the stop frequency to 800 kHz Call ibwrt spa FO 50KZ Adds 50 kHz to the frequency offset 6 54 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for G
262. n the current position Displays a normal marker to the right of and X dB lower than the current position Activates the X dB Level setting U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 7 MEAS 2 Display REL ABL ABR More 1 2 Continuous Down ON OFF Peak X dB Down Intermod Execute ON OFF Average Control Average START STOP Max Sweep Count Sets the display method of the X dB Down marker data REL Sets the marker to the delta marker mode when X dB Down is executed Displays a normal marker on the right and a delta marker on the left ABL Displays the left marker as an absolute value ABR Displays the right marker as an absolute value Displays the XdB 2 2 menu Switches the continuous X dB down function ON and OFF ON Repeats Peak X dB down in every sweep OFF Cancels the continuous X dB down function Performs the peak search in the search range and then executes X dB Down Displays the Intermod menu ON Performs the intermodulation measurement OFF Terminates the intermodulation measurement START Performs averaging STOP Cancels averaging Sets the number of times Video averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE On Trace A B C Max Order PAUSE Pauses averaging and displays the current number of times averaging has been performed CONT Restarts averaging from the point at which averaging was paused ONCE Performs averaging for the set number
263. nce Line ON OFF OFF Measuring Window OFF MKR OFF MEASI Channel Power Execute ON OFF OFF Total Power Execute ON OFF OFF Average Power Execute ON OFF OFF OBW Execute ON OFF OFF ACP Execute ON OFF OFF Spectrum Emission Execute ON OFF OFF Spurious Execute ON OFF OFF MEAS2 Noise Hz Execute ON OFF OFF XdB down XdB setting OFF Intermod Execute ON OFF OFF Harmonic Execute ON OFF OFF Frequency Counter Execute ON OFF OFF TRACE Refresh Mode setting Write Active Trace setting A Trace Detector Normal Normal Posi Nega Sample Average Calc Mode setting Write Detector Auto Manual Auto Detector Avg Mode RMS Video RMS SYSTEM Annotation ON OFF ON GPIB Address 8 LAN IP Address refer to 6 3 2 Color Pattern Colorl A 2 03700 Series User s Guide Initial Setting List Function Parameter Initial set value GPIB Address GPIB address of this instrument Freq Reference INT EXT Ext Reference Display Title setting 3 03700 Series User s Guide 2 Principle of Operation A 2 Principle of Operation This section describes a root Nyquist filter used for input saturation and ACP measurement based on the oper ating principle of this instrument A 2 1 Input Saturation When a large level signal is applied to this instrument measurement errors may become larger depending on the attenuator setting Input saturation may be suspected as a cause of this This section
264. ncy readout accuracy Marker readout x Freq reference accuracy SPAN x SPAN accuracy Residual FM Internal frequency reference stability Aging rate Temperature stability 2 x 1076 year 32 5 x 10 0 C to 50 C Marker frequency counter Resolution Accuracy RBW lt 100 kHz Signal level S N gt 50 dB SPAN lt 100 MHz 1 Hz to kHz Counter readout x Freq reference accuracy Residual FM 1LSB Frequency stability Residual FM When the internal frequency reference is used lt 60 Hz N p p 100 ms Frequency span Range Accuracy 0 5 kHz to Full 1 Signal purity When the internal frequency reference is used 85 20logN dBc Hz 10 kHz offset SPAN lt 200 kHz Resolution bandwidth RBW Range Accuracy 100 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence 12 Video bandwidth VBW Range 7 10 10 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence 03700 Series User s Guide 7 3 2 Sweep 7 3 2 Sweep Description Specifications Sweep Sweep time setting range Zero span Spectrum mode Sweep time accuracy 50 us to 1000 s 20 ms to 1000 s 2 Zero Span Sweep mode REPEAT SINGLE Trigger function Trigger source 7 3 3 Amplitude Free run Video IF External Description Specifications Amplitude measurement range RF Input 1 RF Input 2 Noise to 30 dBm Noise to 10 dBm Maximum safe input level RF Input 1 DC voltage RF Input 2 DC
265. nd Parser AT SCPI 6 1 03700 Series User s Guide 6 2 Remote Control System 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 GPIB Remote Control System The GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus that is compliant with IEEE standards 488 1 1978 and 488 2 1987 comes standard with this instrument so that remote control can be performed from the external control 1 following describes how to control this instrument using remote control function What is the GPIB The GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus is a high performance bus that integrates computers and mea suring instruments The GPIB operations are defined by IEEE standard 488 1 1978 Since the GPIB 15 a bus structure inter face the specific device can be identified by assigning a unique device address to each device Up to 15 devices can be connected to a bus in parallel A GPIB device includes at least one of the following func tions Talker A device that is specified to send data to the bus is called a talker Only one device operates as active talker on a GPIB bus Listener A device that 1s specified to receive data from the bus is called a listener Two or more active lis tener devices exist on a GPIB bus Controller A device that specifies talkers and listeners is called a controller On a GPIB bus only one device operates as an active controller Of these controllers a device that can control IFC and REN messages 15 called
266. nd cannot be used in the LAN remote control system 6 9 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 4 Message Exchanging Protocol 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 10 Message Exchanging Protocol This instrument receives program messages from the controller or other devices through the GPIB bus or LAN and generates a response Program messages include commands queries which are commands that ask for a response and data Buffers This instrument has two buffers 1 Input buffer This buffer temporarily stores data to analyze commands 1024 byte length The input buffer can be cleared by the following two methods Turning the power on Executing a DCL or SDC 2 Output buffer This buffer stores data until the data is read by the controller 1024 byte length The output buffer can be cleared by the following two methods Turning the power on Executing a DCL or SDC Message Exchange When other controllers or devices receive messages from this instrument the following items must be observed Generating a response in reply to a query Refer to Generating responses in the order queries are executed Refer to Generating response data Parser parser receives command messages from the input buffer in the order queries are received exe cutes syntax analysis and determines what operations are to be executed by the commands received Generating response data When the parser executes a q
267. ndex ON OFF 10 Set Trace Detector SENSe 1 DETector 2 FUNCtion 3 1 SENSe 1 DETector 2 FUNCtion Context index Trace index NORMal POSitive NEGative SAMPle AVERage NORM POS NEG SAMP AVER Set Center Frequency SENSe 1 FREQuency CENTer 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CENTer Context index Frequency Frequency Set Center Frequency Step SENSe 1 FREQuency CENTer STEP 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CENTer STEP Context index Frequency Frequency Enable Center Frequency Step Auto 6 94 SENSe 1 FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO Context index Function description Set Center Channel SCPI command SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel 2 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel CENTer Parameter Context index Channel number U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply Remarks Channel number Enable Setting Center Frequency as Channel SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel CENTer STATe 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel CENTer STATe Context index Enable Channel Formula SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel FORMula 2 STATe 23 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel FORMula 2 STATe Context index Integer ON OFF Enable Start Channel Frequency Offset SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STARt STATe 22 1
268. ne Vertex CALCulate LLINe 1 DATA FREQuency 22 Limit line index X coordinate of table point Frequency ordi nate of table point Relative amplitude Insert a Time Domain Limit Line Ver tex CALCulate LLINe 1 DATA TIME 22 Limit line index X coordinate of limit line point Time ordinate of limit line point Relative amplitude Erase a Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 DELete Limit line index Erase a Frequency Domain Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 DELete FREQuency Limit line index Erase a Time Domain Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 DELete TIME Limit line index Enable a Limit Line CALCulate LLINeZ1 DISPlay 22 1 CALCulate LLINe 1 DISPlay Limit line index ON OFF Set Limit Lines Detection Type CALCulate LLINe 1 TYPE 22 1 CALCulate LLINe 1 TY PE Limit line index UPPer LOWer UPP LOW Set Limit Lines X axis Reference CALCulate LLINe CMODe 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe FIXed RELative FIX REL Set Limit Lines X axis Reference CALCulate LLINe CMODe X 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe X ABSolute CENTer LEFT ABS CENT LEFT Set Limit Lines Frequency Offset CALCulate LLINe CMODe X OFFSet FREQuency 21 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe X OFFSet FREQuency Frequency Frequency Enable Limit Lines X axis Offset CALCulate LLINe CMODe X OFFSet STATe 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe X OFFSet STATe ON OFF S
269. nel STATe 21 ON OFF 1 DISPlay DUALchannel STATe Enable Normalize Correction DISPlay NTData STATe 2 Trace index 1 DISPlay NTData 1 STATe ON OFF Set Frequency Offset DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Context index Frequency X SCALe OFFSet 22 Frequency 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe OFFSet 6 85 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Enable Frequency Offset SCPI command DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe OFFSet STATe 22 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe OFFSet STATe Parameter Context index Query reply Remarks Set Display Line Amplitude DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y DLINe 02 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y DLINe Context index Amplitude Amplitude Enable Display Line DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y DLINe STATe 22 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y DLINe STATe Context index Set Reference Line Amplitude DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe YE SCALe NRLevel 22 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe NRLevel Context index Amplitude Amplitude Enable Reference Line DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe YESCALe NRLevel STATe 2 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe NRLevel STATe Context index Select Active Context DISPlay WINDow ACTive 1 1 DISPlay WINDow ACTive TOP BOTtom TOP BOT Enable Annotation Display DISPlay WINDow A
270. ng brominated flame retardants Used WBL FUSZFRONT E BEB 032400 BEG 032413 BEG 032415 BPG 032410 BPG 032411 BPG 032412 BPB 032890 BPG 032405 BPG 032409 BPG 033493 BPG 034304 BPG 034495 BPG 034498 BEG 036043 Connectors inductors tantalum capacitors diodes transistors semiconductor packages Asbestos waste and components which contain asbestos Not used Cathode ray tubes Not used Chlorofluorocarbons CFC Hydro chlorofluorocarbons HCFC Hydrof luorocarbons or Hydrocarbons HC Not used Gas discharge lamps 9 10 LCD monitor Fluorescent tube Substance Component Liquid crystal displays of a surface greater than 100 square centimeters and all those back lighted with gas discharge lamps Location LCD monitor U3700 Series User s Guide 9 9 Product Disposal and Recycle Parts and material Liquid crystal displays External electric cables WBL U3751 F WBL U377X F Power cable WBL U3751 F WBL U377X F Signal cable Components containing refractory ceramic fibers Not used Components containing radioactive substances Not used Electrolyte capacitors containing sub stances of concern height gt 25 mm diameter gt 25 mm or proportionately similar volume Not used Cadmium and Cadmium compounds BPC 032551 Variable resistor electric contact Antimony and Antimony compounds WBL FUS FRONT E BEB 0
271. nput ofthe U3751 U3771 and U3772 Values in parenthesis are set for the U3741 Function FREQUENCY Parameter Center Freq setting Initial set value 4 GHz 1 5 GHz Start Freq setting 0 Hz Stop Freq setting 8 GHz 3 GHz Freq Offset setting 0 Hz Freq Offset ON OFF Off CF Step Size setting Manual 0 8 GHz 0 3 GHz CF Step Size Auto Manual Auto Channel Input OFF Span setting 8 GHz Ref Level setting 0 dBm LOG LIN selection LOG dB div setting 10 dB div Unit setting dBm ATT Auto Manual Auto ATT setting Manual 10 dB Min ATT setting 10 dB Min ATT ON OFF OFF High Sensitivity ON OFF OFF Ref Offset setting 0 00 dB Ref Offset ON OFF OFF Slide Screen OFF RBW setting Manual 3 MHz 1 MHz RBW Auto Manual Auto VBW setting Manual 3 MHz 1 MHz VBW ON OFF VBW RBW ratio VBW RBW ratio Auto Manual SPAN RBW ratio 03700 Series User s Guide Initial Setting List Function Parameter Initial set value SPAN RBW ratio ON OFF OFF Sweep Time setting Manual 90 ms 60 ms Sweep Time Auto Manual Auto EXT CFG Sweep Mode SGL CNT CNT Trigger Source Free Run Limit Lines OFF Display Line ON OFF OFF Refere
272. nput3 CHCALCI Integer Formulas EEEE Integer CHCALC2 Frequency Frequency ok Integer CHCALC3 ok Formula 1 for Type 1 CHCONI 0 OFF 1 ON Formula 2 for Type 1 CHCON2 CHCON2 0 OFF 1 ON Formula 3 for Type 1 CHCON3 CHCON3 0 OFF 1 ON Channel Type 2 Input CHTIN Integer Frequency Channel Type 2 Deletion CHTDEL Signal Ident SIGID SIGID 0 OFF 1 Image Suppress IMGSP IMGSP 0 OFF 1 ON Auto Tune TN Peak Zoom PKZOOM 6 25 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 2 Level 6 8 2 Level Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Reference Level Level RL Level Attenuation DB Integer AT DB Integer Min Attenuation DB Integer ATMIN DB Integer Zero Attenuation Sm 5 Attenuation Auto ON OFF 2 0 OFF manual 1 ON auto XdB Div DB Discr Val 10 5 2 0 10dB 2 1 0 5 dB 1 54 2 2dB 3 1 dB 4 0 5 1 others Linear x 1 Vertical Scale VS LINILOG Level Offset RO DB RO ON OFF 0 OFF 1 ON Hi Sens HS ON IOFF 0 OFF 1 ON Input OHM Integer Integer Discr Val 50 75 Display Unit Level Unit AUNITS DBMI DBMV DBUV 0 DBM DBEMF DBPW 1 DBMV W ATT V OLT 2 DBUV 3 DBEMF 4 DBPW 5 WATT 6 VOLT Correction Factor ON 0 OFF OFF 1
273. nter ith 6 12 UNIS TT 5 62 5 63 6 53 6 106 User Password 5 8 5 12 Using a Battery 3 6 Using Normalize Function Level Correction Table 4 37 V VBW AUTO MNL nr 5 72 VBW RBW ON OFF 5 72 5 73 Version 5 7 5 9 Vertical Scale LIN LOG 5 62 5 63 VHE UHER Lu a uuu A 29 Mn 5 65 5 66 aR 5 43 5 44 TER 5 62 5 63 Volume ceres eerte t Pietre 5 37 5 42 VSWR Measurement 4 59 VSWR ON OFF eere 5 55 5 56 W Watts tette nite eee e ic ded 5 62 5 63 I 7 03700 Series User s Guide Alphabetical Index W CDMA Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement 4 45 W CDMA Channel Power Measurement 2 2 4 43 White and Black 5 8 tnb AE 5 25 Window HIDE SHOW 5 65 Window Position 5 25 5 47 5 51 5 66 5 69 Window Sweep ON OFF 5 65 Window Width 5 25 5 47 5 51 5 66 5 69 Work Request 9 3 Witte Gawa roten eter 5 43 Write Protect 5 8 5 18 X X 5 65
274. nu ON OFF Contig Driver Selects either color or gray scale in the Print Config mode Displays or hides the soft menu when a file is printed ON Displays the menu OFF Hides the menu Selects a printer driver to be used The Printer Driver Management window 15 displayed Printer Driver Management Driver files Manufacturer EPSON epson pxv500 Model PX V500 00 1800 epson r200 Recommended 500 Last used 500 lt 500 Test driver Default Driver files Printer drivers registered in this instrument are listed Select a driver name to be used by using the knob Your choice The selected driver name is displayed Test driver Starts a test printing using the selected driver Default This instrument automatically selects a driver 5 15 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM Use it Decides to use the selected driver Self Test Displays the Self Test menu Execute Self Test Executes the self test The self test is the same as when the power turns on Test Items 1 Supply Voltage Memory CPU Registers RF Registers RF PLL LOCK LO Registers LO PLL LOCK AIF Registers AIF PLL LOCK 10 TG Registers 11 Temperature Factory Init Initializes this instrument to the factory settings Refer to A 1 Initial Setting List APPLI Displays the APPLI menu APPLI Spectrum Analyzer
275. nverted into 5 6 MHz Bandwidth Procedure 9 Press Execute ON OFF OFF The channel power measurement is canceled 4 54 03700 Series User s Guide 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting 10 Press CPL RBW AUTO MNL 1 0 0 kHz VBW AUTO MNL 1 and kHz The RBW is set to 100 kHz and the VBW is set to 1 kHz 11 Press MKR and then press to move the marker into a noise area 12 Press TRACE Calc Power Average Start Stop Start Max Sweep Count 3 0 and Hz Enter The Max Sweep Count is set to 30 750 REF 68 75 MKR 561 14 10 0 dB 17 00 SWEEP COUNT 30 68 7 CENTER 557 14 MHz SLIDE 30 30 SPAN 10 00 MHz SWP 130 ms 13 Press MEAS 2 Noise Hz 5 6 and MHz 750 REF 68 75 MKR 561 14 MHz 10 0 dB 16 66 NOISE HZ a MHz i CENTER 557 14 MHz SLIDE 30 30 SPAN 10 00 MHz SWP 130 ms 14 Press dBuV Sqrt Hz ON OFF ON The measurement begins Power Av 9 Average START STOP 2 Sweep Count 3 Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE Noise Hz 1 Noise x Hz 3 dBm 7 ON 4 dBpV sqrt Hz ON 5 dBc Hz OFF OFF Hz OFF 4 55 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting 15 The measurement result is displayed in the Noise Marker 1 window N 34 26 dBuV Figure 4 22 Calcu
276. o allow easier measurement ofthe input sig nal 2 Press FREQUENCY 1 9 0 0 and MHz The center frequency is set to 1900 MHz 3 Press SPAN 2 0 0 and MHz The frequency span is set to 200 kHz 4 Press AMPLITUDE dB div and 2dB div The level display scale is set to 2 dB div 5 Press TG TG Level 5 and MHz dBm The output level of the tracking generator is set to 5 dBm 6 Press TG ON OFF to turn on the TG output U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG OPT76 OPT77 REF 0 00 dBm 20 dB OFF _ 5 00 dBm lz TG Level 3 TG Level Offset ON 4 TG Freq ON 5 Normalize 7 Reference 20 ua Line CENTER 1 3000 GHz 200 0 MHz am RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 Performing the normalization MEMO The frequency response errors of accessories used in the measurement such as cables and adapters can be removed by performing the normalization and the accurate measurement can be performed 1 Press Normalize The TG Normz menu is displayed 2 Press Reference Line ON OFF 5 and MHz dBm The Reference Line position at which the normalization is performed is set to 5 dB 3 Press Capture Normz Data The normalization data is acquired based on the set Reference Line position 4 Press Normalize Correction ON OFF The normalization is performed CAUTION If the settings
277. or 1 6 10 3 13 Function description Read ACP results OUTPut STATe 1 OUTPut STATe Subsystem READ SCPI command 1 2 3 4 5 READ ACPower Parameter Query reply number of rows flower channel frequency Frequency lower channel amplitude Amplitude upper channel frequency Frequency upper channel amplitude Amplitude Remarks Read ACP Reference Power 1 READ ACPower RPOWer Amplitude Read Average Power Measurement 1 READ AVPower Amplitude Read the Channel Power 1 READ CHPower Amplitude Read the Power Spectral Density for Channel Power Measurement 1 READ CHPower DENSity Power per Herz Read Harmonics Results 6 92 1 2 3 4 5 READ HARMon ics number of rows marker index Integer frequency Frequency amplitude Amplitude amplitude difference Relative amplitude 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Read the Intermodulation Results 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 number of rows Lower array READ IM Frequency Marker Index Integer Lower Frequency Marker Number Integer Lower Frequency Distortion Amplitude Amplitude Upper Frequency Marker Index Integer Upper Frequency Marker Number Integer Upper Frequency Distortion Amplitude Amplitude Intermod ulation Product Ampli
278. ormalize Data Trace n lt n gt RX Normalize Correction Trace n A B C lt n gt NORM ON OFF lt n gt NORM Normalize Execute Active Trace AR Delta Reference Line TGDLTRLN ON OFF TGDLTRLN 0 OFF 1 ON VSWR ON OFF VSWRON ON OFF VSWRON 0 OFF 1 ON VSWR Measurement Value VSWR Real VSWR Return Loss Value 6 52 VSWRLOSS DB Real 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 24 Units 6 8 24 Units Function E see IEEE Std 488 2 1992 page 89 DBMV DBUV DBEMF DBPW W WATT MW V VOLT MV Microvolt UV Nanovolt NV Second SC Millisecond MS MSEC Microsecond US USEC Nanosecond NSEC PER PPM 6 53 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 Example of Remote Control Programs 69 Example of Remote Control Programs This chapter describes examples of programs which control the instrument by remote The example programs in this chapter use the Microsoft Corp Visual Basic language If programming in another language the example programs must be described in that language The explanation of the programs here assumes that the GPIB board provided by the National Instruments Corp hereafter referred to as the NI Corp is used as a GPIB controller 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control This sectio
279. p 9 kHz to 3 GHz 10 MHz to 3 GHz Frequency readout accuracy t Marker readout x Freq reference accuracy SPAN x SPAN accuracy Residual FM Internal frequency reference stability Aging rate Temperature stability 32 x 10 9 year 32 5 x 106 0 C to 50 Marker frequency counter Resolution Accuracy RBW 100 kHz Signal level S N gt 50 dB SPAN 100 MHz 1 Hz to kHz t Counter readout x Freq reference accuracy Residual FM ILSB Frequency stability Residual FM When the internal frequency reference is used lt 60 Hz p p 100 ms Frequency span Range 0 5 kHz to Full Accuracy t 1 Signal purity 85 dBc Hz 10 kHz offset SPAN 200 kHz When the internal frequency reference is used Resolution bandwidth RBW Range 100 Hz to 1 MHz 1 3 sequence Accuracy 12 Video bandwidth VBW Range 10 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence 7 2 03700 Series User s Guide 7 1 2 Sweep 7 1 2 Sweep Description Specifications Sweep Sweep time setting range Zero span Spectrum mode Sweep time accuracy 50 us to 1000 s 20 ms to 1000 s 2 Zero Span Sweep mode CONTINUOUS SINGLE GATE Trigger function Trigger source 7 1 3 Amplitude Free run Video IF External Description Specifications Amplitude measurement range 30 dBm to displayed average noise level Maximum safe input level Average continuous power DC voltage 30
280. p Delta to CF Step Mkr to Mkr Step Delta to Mkr Step Couple to Win OFF IN OUT Window Position Window Width Couple to DL OFF ABV BLW Display Line ON OFF Couple to Line 1 OFF ABV BLW Couple to Line 2 OFF ABV BLW Edit Limit Lines yh Limit Line 1 2 Delete Entry Insert Entry Table Init 03700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List TG Option ON OFF Level Level Offset ON OFF TG Freq Offset ON OFF Normalize Capture Normz Data Reference Line ON OFF Normalize Correction ON OFF Trace A B C VSWR ON OFF Delta Ref Line ON OFF Reference Line ON OFF FREQUENCY FREQUENCY Center Start Stop Frequency Offset ON OFF CF Step Size AUTO MNL Channel Input Freq Input Mode CALC TABLE Center CH Start CH ON OFF Stop CH ON OFF U3751 U3771 U3772 T N Start CH Offset ON OFF Signal Mp ON OFF Stop CH Offset ON OFF Image Suppression ON OFF Channels Config gt Edit Channel Formula Edit Channel Table P Formula 1 ON OFF Formula 2 ON OFF L Formula 3 ON OFF Insert Line Delete Line Table Init A 23 U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List SPAN Span Full Span Zero Span Last Span Peak Zoom Auto Tune AMPLITUDE AMPLITUDE Ref Level ATT dB div A 24 Vertical Scale LIN LOG Units Slide Screen ON OFF More
281. p stops Displays the Trigger menu Displays the Trig Source menu Repeats the sweep automatically Synchronizes the sweep with the video signal and then starts the sweep Synchronizes the sweep with the external trigger signal EXT ter minal and then starts the sweep Synchronizes the sweep with the IF signal and then starts the sweep Sets the trigger signal for the external trigger signal Sets the trigger level for the Video or IF trigger Switches the trigger slope polarity This setting is enabled only when the video trigger external trig ger or IF trigger is used NEG Starts the sweep at the falling edge of a trigger POS Starts the sweep at the rising edge of a trigger Sets the delay time from a trigger point Gated Sweep Gated Sweep ON OFF Source Slope NEG POS Gate Delay Gate Width input signal tl U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options Displays the Gated Sweep menu Switches the gated sweep ON and OFF ON Sweep is executed according to the currently set gate conditions gate position and width OFF Turns the gated sweep mode off Displays the Gate Source menu External Performs sweep synchronizing with the external trigger signal IF Performs sweep synchronizing with the IF signal Switches the trigger slope polarity NEG The sweep starts at the falling edge of a trigger signal POS The sweep starts at the rising edge of a trigg
282. ples Fur p 4 37 441 Using Normalize Function and Level Correction Table 4 37 4 4 2 W CDMA Channel Power Measurement 4 43 4 4 3 W CDMA Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement 4 45 4 4 4 W CDMA Spurious Measurement 4 48 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting 4 51 4 4 6 Television Signal Measurement 4 57 4 4 7 VSWR Measurement u Mas ota Erunt m 4 59 5 MENU MAP FUNCTIONAL EXPLANATION _ 5 1 5 1 Men MGS uuu m 5 1 5 2 Functional Descriptions n sassa 5 7 5 2 1 SYSTEM 5 7 5 2 2 APPLET su a anne eae eer ae ee 5 17 5 2 3 FILE 2 rere 5 18 5 2 4 ccc ee 5 24 5 2 5 HELP M NUN 5 24 5 2 6 MEAS Uae eree E 5 25 5 2 7 MEAS 2 2a sieves aes amu 5 36 5 2 8 TRACE ee Men AE EA NE NE ee QUEM ME 5 43 5 2 9 MER 5 47 5 2 10 PE 5 50 5 2 11 MEER T
283. power switch wait for three seconds or more 5 the power switch on the front panel MEMO The display may be different depending on the state of the instrument when the power was last turned off Initialization Initialize the settings of this instrument 6 Press SHIFT and S YSTEM PRESET Initial setting conditions are loaded 4 17 03700 Series User s Guide 4 3 2 Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers Connecting the input signal Connecting the calibration signal 7 Attach the N m BNC f adaptor to the INPUT connector on the front panel Connect the included BNC m BNC m input cable to the CAL OUT connector on the front panel and the N m BNC f adaptor ADNANTINT 03771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER 9 Figure 4 11 Connecting CAL Signal Setting measurement conditions Setting the measurement conditions to observe the input signal more easily After initialization the center frequency can be set 8 Press3 0 and MHz The center frequency 15 set to 30 MHz 4 18 10 11 12 03700 Series User s Guide 4 3 2 Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers Frequency REF 0 00 dBm 1 10 0 dB
284. pression ON OFF Zo L CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 8 000 GHz SWP 40 ms 10 dB ON Frequency 272 REF 0 00 dBm MKR 6 760 GHz 1 Signal 10 0 dB 6 22 dBm Identification CENTER _ 4 000 GHz l 4 Image Suppression ON OFF ttt 100 CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 8 000 GHz SWP 40 ms ATT 10d IS is displayed at the bottom right of the screen when the Image Suppression function is set to ON White font Indicates that the calculation process of Image Suppression is correctly performed Red font Indicates that the calculation process of Image Suppression is being performed or the calculation results are indefinite For example when the center frequency is changed or the frequency of the input signal changes 4 25 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 4 Identifying an Image Signal Signal Identification function The frequencies of Image signals are shifted and displayed in each sweep The displayed frequencies of real signals do not change Press FREQUENCY More1 2 and Signal Identification ON OFF Marker REF 0 00 dBm Marker 100 CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 1 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz ATT 10 dB Real signal Image signal i Marker REF 0 00 dBm 10 0 dB 9 Marker 100 CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 1 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz ATT 10 dB 4 26 03700 Series User s Guide 4 3 5 Hard Copy Output 4 3 5 Hard Copy Out
285. pture Hormz Data 3 Normalize Correction Delta Line OFF 7 Reference T Line SPAH 500 0 MHz ON OFF RBW 3 MHz ATT 10 00 dB 3 Connect the DUT to the TEST port of the SWR bridge Press VSWR ON OFF ON A return loss and VSWR at the marker point are displayed 2007 Jun 14 19 22 TG Nonnz REF 0 00 dBm MKA 2 4210 GHz 1 Capture Normz Data 3 Normalize Correction 100 T 2 4130 GHz SPAN 500 0 MHz RBW 3 MHz ATT 10 00 dB VSWR Ref Line On OFF 7 Reference Return Loss 24 42 dB Line VSWR 1 13 ON OFF 4 60 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 MENU MAP FUNCTIONAL EXPLANATION S MENU MAP FUNCTIONAL EXPLANATION This chapter describes the configurations and functions of the soft keys displayed on the touch screen Menu Index This section can be used to refer to the keys in this chapter Menu Map This section shows the menu configurations of the panel keys Functional Descriptions This section describes the functions of the panel keys and soft keys 51 Menu Index Operation Key Pages Operation Key Pages Meas ON OFF 5 37 5 40 Average ONCE SLIDE 5 25 5 26 OBW IS 5 25 5 30 5 27 5 28 0 5 dB div 5 62 5 63 5 29 5 30 1 dB dIV asserere 5 62 5 63 5 32 5 36 1 Delta Mkr ON OFF 5 47 5 48 5 38 5 40 10 dB div uera A SSS 5 6
286. purious Power Measure mode limit Lines are OFF Please activiate at least one line The active measure is not allowed in this context mode The measure has been switched off 9 4 Error code U3700 Series User s Guide 9 7 List of Error Messages Displayed Message This functionality is not allowed on Graphical Zoom Mode Please change the context mode Ext Cfg gt Zoom amp Context This functionality is not allowed on multi context Mode Please change the context mode Ext Cfg gt Zoom amp Context gt Reset Context The Frequency Reference INT mode is not available with crystal option The crystal option 15 required Not available in Zoom F F mode Not available in Zoom T T mode Not available in F T mode Ext config Not available in T T mode Ext config The trace subtract result should be in Write mode Please change it operandl operand 2 result Trace gt Refresh gt Write The second operand trace should not be in Blank mode Please change it operandl operand 2 gt result The first operand trace should not be in Blank mode Please change it operandl operand 2 gt result The table selected for the spurious measure is empty Please fill the table Impossible to change the Fundamental Frequency Please change to Funda mental mode ON Meas2 gt Harmonics gt Fundamental Impossible to execute recal
287. put 4 3 5 1 Output to Printer Printer connection Output to a printer When using a printer which is used for the first time 1 2 3 Turn off the power of the printer and this instrument and connect the printer to the USB connector on the front or rear panels of this instrument Turn on the power of the printer Turn on the power of this instrument Anytime after the second time the printer is used the printer can be connected to this instrument even if the power of this instrument is turned on Specify the printer as the output device in COPY Config SYSTEM More1 2 Copy Config SHIFT COPY Select PRT printer from the Copy Device menu Press the COPY key or Copy in the Copy menu to start printing Printers whose operation has been checked Manufacturer Model name Epson PM 900C PM 760C PM 740C PM 2200C PM G720 500 HP HP5650 HP6122 Deskjet5740 Deskjet6840 Photosmart7830 Canon 1P4200 MEMO The printing time can be reduced by performing the following 1 Start copying during a sweep stop 2 Use White and Black for Color Pattern 4 27 03700 Series User s Guide 4 3 5 Hard Output 4 3 5 2 File Output to USB Memory Connecting a USB memory device 1 Connect memory device to a USB port on the front or rear panels of this instru ment 2 Press SYSTEM 1 2 Copy Config Screen Shot Config and Media A dialog box is displayed Select
288. r supply voltage range 90 V 132 V 198 V 264 V Frequency range 47 Hz 63 Hz Power consumption 100 VA or less Automatically switches the input voltage between 100 V AC and 200 V AC WARNING Make sure the power supply which is supplied to this instrument satisfies the power requirements If the power requirements are not satisfied this instrument may be damaged 3 4 03700 Series User s Guide 3 3 1 Using the AC Power Supply 3 3 1 2 Connecting the Power Cable This instrument includes a three core power cable with a grounding conductor To prevent accidents caused by electric shocks use the included power cable and securely connect to the ground through a three pin power outlet 1 Check that the included power cable is not damaged WARNING Never use a damaged power cable You may receive an electrical shock 2 Connect the AC power connector on the rear panel of this instrument to a three pin power outlet that has a protected ground terminal by using the included power cable See Figure 3 2 AC power connector Figure 3 2 Connecting the Power Cable WARNING Use a suitable power cable for the power supply voltage Use a power cable that complies with the safety standards in your country Refer to Safety Summary To prevent any danger of electrical shock connect the power cable to a three pin power outlet that is con nected to a protect
289. r to EOI only Call ibwrt Spa TBA Requests Trace A in binary data Call ibrdi Spa tr 1001 2 Reads 1001 points of binary data For i 0 To 1000 Step 1 Repeats the operation for 1001 points res res Str tr i 6 vbCrLf Displays the data on the screen DoEvents Next i RichTextBoxl Text res Call ibwrt Spa DLIMO Sets the delimiter to the CR LF and EOI Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 1 6 67 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control 6 68 Example 5 FORM3 Reading the memory data in binary 32 bit floating point Dim tr 1000 As Single Allocates an array in the buffer for 1001 points 32 bit floating point type Dim i As Integer Dim res As String Dim tra 4 As Byte Variable which swaps the high order byte and low order byte Dim tran As Byte Variable which swaps the high order byte and low order byte Dim tmp As Single Variable which stores converted data Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt Spa FORM3 Switches to FORM3 Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 0 Sets the GPIB board software so that the end bit of each Ibsta variable is set to 1 only when EOI has been received Call ibwrt Spa DLIM2 Sets a delimiter to EOI only Call ibwrt Spa TBA Requests Trace A in binary data Call ibrd32 Spa tr 0 1001 4 Reads 1001 points of binary data 4 for four bytes For i 0 To 1000 Step 1
290. ration Report CALibration RBW 1 CALibration RBW Status Execute Full Calibration 6 84 CALibration ALL 1 CALibration ALL RFC1 RFC2 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 3 Subsystem CONFigure Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Get the Current Measurement 1 CONFigure CHP HARMIIM OBW SEM SPUR TOTP XDB DBMH DBUH DBCH SG AM FM Enable ACP Measurement CONFigure ACPower Enable Power Average Measurement CONFigure AV Power Enable Channel Power Measurement CONFigure CHPower Enable Harmonics Measurement CONFigure HARMonics Enable Intermodulation Measurement CONFigure IM Disable All Measurements CONFigure NORMal Enable Occupied Band Width Measure CONFigure OBW ment Enable Spectrum Emission Mask Measure CONFigure SEMask ment Enable Spurious Measurement CONFigure SPURious Enable Total Power Measurement CONFigure TOTPower 6 10 3 4 Subsystem COUPle Enable Auto Coupling COUPIe 91 ALL NONE ALL NONE 1 COUPIe 6 10 3 5 Subsystem DISPlay Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Set Title DISPlay ANNotation TITLe DATA 21 String String 1 DISPlay ANNota tion TITLe DATA Preset Dual Channel Viewer DISPlay DUAL channel PRESet Enable Channel Viewer Mode DISPlay DUALchan
291. remote state from this state all front panel operations are disabled In the ordinary remote state front panel operation can be performed by pressing the LOCAL key In this case this instrument can be set to the local state by any of the following two methods Setting the REN message to FALSE The local lockout state is also canceled Turning off and turning on the power 6 5 03700 Series User s Guide 6 3 LAN Remote Control System 6 3 LAN Remote Control System The LAN Local Area Network interface that is compliant with IEEE standard 802 3 15 included as standard with this instrument so that this instrument can be controlled remotely through socket communication by the external controller The controlling method using the LAN remote control function is described below 6 3 1 Setting up the LAN 1 LAN connection The standard LAN setup is shown below To allow communication through the LAN between an ex ternal controller and this instrument or other devices connect them with IOBASE T LAN cable and RJ45 connectors To directly connect this instrument and an external controller with a LAN cable use a LAN cable cross over cable and connect as shown in Table 6 2 To connect this instrument and other devices excluding an external controller with a LAN use an external device designed to con nect devices that has two or more LAN interfaces such as an Ethernet hub The LAN cable used in this case 15 connected as shown in
292. rename protected file 1 Cannot replace protected file 1 Cannot open file 1 File 1 Unknown data format 9 6 Error code U3700 Series User s Guide 9 7 List of Error Messages Displayed Message File 1 Corrupted Data File 1 Incompatible Version Cannot access media File not saved Not enough space on media XML files cannot be saved on the analyzer memory Please select another media Cannot create file Format media failed No printer detected No driver available for this printer The last power measure mode has been turned off The selected button already exist The user menu is full Incorrect password Quit spurious results before Quit table edition before Cannot format flash memory The tracking generator option is required No DHCP server found Please ensure ethernet cable is connected and ver ify DHCP server configuration NO PEAK FOUND NO MIN PEAK FOUND NO PEAK FOUND IM NO PEAK FOUND Parameter out of range Nyquist data must be changed Integration bandwidth out of range Parameter out of range Parameter out of range the SPAN must be reduced The Channel table is empty ACP parameter out of range Parameter out of range Please set the span to a value greater than 1 B 1 T Parameter out of range Please change span
293. requency Correction values between points where correction values are set are obtained by using a method of linear interpolation The correction value of the last correction point is applied to frequencies following to the last correction point frequency Correction Correction OFF 5459558949554 894959525449495452994455245499525229 FL Fu 4 42 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 2 W CDMA Channel Power Measurement 4 4 2 W CDMA Channel Power Measurement This section describes a measurement example of the W CDMA signal by using the MEASI function The maximum input level of this instrument 30 dBm 50 VDC U3741 30 dBm 15 VDC U3751 U3771 U3772 RF2 10 dBm 25 VDC U3771 U3772 CAUTION 1 When measuring signal power that exceeds the maximum input level connect an external attenuator to ensure that the input level does not exceed it A band rejection filter may be required depending on the standard When turning the power on do not connect a DUT to this instrument Before turning the power off disconnect the DUT from this instrument The W CDMA mobile station signal whose frequency is 1952 4 MHz and level is 24 dBm is measured b yas 30 p Attenuator amp Setting measurement conditions 1 Press FREQUENCY 1 9 5 2 4 and MHz
294. rgument Format Code Output Format Limit Line 2 Time LMTBINT Time Level as Domain Data Input Limit Line 2 Frequency LMTBDELF E Domain Data Erase Limit Line 2 Time LMTBDELT e Domain Data Erase Limit Line 1 Pass Range LARNG ABOVE BELOW LARNG 0 ABOVE 1 BELOW Limit Line 2 Pass Range LBRNG ABOVE BELOW LBRNG 0 ABOVE 1 BELOW 6 8 8 Display Function Display Line Level Command EXE SET Query GET Code DLN DLN ON DLN OFF Argument Format Code DLN Output Format Level DLNON 0 OFF 1 ON Reference Line Level RLN RLN ON RLN OFF RLN Level RLNON 0 OFF 1 ON Window Center Position WLX Frequency Time WLX Frequency Time Window Width WDX Frequency Time WDX Frequency Time Window Sweep WDOSWP ON OFF WDOSWP 0 OFF 1 ON Zoom MLTSCR 7 MLTSCR 0 OFF 1 ZM 2 FT 3 4 DUAL VIEWER Zoom Position ZMPOS Frequency Time ZMPOS Frequency Time Zoom Width ZMWID Frequency Time ZMWID Frequency Time Frequency Pos FTPOS Frequency FTPOS Frequency Select Active Context CTXTSEL Integer 0 1 SCRSEL 0 1 6 33 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 9 Marker Function 2 Channels Viewer Command EXE SET
295. ring the carrier level C Setting this instrument Measurement mode Channel power measurement function Center frequency Center frequency in the channel SPAN 10 MHz RBW 30 kHz VBW 300 kHz Measurement bandwidth 5 6 MHz Channel power bandwidth 750 REF 68 75 DL 58 33 dBpV 10 0 dB 7 WIN WIDTH 5 60 MHz 5 O E BE CENTER 557 14 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHz SWP 20 ms Channel Power Channel Power 58 33 Power Spectral Density 117Z 5U Figure 4 21 Measurement Display for Channel Power Procedure Example for 27 channels 1 Press FREQUENCY 5 5 7 1 4 2 8 5 7 and MHz Channel P Execute Average Control On Trace A 5 Channel Position 6 Channel Width 7 Default Conditions The center frequency is set to 557 142857 MHz 2 Press SPAN 1 0 and MHz The frequency span is set to 10 MHz 4 52 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting 3 Press AMPLITUDE and then press W to adjust a signal peak on the third scale from the top 750 REF 68 75 10 0 dB 68 75 31 3 1 CENTER 557 14 MHz RBW 100 kHz SPAN 10 00 MHz VBW 100 kHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 dB Level 1 Ref Level ATT 9 dB div 10 0 dBi 4 vertical Scale 4 Press CPL RBW AUTO MNL 3 0 kHz VBW AUTO MNL 3 0 0 and kHz The RBW is set to 30 kHz and the VBW is set to 300 kHz 5 Press MEASI and Channel
296. rs should be stacked on one device If four or more GPIB connectors are stacked the joints of the connectors may break because excessive force is applied to them For example a system consisting of five devices can use cables of up to 10 m 2 m device x 5 devices 10 m length Cable lengths can be allocated freely unless the total cable length exceeds the permitted maximum length If 10 or more devices are connected however some devices should be connected with cables less than 2 m so that the total cable length does not exceed 20 m 2 GPIB address setting GPIB addresses should be set by pressing the System key and selecting GPIB Address 6 3 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 2 3 GPIB Bus Functions 6 2 3 GPIB Bus Functions 6 2 3 1 GPIB Interface Functions Table 6 1 GPIB Interface Functions Description Source handshake function Accepter handshake function Basic talker function serial polling function listener specified talker cancel function No extended talker function Basic listener function talker specified listener cancel function No extended listener function Service request function Remote function local function local lockout function No parallel polling function Device clear function Device trigger function No device trigger function No system controller function Using the open collector bus driver 6 2 3 2 Responses to Interface Messages
297. rtable network graphics or BMP bit map as the file format Sets the automatic incremental function of the file number ON Increments the file number when the screen data is copied OFF The COPYxxx BMP PNG is overwritten Sets the start number to increment automatically U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM 5 14 Menu ON OFF Hides the soft menu area when a copy is output ON Displays the menu OFF Hides the menu LL il CENTER 20 000 MHz SPAN 2 000 MHz RBW 30 kHz VBW 30 kHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 dB File Control Displays the Shot File menu Displays the Files window Media USB Device 0 Partition 0 8 5 MB Free 237 7 MB Preview File Name 000 001 4 002 4 copy003 pnq 003 4 Rename File Changes the selected filename Remove File Deletes the selected file Write Protect ON OFF Write protects the selected file ON Prevents data from being written to the file OFF Allows data to be written to the file Media Print Config Paper Format U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 SYSTEM Selects the media on which to save data Selects the external USB memory device in the dialog box Copy Files Media Free Size 0 USB Device 121 7 MB122 1 MB NOTE Data cannot be saved in the internal memory Selects the paper size and print direction Color Mode Color Gray Me
298. rument CHAPTER 8 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES This chapter describes options and accessories which are sold separately CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE This chapter describes how to care for this instrument such as cleaning calibration and storage to maintain the high performance and smooth functioning of this instrument Also this chapter describes how to identify problems and the relevant procedures to follow APPENDIX This chapter describes the following information Initial Setting List Principles of measurement Technical terms used in this manual Menu Map List 1 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 1 2 Product Overview 1 2 1 3 1 2 Product Overview The U3700 series spectrum analyzers are compact lightweight and portable The U3700 series spectrum analyzers are ideal for use in the field because they operate on battery and can be used anywhere The main features of this instrument are as follows Wide frequency measurement range 03741 9 kHz 3 GHz U3751 9 kHz 8 GHz U3771 9 kHz 31 8 GHz U3772 9 kHz 43 GHz High speed and high accuracy sweep Frequency span accuracy 196 or less 20 ms sweep time Extremely low noise level 135 dBm 5 GHz typical value built in preamplifier ON 120 dBm 40 GHz typical value High measurement level accuracy 0 8 dB Frequency range 10 MHz 3 1 GHz 1 0 dB Frequency range 3 1 GHz 8 GHz 3 way power supply system AC DC an
299. s the result is Pass Abs and Rel Compares the waveform with both the Limit Abs Start Limit Abs Stop values and the Limit Rel Start Limit Rel Stop values If both conditions are satisfied Pass 1s displayed Abs or Rel Compares the waveform with both the Limit Abs Start Limit Abs Stop values and the Limit Rel Start Limit Rel Stop values If either of the conditions 15 satisfied Pass is displayed 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Limit Abs Start Sets the absolute mask value at the position of the start frequency Limit Abs Stop Sets the absolute mask value at the position of the stop frequency mask value at a position between the start and stop frequencies 15 calculated by using the linear interpolation Limit Rel Start Sets the relative mask value at the position of the start frequency Limit Rel Stop Default Conditions Restore Defaults Save Defaults Spurious Execute ON OFF On Trace A B C Bands Definition 5 34 The set mask value is used to compare with the offset value from the measured reference power Sets the relative mask value at the position of the stop frequency A mask value at a position between the start and stop frequencies 15 calculated by using the linear interpolation Displays the SEM Default menu Recalls the saved setting conditions Saves the currently set conditions Displays the Spurious menu ON Performs the spurious measurement OFF Terminates the spur
300. s Guide 4 4 3 W CDMA Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement 4 4 3 W CDMA Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement A signal of 2100 MHz output from the W CDMA transmitter is measured Z En ee ES S mane Ve DUT e Attenuator e amog Examples of measurement specifications Channel space Specified bandwidth 5MHz 3 84 MHz 45 dB 10 MHz 3 84 MHz 50 dB CS Channel space BS Specified bandwidth Setting measurement conditions 1 Press FREQUENCY 2 1 0 0 and MHz The center frequency is set to 2100 MHz 2 Press SPAN 2 5 and MHz The frequency span is set to 25 MHz 4 45 03700 Series User s Guide 4 4 3 W CDMA Adjacent Channel Leakage Power Measurement CAUTION Set the frequency span according to the following conditions For Nyquist Filter OFF SPAN gt 2 CS BS For Nyquist Filter ON SPAN gt 2 CS 1 Roll Off Factor Symbol Rate 3 Press AMPLITUDE More 1 2 Ref Offset ON OF F ON 3 0 and GHz A value of 30 dB which is the attenuation of the external attenuator is added to a level reading value 4 Press MEASI and ACP The ACP menu is displayed Setting the CS BS table 5 Press Channel Definition The CS BS table is displayed The
301. s User s Guide 7 3 6 Input and Output 7 3 6 Input and Output Description Specifications RF input 1 Connector Impedance VSWR RF input 2 Connector Impedance VSWR Type N f on the front panel 50 O nom lt 1 71 lt 3 0 GHz 40 Input attenuator gt 10 dB lt 2 0 1 gt 3 0 GHz Bandl Input attenuator gt 10 dB Type K f on the front panel 50 O nom 1 7 1 typ 40 Input attenuator gt 10 dB 2 0 1 typ Bandl Band2 Band3 Input attenuator gt 10 dB 2 5 1 typ Band4 Input attenuator gt 10 dB Calibration signal output Connector Impedance Frequency Level BNC f on the front panel 50 O nom 20 MHz 20 dBm External trigger input Connector Impedance Trigger level BNC f on the rear panel 10 nom DC coupling 0Vto5V Frequency reference input Connector Impedance Frequency MHz Amplitude BNC f on the rear panel 50 O nom 1 1 544 2 048 5 10 12 8 13 13 824 14 4 15 36 15 4 16 8 19 2 19 44 19 6608 19 68 19 8 20 26 0 dBm to 16 dBm 21 4 MHz IF output Connector Impedance Output level BNC f on the rear panel 50 O nom Approximately mixer input level 10 dB at 20 MHz center fre quency Battery mount Connector Antonbauer QR mount External DC input Connector Voltage range XLR 4 11 Vto17V 488 bus connector USBI 1 on the front and rear panels RJ45 on the rear panel 1
302. s averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set Average ONCE SLIDE ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then calculates the moving average On Trace A B C Selects a trace in which to perform the total power measurement Default Conditions Displays the Pow Default menu Restore Defaults Recalls the saved setting conditions Save Defaults Saves the currently set conditions Average Power Execute ON OFF Average Control Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE On Trace A B C Window Range FULL WIN Window Position Window Width Default Conditions Restore Defaults Save Defaults U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Measures the average power in the measuring range Displays the Average P menu The average power can be obtained by using the following equation P n 2 10106 5 10 irl Pava Average power to be obtained P n Displayed data at each trace point dBm 1 2 1001 Performs average power measurement OFF Cancels the average power measurement Performs the average settings for the average power measure ment Displays the Av P Avg menu Switches the averaging function ON and OFF ON Measures the average power OFF Cancels the averaging function Sets the number of times averaging is perform
303. s limit line 2 OFF Hides limit line 2 Sets the judgment condition for limit line 2 ABV Sets the range above limit line 2 as the PASS condition BLW Sets the range below limit line 2 as the PASS condition Displays the PF Config menu Sets the attributes of the horizontal axis data of the limit line ABS Sets the horizontal axis position according to the absolute value of the limit line set in Limit Line Edit The horizontal axis position of the limit line moves according to changes in the frequency span and center frequency setting CF Sets the reference position to the center of the horizontal axis FA Sets the reference position to the leftmost point on the horizontal axis ON Sets the offset frequency from the reference position The limit line display is shifted by the frequency offset OFF Cancels the shift of the limit line Sets the attributes of the vertical axis level data of the limit line ABS Sets the vertical axis position according to the absolute value of the limit line set in Limit Line Edit The vertical axis position of the limit line moves according to the change of the level setting REF Sets the reference level as the reference position DL Sets the display line as the reference position Shift Y ON OFF Display Line ON OFF Limit Line Edit Limit Line 1 2 Delete Entry Insert Entry Table Init Ref Disp Lines Display Line ON OFF Reference Line ON OFF Zoom and Contexts Grap
304. s which are saved in XML format can be read easily but the settings cannot be recalled Formats external USB memory devices Do not remove the memory device while the memory is being for matted Recall tings and trace data Displays the Recall window Execute Recall in the same mode as when the file was saved Mode 15 displayed in File Info of the Recall window The font color is green for a Recall enabled file and red for a Recall dis abled file Media USB Device 0 Partition 0 Files File Hame fus01 dat fus02 dat fus03 dat fus04 dat U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 3 FILE Recalls file which was saved in binary format and displays the set Green Recall can be executed Red Recall cannot be executed 134 1 Free 245 7 File Info fus03 dat Mode v ON Setup Traces Context Traces Context B Limit Lines Channel ACP SEM Spurious Corr Factor Iz NI ME 503 Items Setup Selects items to be saved Displays the Items dialog box Items Traces Context A Traces Context B Limit Lines Channel ACP SEM Spurious Corr Factor Normalize Context Setup Recall Cancel Saves the setting conditions Trace Context A A B C Saves the trace data Even if the Write mode is set the setting is changed to the View mode while the trace data is recalled 5 21 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 3 FILE Trace Context B A B Limit
305. sary Spurious Response Spurious responses that mean any non measured signal are classified according to their characteristics Second Harmonic Distortion This is the distortion caused by the non linearity of a spectrum analyzer especial ly generated in the mixer when an ideal and undistorted signal is input to the spec trum analyzer This performance determines spectrum analyzer s capability of measuring harmonic distortion see Figure A 7 Third Order Distortion The third order distortion is caused by the non linearity of a spectrum analyzer when two signals with different frequencies fl and f2 are input and two signals of 2f1 f2 and 2f2 fi are generated near the input signals The amplitude of these sig nals depends on the mixer input level see Figure A 7 The maximum value is specified Image Multiple Out of band responses In addition to the two types of spurious signals described above a spurious called non harmonic spurious is generated at particular frequencies by the spectrum analyzer There are three types of responses in the non harmonic spurious the im age multiple and out of band responses 10 Fundamental 20 2 30 harmonics Distortion 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 Display level dB 60 40 20 O 420 40 Input level dBm Figure A 7 Spurious Response Zero Span The spectrum analyzer sweeps the
306. scribes how to configure this instrument Version Annotations ON OFF Frequency Reference Frequency Reference INT EXT XTL Remote Control Ref Freq Trace Points 501 1001 Ref Freq 10 MHz Calibration More 1 2 L gt U3751 U3771 U3772 GPIB Address LAN IP Address R3162 Mode ON OFF Parser AT SCPI U3741 GPIB Address LAN IP Address R3131 Mode ON OFF _ Parser AT SCPI L gt Calibrate ALL Each Item gt Total Gain RF Path 1 Report HIDE SHOW Total Gain RF Path 2 Calibration Int Ref Step ATT CAL Calibration Corrections ON OFF RBW CAL Frequency Correction ON OFF PBW Coarse Fine U3751 U3771 U3772 Store L Default Y a 5 7 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM 5 8 Color Pattern User Password Date Time Copy Config Self Test Factory Colori Color2 Black and White White and Black Edit Date Time Format Show ON OFF Copy Copy Device FILE PRT Screen Shot Config gt Print Config Execute Self Test File Format PNG BMP Auto Inc ON OFF Auto Inc Index Menu ON OFF File Control Rename File Media Remove File Write Protect ON OFF Paper Format Color Mode Color Gray Menu ON OFF Config Driver Version Annotations ON OFF Frequency Reference U3700 S
307. scription Specifications Frequency span Range Accuracy 0 1 kHz to Full 1 Signal purity When the internal frequency reference is used 98 dBc Hz 10 kHz offset SPAN lt 1 MHz Resolution bandwidth RBW Range Accuracy 30 Hz to 1 MHz 1 3 sequence 12 7 19 03700 Series User s Guide 7 5 6 Option 70 High C N Dynamic Range Displayed average noise level Frequency range gt 10 MHz Ref level lt 45 dBm RBW 30 Hz 126 dBm 2 f GHz dB f lt 2 5 GHz Preamp Off 126 dBm 2 5 f GHz dB f gt 2 5 GHz Preamp Off 141 dBm 3 f GHz dB Preamp On 2 3751 Frequency Description Specifications Frequency span Range 0 1 KHz to Full Accuracy t 1 Signal purity 98 dBc Hz 10 kHz offset SPAN 1 MHz When the internal frequency reference 15 used Resolution bandwidth RBW Range 30 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence Accuracy 12 Dynamic Range Description Specifications Displayed average noise level Frequency range gt 10 MHz Ref level lt 45 dBm RBW 30 Hz 126 dBm 2 f GHz dB BandO Preamp Off 125 dBm 1 f GHz dB Preamp Off 141 dBm 3 f GHz dB 40 Preamp 142 dBm 1 3 f GHz dB Bandli Preamp 3 U3771 U3772 Frequency Description Specifications Frequency span Range 0 1 KHz to Full Accuracy t 1 Signal purity 98 20logN dBc Hz 10 kHz offset SPAN lt 1 MHz When the internal frequency re
308. se Mode Query 0 OFF 1 dBm Hz 2 dBuV VHz 3 dBc Hz Noise Value NIRES Level X dB Down Level MKBW X dB Down X dB Down Left X dB Down Right X dB Relative X dB Absolute Left X dB Absolute Right DCO DC1 DC2 0 Relative 1 Absolute Left 2 Absolute Right Continuous dB Down CDB ON OFF 0 OFF 1 ON Peak X dB Down PSXDB IM Measurement Mode IMM ON OFF IMM 0 OFF 1 ON IM Reference Frequency IMMREF Frequency Level IM Delta Frequency IMMDF Delta Frequency IM Distortion Signal Data Readout IMMRES n lt DLM gt LLI1 LJ1 UJ1 lt DLM gt 1 IM Order Setting IMODR Integer 3 5 7 9 IMODR Integer 3 5 7 9 IM Criteria Input 3rd Order IMLS3 DB IMLS3 DB IM Criteria Input 5th Order 6 38 IMLS5 DB IMLS5 DB Function Command EXE SET U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 12 Measurement Query GET Code Argument Format Code IM Criteria Input 7th Order IMLS7 IMLS7 Output Format IM Criteria Input 9th Order IMLS9 DB IMLS9 IM Pass Fail Judgement IMPFC ON OFF IMPFC IM Save Setup IMSAVE IM Restore Setup IMLOAD Harmonics Measurement HARM ON OFF HARMON 0 OFF 1 ON Harmonics Results HARM n lt DLM gt Freq1 Levell
309. sed on the trace mode MNL Sets the detection mode manually RMS Selects RMS power average Video Selects Video Trace average Displays the Math menu Displays the Subtract menu The selected setting is displayed at the bottom of the menu Does not perform the trace calculation When trace A is set to the Write mode the data in memory B is subtracted from the data acquired in the sweep and the result is entered into memory A When trace A is set to the Write mode the data acquired in the sweep is subtracted from the data in memory B and the result is entered into memory A When trace B is set to the Write mode the data in memory A is subtracted from the data acquired in the sweep and the result is entered into memory B U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 8 TRACE gt Display Line ON OFF More 1 2 OFF gt B A gt C A DL gt A B DL9B Display Line ON OFF Store gt When trace is set to Write mode data acquired sweep is subtracted from the data in memory and the result is entered into memory B ON Displays and activates the display line OFF Cancels the display line Displays the Subtract 2 2 menu Does not perform the trace calculation When trace 15 set to the Write mode the data in memory B is subtracted from the data acquired in sweep and the r
310. ses to zero when 75 option 15 is included Input cable 75 Table 3 2 Option Accessories Quantity A01045 OPT76 OPT77 N m BNC f adaptor JUG 201A U C15 type adapter NCP NFJ NC BNC adapter BA A165 Table 3 3 10 Accessories N m BNC f adaptor JUG 201A U 3 2 U3700 Series User s Guide 32 32 1 3 2 Locating This Instrument Locating This Instrument This section describes the installation environment in which this instrument runs successfully Operating Environment Install this instrument in an environment in which the following conditions are satisfied Ambient temperature 0 C to 50 C operating temperature 20 C to 60 C storage temperature Relative humidity 85 percent or less with no condensation An area free from corrosive gas An area away from direct sunlight A dust free area An area free from vibrations A low noise area Although this instrument has been designed to withstand a certain amount of noise from the AC power line it should be used in a low noise area Use a noise cut filter if ambient noise is unavoidable An area in which the airflow 15 not obstructed There is an exhaust cooling fan and exhaust vents on both sides of this instrument Do not obstruct the fan and vents If there is insufficient airflow around the vents the internal temperature will rise and the instrument may operate incorrectly K
311. set so that all channels are included in it REF 0 00 dBm MKR 2 11000 GHz 10 0 dB 75 95 dBm 3 Ch Windows 5 Nyquist 100 H Filter CENTER 2 10000 GHz SPAN 25 00 MHz RBW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz ATT 10 00 dB ON OFF Adjacent Channel Power 5 Nyq Symbol Ref Power 0 89 dBm 814 24 pw Rate Lower Upper Marker Power Marker Power 7 Nyq Roll Off 1 51 15 dB 2 51 88 dB Factor 3 64 71 dB 4 64 66 dB 4 47 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 4 W CDMA Spurious Measurement 4 4 4 4 48 W CDMA Spurious Measurement The spurious response is measured in frequency bands higher than 30 MHz ID IL F amp C JE 11 BUR HES esp Se jp Attenuator p aum D e gt 90 GIB O Examples of measurement specifications Frequency range Spurious level 9 kHz 150 kHz 150 kHz 30 MHz 30 MHz 1 GHz 1 GHz 12 75 GHz Ina frequency range from 1 8935 GHz to 1 9196 GHz and the 300 kHz RBW the spurious level is 41 dBm or less Setting measurement conditions 1 Press TRACE Detector and Posi Detector is set to Posi to perform the spurious measurement 2 Press MEASI Spurious and Bands Definition
312. soft menu 8 Select Calibrate ALL on the next soft menu It takes approximately two minutes to complete the autocalibration 9 Check that no error message is displayed at the end of the calibration MEMO If any error message is displayed refer to 9 MAINTENANCE Turning off the power supply 10 Press the power switch on the front panel The power supply and the power light turn off 3 12 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 4 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS This chapter describes the functions of each part on the panels and screen and describes the basic operations of this instrument by using measurement examples 4 1 Panel and Screen Descriptions This section describes the names and functions of each part on the front panel screen and rear panel 4 1 1 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Front Panel This section describes the names and functions of each part on the front panel AEMANTEMT 1 3771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER CLEAR 1 1 O 2 9 mee 4 Cad LE 1 9 J w 711 Lg CREE Figure4 1 Front Panel 1 POWER switch with lamp 2 Extended function ke
313. sured signal Corresponds the cursor at the counter position with the marker position If the marker position moved then the counter position also moved OFF Cancels the function Displays the Cnt Res menu Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 1 kHz Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 100 Hz Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 10 Hz Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 1 Hz Displays the Meas2 2 2 menu Switches ON and OFF the modulation factor measurement ON Acquires an AM modulation factor and modulation frequency by using the peak search function and displays a calculation result in percentage OFF Cancels the AM function FM Meas Sound Execute ON OFF U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 7 MEAS 2 Displays the FM Meas menu Switches ON and OFF the frequency deviation measurement function ON Measures the frequency deviation of an FM signal OFF Cancels the frequency deviation measurement function of an FM signal A value of Peak Delta Y is used as a condition of performing the peak search If setting the Mod Freq to Sweep Time ON OFF menu to ON and setting a modulation frequency in advance a optimum sweep time is automatically set based on the modulation frequency and the number of display points If OFF 15 set for the Mod Freq to Sweep Time ON OFF menu a sufficient sweep time must be set according to the following for mula SWP gt P
314. t RichTextBoxl Text amp Freq Level amp CFLEV amp vbCrLf Display data on the screen and start a new line DoEvents Executes any other events in Windows Next I 6 9 1 8 Program Examples Using the LAN Example 1 Connection LAN Interface Public Sub ConnectTCP Dim Ini as String tcpClient RemoteHost 192 168 1 1 Sets IP Address of SA tcpClient Protocol sckTCPProtocol Sets protocol to TCP tcpClient RemotePort 5025 Sets port no 5025 of tcpClient Connect Connects to SA s port Do While tcpClient BytesReceived 0 Waits connection DoEvents Loop tcpClient GetData Ini ErrRet SendDtFunc REN amp vbLf Remote enable End Sub Example2 Initialize Spectrum Analyzer Public Sub InitSA tcpClient SendData CLS amp vbLf Resets status register tcpClient SendData RST amp vbLf Resets this instrument End Sub 6 72 Example 3 Example 4 Example 5 Example 6 Example 7 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Brief setting of Spectrum Analyzer Set Center freq to 1 9984 GHz Span to 10 MHz and Reference level to 10 dBm Public Sub SASetting tcpClient SendData CF 1 9984GZ amp vbLf tcpClient SendData SP 10MZ amp vbLf tcpClient SendData RL 10DB amp vbLf End Sub Read the setting value of Spectrum Analyzer Public Sub ReadSASetting CF Spaces 20 Prepares the text variable for read tcpClient Send
315. t index Time 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence DELay Time Set External Trigger Level V TRIGger 1 SEQuence EXTernal Context index Amplitude LEVel 22 Amplitude 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence EXTernal LEVel Set External Trigger Slope TRIGger 1 SEQuence EXTernal 1 Context index NEG POS SLOPe 2 NEGative 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence EXTernal 1 POSitive SLOPe Set IF Trigger Level TRIGger 1 SEQuence IF LEVel 22 Context index Amplitude 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence IF LEVel Amplitude Set IF Trigger Slope TRIGger 1 SEQuence IF SLOPe 22 Context index NEG POS 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence IF SLOPe NEGative POSitive Set Trigger Source TRIGger 1 SEQuence SOURce 22 Context index IMMIIF VIDIEXT 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence SOURce IMMediate IF VIDeo EXT Set Video Trigger Level TRIGger 1 SEQuence VIDeo Context index Amplitude LEVel 22 Amplitude 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence VIDeo LEVel Set Video Trigger Slope TRIGger 1 SEQuence VIDeo Context index NEG POS SLOPe 22 NEGative 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence VIDeo POSitive SLOPe 6 10 3 19 Subsystem UNIT Set Amplitude Units UNITZ1 POWer 22 Context index DBM DBMV 1 UNITZ1 POWer DBM DBMV DBUV DBUE DBUV DBUE DBPW V W DBPW V W 6 105 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 20 6 106 Units Function Code microVolt nano Volt Watt
316. t the included power cable to the AC power connector on the rear panel CAUTION To prevent damage do not supply a voltage and frequency which exceed the specified range to this instrument 3 Connect the power cable to an electrical outlet 4 Turn on the AC power switch on the rear panel After turning on the AC power switch wait for three seconds or more 5 Turn on the power switch on the front panel MEMO The display may be different depending on the state of the instrument when the power was last turned off Initialization Initialize the settings of this instrument 6 Press SHIFT and SYSTEM PRESET Initial setting conditions are loaded 7 Regarding U3771 and U3772 press SHIFT and RF1 to select RF INPUT1 4 30 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG 76 77 Connecting the cable 1 Attach the N m BNC f adapters to the RF INPUTI connector and the TG OUTPUT connector on the front panel and then connect the BNC m BNC m cable to both connectors 03771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER D Figure 4 19 Connecting the TG Mesurement Setting the measurement conditions t
317. ta marker at the same position as a normal marker The relative values of frequency and level to the normal marker are displayed in the marker area OFF Hides the delta marker Sets the reference in the delta marker mode Selects the reference marker Selects the reference line Switches the fixed marker function ON and OFF ON Maintains the frequency and level of the delta marker OFF Cancels the fixed marker function Switches the inverse number display function for the delta marker value ON and OFF ON Displays a frequency value on the time axis and a time value on the frequency axis OFF Cancels the inverse number display function Displays the Peak menu Does not move the marker Refer to 5 2 10 PEAK Clears all markers The marker display position is set at the center of the screen default value Displays the Marker 2 2 menu Hides all markers except for the active marker Clears all markers except for the active marker Switches the list display of enabled markers ON and OFF ON Displays a list of frequencies and levels in order of marker number OFF Hides the display of marker list Switches the step size between auto and manual settings when the marker is moved by the step key AUTO Sets the marker step size to 1 10 of the frequency span MNL Sets the step size manually 03700 Series User s Guide Mode Index Value Signal Track Signal Track ON OFF Y Range ON OFF 5 2 9
318. table below The delimiter positioned at the end of data can be specified from 5 types refer to Others in the GPIB code 150 Once set xx command continues to operate until it is changed Output Format E DD CR LF 1 T 7 1 2 3 4 maximum size of data 1 2 315 19 bytes long and unit is Hz ExampleSpecify CF and output as center frequency D DDDDDDD E DD CR LF t t T 1 2 3 4 maximum size of data 1 2 3 is 19 bytes long and unit depends on setting of each UNIT ExampleSpecify ML and output as the marker level D DDD CRLF T T t T 1 2 3 4 The maximum size of data 1 2 3 is 19 bytes and the unit is sec ExampleSpecify SW and the output sweep time DDDD ii 2 4 The maximum size of the data in bytes corresponds to the maximum size of the output data ExampleThe ON OFF status or Averaging count is output Supplement 1 Sign a space for plus sign for minus sign 2 Mantissa of data 3 Exponent of data 4 Delimiter CR LF in initial setting can be changed with DLn code 6 57 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control 6 58 Example 1 Example 2 Reading and displaying the marker level Dim sep As Integer Call ibclr spa Performs a device clear Call ibwrt spa CF 30MZ Sets the parameter Call ibwrt spa SP 1MZ
319. te Time Copy Config Self Test Factory Init Colori Color2 Black and White White and Black Edit Date Time Format Show ON OFF Device FILE PRT Screen Shot Config Print Config Execute Self Test U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List File Format PNG BMP Auto Inc ON OFF Auto Inc Index Menu ON OFF File Control gt Rename File Media Remove File Write Protect ON OFF Paper Format Color Mode Color Gray Menu ON OFF Config Driver U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List APPLI APPLI Spectrum Analyzer 2 Channels Viewer 9 2 Channel ON OFF 3GPP DL Modulation Spectrum RF1 Spectrum RF2 2 Channel Preset Context RF2 RF1 Refer 03700 Series OPT50 User s Guide FOE 8440247 FILE Save Save as File Control Rename File Recall Remove File Items Copy to Flash Title Copy AII to USB Media Write Protect ON OFF L More 1 2 Auto name Radix Auto name Index File Format BINXML Format Media 1 Spurious 1 Channel Power gt Total Power Average Power y D p OBW ACP Spectrum Emission Channel Power Total Power b Average Power
320. ter frequency and fre quency span Sets the start frequency The frequency range is displayed by the start frequency and stop frequency Sets the stop frequency The frequency range is displayed by the start frequency and stop frequency Switches the frequency offset function ON and OFF ON Sets the offset value and changes only the display ofthe frequency by the offset value Displayed value of frequency Set value Offset value OFF Cancels the offset function Switches the step size between auto and manual settings when the center frequency is changed by the step key AUTO Automatically sets the step size to 1 10 of the span width MNL Sets the step size manually 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 13 FREQUENCY Channel Input Displays the Channel menu Uses the channel code instead of the frequency for the frequency setting Freq Input Mode CALC TABLE Center CH ON OFF Start CH ON OFF Stop CH ON OFF Start CH Offset ON OFF Stop CH Offset ON OFF Channels Config Selects the channel input format CALC Acquires a frequency from a channel number by using the mathematical formula TABLE Acquires a frequency from a look up table which corresponds to a channel number Sets the center frequency input mode to the channel ON Sets the channel code input mode OFF Sets the frequency input mode Sets the start frequency input mode to the channel ON Sets the channel code input mode OFF
321. tes the harmonic measurement function OFF Terminates the harmonic measurement function START Performs averaging STOP Cancels averaging Sets the number of times Video averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 7 MEAS 2 Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE On Trace A B C Harmonic Max Order Fundamental ON OFF Frequency Counter Execute ON OFF Counter Position Link to Marker ON OFF Resolution Resolution 1 kHz Resolution 100 Hz Resolution 10 Hz Resolution 1 Hz More 1 2 99 AM Meas ON OFF PAUSE Pauses averaging and displays the current number of times averaging has been performed CONT Restarts averaging from the point at which averaging was paused ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and repeats averaging continuously by using the last data Selects a trace in which to execute the harmonic measurement Sets the measuring harmonic order The measuring order can be set from 1 to 10 The default value is 3 ON Sets the fundamental frequency The measuring span is set in the range that includes the fundamental and set harmonic order frequencies OFF Sets the current center frequency to the fundamental frequency Displays the Counter menu ON Sets a frequency counter mode OFF Cancels the frequency counter mode Adjusts a cursor on the mea
322. the system controller Only one system controller is permitted on a GPIB bus If there are two or more controllers on a bus the system controller becomes the active controller at the time of system startup and the other devices with controller capability act as addressable devices To set another controller as the active controller use Take Control TCT interface messages At this time this controller becomes a non active controller The controller controls the entire system by sending interface or device messages to each measuring instrument The roles of these messages are shown below Interface message Controls the GPIB bus Device message Controls the measuring instruments 03700 Series User s Guide 6 2 2 Setting up the GPIB 6 2 2 Setting up the GPIB 1 GPIB connection The standard GPIB connection is shown below Secure the GPIB connector with two screws GPIB Connectors Figure 6 1 GPIB Connection Note the following when using the GPIB interface Connect the GPIB cable to the GP IB 1 connector on the rear panel of this instrument The total cable length of the GPIB cable used in one bus system should not be longer than 2 m x the number of connected devices the GPIB controller is counted as one device The total cable length should be 20 m or less Up to 15 devices can be connected to one bus system There is no restriction in how cables are connected However no more than three GPIB connecto
323. the Instrument Min ATT Mkr Step AUTO MNL MET IG iter ro e eee 5 69 5 68 5 39 5 68 5 68 5 68 5 68 5 40 5 48 5 48 5 45 5 44 5 45 5 38 5 26 5 28 5 30 5 36 5 39 5 44 5 67 5 15 5 23 5 73 5 14 5 44 5 50 5 50 5 48 03700 Series User s Guide Alphabetical Index Mkr to CF Step 2 20 5 54 Operating Environment 3 3 Mkr to Mkr Step 5 54 Option 10 2 Channel Input Option Mkr to Ref inse renes 5 54 Can be Installed only in the 03741 7 16 MER Z tees err eee 5 54 Option 15 75 W Input 7 17 Mod Freq to Sweep Time ON OFF 5 37 5 41 Option 20 High Stability Frequency Mode FULL CARR 5 26 5 31 Reference iae eee s 7 18 Mode Index Value 5 47 5 49 Option 28 Filter 7 19 More 1 2 estos een 5 7 5 12 Option 53 Time Domain Analysis Option 7 19 5 18 5 20 Option 70 High C N 7 19 5 36 5 38 Option 75 75 Tracking Generator 7 21 5 40 5 43 Option 76 Tracking Generator 7 22 5 46 5 47 Option 77 6 GHz Tracking Generator 7 23 5 48 5 50 ODLORHS tavta 7 16 8 1 5 52 5 54 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIE 8 1 5 57 5 60 Others an tes 6 51 5 62 5 63 Others HIDE SHOW
324. the rear panel 10 kO nom DC coupling 0Vto5V Frequency reference input Connector Impedance Frequency MHz Level BNC f on the rear panel 50 O nom 1 1 544 2 048 5 10 12 8 13 13 824 14 4 15 36 15 4 16 8 19 2 19 44 19 6608 19 68 19 8 20 26 0 dBm to 16 dBm 21 4 MHz IF output Connector Impedance Output level BNC f on the rear panel 50 O nom Approximately mixer input level 10 dB at 20 MHz center fre quency Battery mount Connector Antonbauer QR mount External DC input Connector Voltage range XLR 4 11 Vto17V IEEE 488 bus connector USBI 1 on the front and rear panels RJ45 on the rear panel 10 100Base T Protocol TCP IP Video out VGA 15pin f on the rear panel U3700 Series User s Guide 7 3 U3771 U3772 Performance Specifications 7 3 U3771 U3772 Performance Specifications 7 3 1 Frequency Description Specifications Frequency range RF Input 1 Frequency band Built in preamp Frequency range RF Input 2 Frequency band 9 kHz to 8 GHz 9 kHz to 3 1 GHz 3 0 GHz to 8 GHz 10 MHz to 8 GHz U3771 03772 0 10 MHz to 31 8 GHz 10 MHz to 43 GHz 10 MHz to 3 1 GHz 3 0 GHz to 8 0 GHz Band1 N 1 7 8 GHz to 14 573 GHz 42 N 2 14 4288 GHz to 28 0 GHz Band3 N 4 27 8 GHz to 31 8 GHz Band4 N 6 03771 27 8 GHz to 43 0 Band4 6 03772 U3771 U3772 Band0 N 1 Freque
325. tion Sets the center position of the window defined by Couple to Win Window Width Sets the window width defined by Couple to Win Y Search Domain Displays the Y PK Area menu Couple to DL OFF ABV BLW Sets a peak search range on the vertical axis OFF ABV BLW Display Line ON OFF ON OFF Sets the full range as the search range Sets the range above the display line as the search range Sets the range below the display line as the search range Displays the display line Sets the position of the display line Hides the display line Couple to Line 1 OFF ABV BLW Specifies the search range for limit line 1 OFF ABV BLW Does not specify the search range related to limit line 1 Specifies the range above limit line 1 as the search range Specifies the range below limit line 1 as the search range Couple to Line 2 OFF ABV BLW Specifies the search range for limit line 2 OFF ABV BLW Does not specify the search range related to limit line 2 Specifies the range above limit line 2 as the search range Specifies the range below limit line 2 as the search range U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 10 PEAK Edit Limit Lines Displays the Limit Line menu and Limit Line table Limit Line Frequency Level Limit Line 1 2 1 Edits limit line 1 2 Edits limit line 2 Delete Entry Deletes a line on which the cursor is positioned in the limit line table Insert Entry Inserts
326. to Manual 1 000 MHz 300 000 kHz 1 000 MHz Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Pp mnz 1 000 Mi SWP Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual ATT Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual 20 00 dB 20 00 dB 20 00 dB Ref Level 0 00 dBm 0 00 dBm 0 00 dBm Preamp On Off On On Off Limit 13 00 dBm 41 00 dBm 13 00 dBm Press RETURN The spurious measurement menu is displayed 4 49 03700 Series User s Guide 4 4 4 W CDMA Spurious Measurement Measuring the spurious response 10 Press Execute ON The spurious response in each frequency band that changes after a sweep is mea sured according to the measurement conditions set in the Spurious Bands table Characters that indicate a frequency band in which the spurious response is being measured are displayed in yellow If the measured value is equal to set limit value or less the judgment is PASS If the measured value is more than the set limit value the judgment is FAIL Spurious REF 0 00 dBm 10 0 96 9 56 05 dBm ON OFF On Trace A 4 Bands Definition 5 Results 100 CENTER 515 0 MHz SPAN 970 0 MHz SWP 190 ms Spurious 6 Table No No Start Stop RBW Limit Judge 2 999 995000 MHz 1 893500000 GHz 3 1 893495000 GHz 1 919600000 GHz 4 1 919595000 GHz 1 987500000 GHz 1 000 MHz 300 000 kHz 1 000 MHz 13 00 dBm
327. trace memory in which the data to be normalized is acquired and the normalization function is performed Displays a return loss and VSWR as marker values When performing a measurement advance normalization with the SWR bridge must be executed Refer to Section 4 4 7 VSWR Measurement ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Displays Return Loss and VSWR R L 201og p VSWR 1 1 Cancels the Return Loss and VSWR displays Sets the marker to ON and displays the level difference to the reference line Hides the MKA display Displays the reference line and sets its display position Hides the reference line U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 13 FREQUENCY Displays the Frequency menu FREQUENCY Center Start Stop Frequency Offset ON OFF CF Step Size AUTO MNL More 1 2 For the U3751 U3771 and 03772 Signal Identification ON OFF Image Suppression ON OFF Center Start Stop Frequency Offset ON OFF CF Step Size AUTO MNL Channel Input yr Channels Config 5 2 13 FREQUENCY Freq Input Mode CALC TABLE Center CH ON OFF Start CH ON OFF Stop CH ON OFF Start CH Offset ON OFF Stop CH Offset ON OFF L Edit Channel Formula Edit Channel Table o Insert Line Formula 1 ON OFF Delete Line Formula 2 ON OFF Table Init Formula 3 ON OFF i Sets the center frequency The frequency range is displayed by the cen
328. tting is inappropriate the UNCAL message is dis played at the bottom to the right of the scale If the UNCAL message is displayed the measurement level accuracy cannot be guaranteed Change the following settings to cancel the UNCAL message Expand resolution bandwidth RB W Expand video bandwidth VB W Slow the sweep time Sweep Time IfRBW or VBW cannot be changed narrow the frequency span Span IMPORTANT Accurate measurement data cannot be acquired while the UNCAL message is displayed This section describes how to cancel the UNCAL message which was generated because of the fast sweep time by changing the RBW setting Required instruments This instrument Conversion adaptor N m BNC f Input cable BNC m BNC m Turning on the power supply IMPORTANT Use this instrument within the specified temperature range to perform accurate measurements Perform calibration after allowing a warm up time of 5 minutes or more 1 Verify that the AC power switch on the rear panel is set to OFF 2 Connect the included power cable to the AC power connector on the rear panel CAUTION To prevent damage do not supply a voltage and frequency which exceed the specified range to this instrument 3 Connect the power cable to an electrical outlet 4 Turnon the AC power switch on the rear panel After turning on the AC power switch wait for three seconds or more 5 Turnon the power
329. tude Lower Frequency Test Result Pass Fail Result Upper Frequency Test Result Pass Fail Result Read the Intermodulation Gap 1 READ IM DELTa Frequency Read the Intermodulation Frequency 1 READ IM REFerence Frequency Reference Read OBW Results 1 2 READ OBW Occupied Bandwidth Frequency Frequency Error Frequency Read Spectrum Emission Mask Results 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 number of rows READ SEMask channel enabled 10 channel start frequency Frequency channel stop frequency Frequency channel center frequency max power Frequency absolute power Amplitude power relative to the carrier Relative amplitude test result Pass Fail Result Read Spectrum Emission Mask Refer 1 READ SEMask RPOWer Amplitude ence Power Read All Spurious Results 1 2 3 4 Spurious band number of rows READ SPURious BAND 1 index spurious frequency Frequency spurious level Amplitude test Pass Fail Result Read Total Power 1 READ TOTPower Amplitude Read Power Spectral Density for Total 1 READ TOTPower DENSity Power per Herz Power Measurement 6 93 03700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 14 Function description Set Averaging Count Subsystem SENSe SCPI command SENSe 1 AVERage COUNt 2 1 SENSe 1 AVERage COUNt Parameter Context index Integer Query reply Int
330. ty RF attenuator UNCAL message Image Suppression Level offset Frequency offset Marker area Date Measurement function display Trace and trace detector Trace point Input impedance 75 External reference signal R3162 R3131 mode ON Displays the set and current number of times averaging is per formed Displays the sweep time setting value Displays the font color of SWP in green if SWP is set in man ual mode Displays the frequency span or stop frequency Displays HIS while the preamplifier 15 set to On Displays the attenuator setting value Displays the font color of ATT in green if 15 in the manual mode Displays UNCAL while the manual settings are inappropriate Displays IS while the image suppression function is set to On Displays LOF while the reference offset is set to On Displays FOF while the frequency offset is set to On Displays the marker frequency time and level Displays the current date and time Displays the currently performed measurement function Displays the selected trace mode and trace detector mode The trace with displayed at the beginning is the active trace For a display of two traces or more the trace with is displayed at the front Displays 501 pts while the number of trace points is set to 501 points Displays 75 while the Input Impedance is set to 75 Displays Ref EX1 while the external reference signal is selected R3131 mode
331. ual mode 1 Data setting AUTO Select the Manual mode Input ATT setting GUIDE 1 U3741 U3751 U3771 U3772 QUICK GUIDE Sweep start stop Single sweep Detection mode setting Basic operation Peak search Peak wave centering Delta marker Peak list display Frequency counter GUIDE 2 Press pi to stop a sweep and press again to start a sweep 1 EXT CFG weep Mode M Pross pd Cnr Select the Single mode race LT TRACE Honnal Select a Detection mode Alternative detection of positive and negative peaks Positive peak detection mode Negative peak detection mode Sample detection mode The average detection mode includes RMS power average and Video trace average but either can be selected in the Det Avg Mode menu 4 1 b Dataseting We Dee v Data setting Reference marker setting Move the active marker Select the ON mode Frequency and level differences between the reference marker and active marker are displayed 5 Peak List Frequency 1 Frequency P counter Y Data setting Counter position setting peak list in frequency order is displayed peak list in level order is displayed 1 Resolution 1 kHz
332. ual screen display and displays the horizontal axis in time for both the upper and lower screens The display of the horizontal axis in time is retained even if the dual screen has been canceled by using Reset Context Re set SPAN to display the horizontal axis in frequency U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options Reset Context Cancels the dual screen display Context A B Switches the active screen between A upper screen and B lower Screen A The upper screen settings can be changed B The lower screen settings can be changed U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 17 CPL Coupled function 5 2 17 CPL Coupled function Sets the resolution bandwidth RBW video bandwidth VBW and sweep time CPL RBW AUTO MNL VBW AUTO MNL Sweep Time AUTO MNL EMC EMC Filter ON OFF All Auto RBW Auto L More 1 2 RBW 200 Hz RBW 9 kHz SPAN RBW ON OFF RBW 120 kHz VBW RBW ON OFF PLL BW L Auto Medium Narrow RBW AUTO MNL Switches the RBW between auto and manual settings AUTO Automatically sets the optimum RBW according to the frequency span setting MNL The RBW be set arbitrarily VBW AUTO MNL Switches the VBW between auto and manual settings AUTO Automatically sets the optimum VBW according to the RBW setting MNL VBW can be set arbitrarily Sweep Time AUTO MNL Switches the sweep time between auto and manual settings A
333. uery this instrument generates data on the output buffer as its response that 15 a query must be sent immediately before outputting data U3700 Series User s Guide 6 5 Command Syntax 6 5 Command Syntax This chapter describes the command syntax 6 5 1 Command Syntax The command syntax is defined in the following format Header 1 Data 1 Header Two types of header are available the common command header and the simple header The common command header starts with an asterisk The simple header 15 a functionally independent command that has no hierarchical structure If a question mark is attached immediately after a header it becomes a query command 2 Spaces Spaces may be used to separate headers from data to ease readability 3 Data When the command requires more than one data item list these data items by delimiting them with commas A space may be inserted before or after the comma For more information on data types refer to Section 6 5 2 Data Formats 4 Writing more than one command You can write multiple commands by delimiting them with semicolons in one line U3700 Series User s Guide 6 5 2 Data Formats 6 5 2 Data Formats This instrument uses the following data formats for the input and output data 1 Numeric data There are three formats for numeric data as shown below When entering numeric v
334. unction 4 2 4 3 Key dU 4 3 4 4 Input and Output Connectors Block eese 4 4 4 5 Operation Key Block uu eno er REEL Ue ern Ea En 4 5 4 6 Soreen Display ee ona o mani ntes cientes n ARRIERE 4 7 4 7 Rear Paol C 4 9 4 8 Initial Setting Seref tr dentin auntie 4 14 4 9 Connecting CAL Signal RF INPUTI connector 4 15 4 10 Connecting the CAL Signal RF INPUT2 connector 4 16 4 11 Connecting the CAL 4 18 4 12 Setting the Center Frequency ii uu L nr Hr RR Fee dwar 4 19 4 13 Completing the Setting of the measurement conditions 4 19 4 14 Displaying the Peak Search 2202 asas re ree eee indo 4 20 4 15 Measuring the Difference of Frequency and Level by Using the Delta Marker 4 21 4 16 Connecting the CAL Signal imet P E RE 4 23 4 17 Displaying the UNCAL Message 4 24 4 18 Canceling the UNCAL Message trc ec e o ner a dece ete i ied naa 4 24 4 19 Connecting the TG Mesurement 4 31 4 20 Connecting the Unit Under Test 4 33 4 21 Measurement Display for Channel Power sess ene 4 52 4 22 M
335. ut of range The system has adjusted auto matically the value Some channel table parameters are out of range The system has adjusted automatically the value Some limit line table parameters are out of range The system has adjusted automatically the value The table is full Impossible to insert a new item No formula for this channel number Channel number not in table The pass fail table is empty No peak detected The bandwidth of the SEM item is null Insertion forbidden The current environment does not authorize this command There is no normalization data available for the selected trace The ElectroMagnetic Compatibility option is required The target trace is not available in this environment for the store functional ity The Window sweep mode is not allowed if a measure is active The Signal Track is not allowed when Image Suppression is active This functionality is not allowed if the Tracking Generator is not active This functionality is not allowed 1f the Reference Object in Delta mode is not the Ref Marker The Tracking Generator is out of band Please change the stop frequency or and TG frequency offset Stop Freq TG freq offset lt 3 1 GHz This functionality is not allowed 1f Channel or Average or Total Power Mea sure is active The Tracking Generator option is required This functionality 1s not allowed on S
336. ve Switches the active screen RF2 The RF2 upper window settings can be changed lower window settings can be changed gt Rename File Remove File Write Protect ON OFF Copy All to Flash to USB r L More 1 2 gt Auto name Radix Auto name Index File Format BIN XML Format Media Saves the items specified in Items to the memory device specified in Media The format in which to save data can be selected from either binary dat or XML eXtensible Markup Language xml File size For saving the setting data BIN Approximately 4 8 KB XML Approximately 16 KB NOTE Only binary data can be saved in the internal memory 03700 Series User s Guide 5 2 3 FILE Save as Specifies the filename and saves the file Displays the Save As window Media USB Device 0 Partition 0 8 3 Free 237 7 Files File Info test02 dat File Name Size test02 dat 5 0 KB Setup test03 dat 5 0 Traces Context Traces Context B Limit Lines Channel ACP SEM Spurious 2 3 IC test02 dat Save Cancel File Control Displays the File Control menu and Files window Media USB Device 0 Partition 0 8 3 MB Free 237 7 MB Info advan11 dat File ES REG Cu v ON Traces Context Traces Context Limit Lines Channel ACP SEM Spurious CEN 11 4 Rename File Changes the selected filename
337. version loss of the ZT 130NC 75 50 O impedance converter is added automatically NOTE For OPTIS 75 Q option Input Impedance is fixed at 75 2 This impedance cannot be changed to 50 2 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 15 AMPLITUDE High Sensitivity ON OFF Correction Factor ON OFF Edit Corr Factor Insert Delete Init Table Round Grid Values ON OFF Switches the high sensitivity input function ON and OFF ON Turns on the built in preamp The preamp gain is corrected at each frequency and it does not need to be considered in level measurements OFF Turns off the built in preamp ON Corrects the display level according to the correction table OFF Cancels the correction based on the correction data Displays the Corr Factor menu and the correction table A frequency of up to 400 GHz and a level of 100 dB can be set Inserts a line in the correction table Deletes a line on which the cursor is positioned in the correction table Clears all settings in the correction table ON Displays the vertical scale by rounding off the Ref Level setting value to integers OFF Displays the vertical scale according to the Ref Level setting value U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 16 Sweep Mode SGL CNT Trigger Gated Sweep Measuring Window Limit Lines Ref Disp Lines Zoom and Contexts a 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options EXT CFG Extended
338. y Block Selects a measurement such as Channel Power OBW or ACP Selects a measurement such as Noise Hz X dB down or Counter Allocates soft menu keys to be used Sets the trace function Displays the marker Searches for a peak on a trace Sets the values of the marker to that of another function Sets the tracking generator Option Sets the center frequency Sets the frequency span Sets the level Sets the sweep mode and trigger Sets the RBW VBW and sweep time 4 5 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 1 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Front Panel 14 Keypad There are numeric keys 0 to 9 and decimal point key 15 Backspace key Enters the minus sign and corrects entered data 16 Unit key Selects a unit and determines the entered value GHz Sets a unit of GHz dBm or dB MHz Sets a unit of MHz dBm sec V or W kHz Sets a unit of KHz mV msec or mW Hz Sets a unit of Hz usec uV or uW Can also be used as the ENTER key 17 Step key Enters data at each step 18 Data knob Fine tunes the entered data 19 START STOP key Starts or stops the sweep 4 6 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 2 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Screen 4 1 2 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Screen This section describes the names and functions of each part on the screen of this instrument 25 24 23 22 4 20 18 19 N 1 Ref EXT 75 501 pts Tuesday 3 Oct 2006 15 01 Frequency 17 REF
339. y C TBA TBB TBC TBA TBB TBC 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Table 6 7 Absolute Value Output Format I O format Description Binary format FORM3 32 bit floating point DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD EOI 1 Delimiter Low order byte Low order byte for 1st point for 1001 501st point High order byte High order byte for 1st point for 1001 501st point For DDDDDDDD 12345678 data is output in order from 12345678 FORMA DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD EOI Delimiter High order byte High order byte for Ist point for 1001 501st point Low order byte Low order byte for 1st point for 1001 501st point For DDDDDDDD 12345678 data is output in order from 78563412 Each point data is 32 bit 4 bytes floating point type EOI signal is attached at the end of the data for continuous 1001 points Output GPIB code Memory A TBA Memory B TBB Memory C TBC 6 65 03700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Example 1 Read the trace data in ASCII format Dim tr 1000 Dim i As Integer Dim res As String Call ibclr spa Call ibwrt spa Call ibwrt spa TAA For i tr i Call ibrd spa tr i res res tr 6 Str i amp DoEvents Next i RichTextBoxl Text res Example 2 Dim tr 1000 As Integer j Dim i Integer Dim res As String Dim Rslt As Integer Call Call ibclr spa ibconf
340. y High InH nth level High lt DLM gt Delimiter 2 n Number of measurement points 0 thru 15 m Number of spurious signal 0 thru 10 f Spurious frequency l Spurious level j Spurious judgment result 0 Pass 1 Fail lt DLM gt Delimiter 6 45 03700 Series User s Guide 6 8 15 EMC 6 8 15 EMC Function Correction Factor Command EXE SET Query GET Code CR Argument Format ON OFF Output Format Correction Factor Table Input CRIN Frequency Level DB Correction Factor Table Deletion CRDEL EMC Trace Detection Normal Peak EMCON EMCDET NRMJOFF PEAK ON EMCON EMCDET 0 Normal 3 Peak EMC BW Auto 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz 6 8 16 Function QPAUTO QA 1 QP2 QP3 Calibration Command EXE SET QPAUTO QA 0 Auto 1 200 Hz 2 9kHz 3 120 kHz 4 1 MHz Query GET Code Argument Format Code Output Format Calibration All CLALL RFCI RFC2 Total Gain Calibration CLGAIN RFC1 RFC2 CLGAIN 1 RFC2 Integer 0 OK gt 0 Warning lt 0 Error RBW Calibration CLRBW CLRBW Integer 0 OK gt 0 Warning lt 0 Error PBW Calibration 6 46 CLPBW CLPBW Integer 0 OK gt 0 Warming lt 0 Error 03700 Series User s Guide Function ATT step Calibration Command EXE SET 6 8 17 S
341. y block 3 PHONE connector 4 USB connector 5 Color LCD 6 Softkey block Switches the power supply between ON and OFF The lamp turns on while the power turns on The keys in this block set the extended functions 8 ohm earphone terminal for demodulated AM FM audio signals Enables a memory device or printer to be connected Displays measurement data or setting conditions The keys in this block select items from the soft menu on the dis play 4 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 1 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Front Panel 4 2 7 Input connector lamp Indicates the input connector is enabled U3741 U3751 Only RF INPUT 1 is enabled 8 Input and output connectors block The connectors in this block are used in measurements 9 Operation key block The keys in this block are used for changing settings Leck 1 CE APPLI 4 7 HELP suet Figure 4 2 Extended Function Key Block 1 Key lock key with lamp 2 LOCAL key REMOTE lamp 3 SYSTEM setting Preset key 4 APPLICATION key 5 FILE key 6 COPY key 7 HELP key 8 SHIFT key with lamp Locks the key input Toggles the key lock between ON and OFF The lamp turns on while the key input is locked Cancels the remote control function The lamp turns on when the instrument is in the remote state Sets the operational conditions of an interface Initializes the settings of this instrument Switches between the appli
342. z Third order intermodulation distortion TOT Frequency range gt 20 MHz Preamp Off Mixer input level 20 dBm Frequency separation 200 kHz 60 dBc Image responses Multiple responses and Out of band responses 60 dBc Mixer input level 20 dBm Residual responses 74 Frequency gt 1 MHz Preamp Off 90 dBm 03700 Series User s Guide 7 1 6 Input and Output 7 1 6 Input and Output Description Specifications RF input Connector Impedance VSWR Type N f on the front panel 50 O nom Input attenuator 2 10 dB lt 1 51 Calibration signal output Connector Impedance Frequency Level BNC f on the front panel 50 nom 20 MHz 20 dBm External trigger input Connector Impedance Trigger level BNC f on the rear panel 10 nom coupling 0Vto5V Frequency reference input Connector Impedance Frequency MHz Level BNC f on the rear panel 50 O nom 1 1 544 2 048 5 10 12 8 13 13 824 14 4 15 36 15 4 16 8 19 2 19 44 19 6608 19 68 19 8 20 26 0 dBm to 16 dBm 21 4 MHz IF output Connector Impedance Output level BNC f on the rear panel 50 nom Approximately mixer input level 10 dB at 20 MHz center fre quency Battery mount Connector Antonbauer QR mount External DC input Connector Voltage range XLR 4 11 Vto17V IEEE 488 bus connector USBI 1 on the front and rear p
343. ze Capture Normz Data Reference Line ON OFF Normalize Correction ON OFF VSWR ON OFF Delta Ref Line ON OFF Reference Line ON OFF TG ON OFF ON Turns on a tracking generator OFF Turns off the tracking generator TG Level Sets the output level of the tracking generator Setting range 0 dBm to 30 dBm 77 0 dBm to 60 dBm OPT76 TG Level Offset ON OFF Switches the TG level offset function ON and OFF ON The offset level can be set in the range of 0 100 0 dB The relationship between the displayed TG level set TG level and offset is as follows Displayed TG level Set TG level Offset OFF Cancels the offset function TG Freq Offset ON OFF Adds the offset frequency to the TG output frequency It functions with OPT76 ON The offset frequency can be set in the range of 0 Hz to 1 GHz and the resolution of approx kHz The output frequency is up to 3 GHz even if adding the offset frequency OFF Cancels the offset function Normalize Displays the TG Normz menu Capture Normz Data Acquires the normalization data at the position of the reference line Normalize Correction ON OFF ON Normalizes the measurement data by using the normalization data Only trace A can be normalized OFF Cancels the normalization function U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 12 TG Option Trace A B C VSWR ON OFF Delta Ref Line ON OFF Reference Line ON OFF Selects the

ADVANTEST U3741 U3751 U3771 U3772 Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents